Home

H8S/2168 E6000 Emulator Users Manual

1. Figure 5 88 Trace Filter Dialog Box Area Page Don t care Detects no area condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified area condition not available when Don t care has been checked Note Available area conditions vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 270 RENESAS 6 Status page Select the status of a bus The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes Razo O PROG DATA REFRESH DMAC DTC OTHER Cancel Apply Figure 5 89 Trace Filter Dialog Box Status Page Don t care Detects no bus condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified bus condition not available when Don t care has been checked Note Available bus conditions vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 271 RENESAS 7 Probes page Select the status of four probe signals The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter xj General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes Rozo T D rm Setting Probe4 Don t care Probe3 Don t care Probe2 Don t care Y Probel Dont
2. Default MyDebug MyOptimized Configuration Configuration Configuration I t I I t A Debug ON Debug ON Debug OFF Optimize OFF Optimize OFF Optimize ON List File YES H List File NO UJ List File NO Cc Source Files val vai A Debug OFF Debug ON Debug OFF Optimize OFF Optimize OFF Optimize ON List File YES H List File NO LU List File NO Assembler Source Files C MyProject Default C MyProject MyDebug C MyProject MyOptimized Figure 2 14 Configurations and File Options 24 RENESAS 2 5 1 Selecting a Configuration The current configuration can be set in two ways Either 1 Select it from the drop down list box figure 2 15 in the toolbar l Release Release Figure 2 15 Toolbar Selection or 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations This will invoke the Build Configurations Dialog figure 2 16 Build Configurations 21x Build configurations Cancel Add Hemave Current configuration Debua Figure 2 16 Build Configurations Dialog 2 Select the configuration that you want to use from the Current configuration drop down list 3 Click OK to set the configuration 25 RENESAS 2 5 2 Adding and Deleting Configurations You can add a new configuration by copying settings from another configuration or delete a configuration These three tasks are descri
3. To continue running from the current PC address click the Go toolbar button or choose Debug gt Go To continue running from a specified address which is not the stop address change the PC value in one of the following ways and click the Go toolbar button E or choose Debug gt Go e Change the PC value in the Register window Refer to section 5 4 3 Modifying Register Contents e Place the text cursor not the mouse cursor to a target line in the Source or Disassembly window and choose Set PC Here from the popup menu 5 11 3 Running to the Cursor Sometimes as you are going through your application you may want to run only a small section of code that would require many single steps to execute You can do this using the Go To Cursor feature gt How to use the Go To Cursor 1 Make sure that a Source or Disassembly window is open showing the address at which you wish to stop 2 Position the text cursor on the address at which you wish to stop by either clicking in the Address field or using the cursor keys 3 Choose Go To Cursor from the popup menu The debugging platform will run your code from the current PC value until it reaches the address indicated by the cursor s position Notes 1 If your program never executes the code at this address the program will not stop If this happens code execution can be stopped by pressing the Esc key choosing Debug gt Halt or clicking o
4. Figure 1 20 Welcome Dialog To create a new workspace select Create a new project workspace and click OK To open one of recent project workspaces select Open a recent project workspace select a workspace from the drop down list and click OK The recent project workspace list displays the same information as that seen in the workspace most recently used file list This list appears on the file menu To open a workspace by specifying a workspace file HWS file select Browse to another project workspace and click OK To register a tool to or unregister a tool from the HEW click the Administration button see chapter 5 Tool Administration for details Click the Cancel button to use the HEW without opening a workspace 1 5 Exiting the HEW The HEW can be exited by selecting File gt Exit pressing ALT F4 or by selecting the close option from the system menu To open the system menu click the icon at the upper left corner of the HEW title bar If a workspace is open then the same workspace closedown procedure is followed as described in the previous section 1 6 Component System Overview The HEW allows the user to extend the HEW functionality by adding additional components to the system This is achieved by registering the component in the Tools Administration dialog box These components can add windows menus and toolbars to the HEW system Examples of the component
5. Performance Ana 10 o x No Name Condition Rate RUN TIME MAX MIN TIME Count l PAL Range H 00001038 H 00001108 9 OOh OOmin 00s 055ms 764us 160ns 1234 2 Pa2 PtoP H 00002068 H 000020D4 25 O0h OOmin 00s 147ms 682us 880ns OOh OOmin 1234 3 PAS RtoR H 00001038 H 00001108 65 O0h OOmin 00s 38lms 580us 480ns 2468 H 00002068 H 00002138 Figure 5 105 Performance Analysis Window This window displays the rate of execution time in the area selected by the user during the last program run in percentages histogram or numerical values It is possible to hide any column not necessary in the Performance Analysis window Selecting a column you want to hide from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the header column hides that column To display the hidden column select the column from the said popup menu again 289 RENESAS 5 20 2 Setting Conditions for Measurement Conditions for measurement can be displayed and changed in the Performance Analysis window Select a point where a condition is to be set and then select Set from the popup menu to display the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box Select either from the following five modes as the condition by the Measurement Method option Table 5 9 Conditions for Measurement Measurement Method Measurement Method Option Time Of Specified Range Measurement Start Point To End Point Measurement Start Range T
6. Figure 5 65 Event Window Trigger Sheet Selecting Add or the event point and Edit from the popup menu in this window displays the Set Address For Trigger dialog box Set Addr rigger 2 x Address ioger H 00FFDEE0 M Trigger Cancel M Trigger2 H 00FFD404 M Trigger3 Hro00011 40 M Triggers HOOFFEFEC Figure 5 66 Set Address For Trigger Dialog Box This dialog box allows the user to specify the address to be accessed as the trigger output condition during the user program execution Enable or disable the trigger output point by checking the check box on the left in the screen Trigger Enables the output of trigger channel 1 Trigger2 Enables the output of trigger channel 2 Trigger3 Enables the output of trigger channel 3 Trigger4 Enables the output of trigger channel 4 Address Sets the address condition of the channel 242 RENESAS Notes 1 When the condition set for the trigger output 1 to 4 is satisfied the high level signal will be output from the corresponding pin 1 to 4 of the external probe 2 EXT2 during reading or writing 2 Some emulators may not support the trigger point For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 5 15 9 Editing Event Points Handlings for settings other than PC breakpoints event points and trigger points are common The following describes examples of such
7. 1 Check all components against the component list after unpacking the emulator 2 Never place heavy objects on the casing Bo ON ge Do not place the emulator in places where e The temperature becomes high such as in direct sunlight or near a heater For details refer to section 1 3 Environmental Conditions e The temperature or humidity changes greatly e There is a lot of dust e There is a lot of vibration For details refer to section 1 3 Environmental Conditions Protect the emulator from excessive impacts and stresses Only supply the specified voltage and power supply frequency When moving the emulator take care not to vibrate or damage it After connecting the cable check that it is connected correctly For details refer to section 2 Preparation before Use Supply power to the connected equipment after connecting all cables For the supplying procedures refer to section 2 7 System Check Cables must not be connected or disconnected while the power is on 136 RENESAS 1 3 Environmental Conditions CAUTION Failure to do so will cause illegal operation in the user system the emulator product and the user program Observe the conditions listed in table 1 1 when using the emulator Table 1 1 Environmental Conditions Item Specifications Temperature Operating 10 C to 35 C Storage 10 to 50 C Humidity Operating 35 RH to 80 RH no condensation Storage 35 RH to
8. i Program Enable PC H 00001070 Tutorial cpp 44 Break A gt f Breakpoint A Event A Trigger Figure 6 10 Event Window The popup menu opened by clicking the Event window with the right hand mouse button allows the user to set or change breakpoints define new breakpoints and delete enable or disable breakpoints 307 RENESAS 6 8 Referring to Symbols The Label window can be used to display the information on symbols in modules Select Label from the Symbol submenu of the View menu The Label window is displayed so that the user can refer to the addresses of symbols in modules Ee HL XI BP Address Name H 00000400 PowerON_Reset H 00001000 _sbrk H 00001034 _main H 00001038 tutoriali H 00001104 _abort H 0000110C __INITSCT H o00001122 loopl H o0000112C loop H oOO0112E next_loopZ H 00001132 next_loopl H oo0001144 loop3 H o00001152 loop4 H o00001158 next_loop4 H oooo0115C next_loop3 H 00001168 operator new unsigned long H OOOO11BE __CALL INIT H OOOO11E0 __CALL_END H oooo1lE4 operator delete void H OOOO1LEE _rand H 00001226 _srand H 00001232 DIVL 3 H 00000123C not_negX H 00001244 not_negY H ooo0124E not_negZ Figure 6 11 Label Window 308 RENESAS 6 9 Viewing Memory When the label name is specified the user can view the memory contents that the label has been registered in the Memory window For example to view the memory conten
9. Open with drop list These are listed below e Editor e None e Other e Windows default If the editor is selected the open file function in the workspace window causes the file to be opened in the HEW editor If none is selected then the open operation is disabled when the open file function is attempted Selecting Other allows you to configure an another tool for the open file operation See To associate an application with a file group for more details If the Windows default option is selected then the open file function in the workspace window passes the open file to the Windows operating system This then selects the default behavior for this file extension as defined in Windows Explorer 6 Click OK to add the extension to the File Extensions list Add File Extension Eile extension Ae Cancel File group Extension belongs to an existing group Absolute file C Extension belongs to a new group M Associated application Open Absolute file with Windows default Figure 2 9 Add File Extension Dialog New Group RENESAS If you want to create a new extension because your project uses a different extension from those accepted by the HEW For example a phase might by default use the extension asm but the HEW only recognizes src Then you need to create a new extension and add it to an existing file group This
10. Selecting Lock Refresh again from the popup menu cancels the stopped state 5 9 4 Deleting the Monitor Settings Selecting Close from the popup menu of the Monitor window to be deleted closes the Monitor window and deletes the monitor settings 5 9 5 Monitoring Variables Using the Watch window refers to the value of any variables When the address of the variable registered in the Watch window exists within the monitoring range that has been set by the Monitor function the value of the variable can be updated and displayed This function allows checking the content of a variable without affecting the realtime operation For the Watch window refer to section 5 14 3 Watch Window 205 RENESAS 5 9 6 Hiding the Monitor Window When using the Monitor function to monitor the value of a variable from the Watch window hide the Monitor window for the effective use of the screen The current monitoring information is listed as the submenu when selecting Display gt CPU gt Monitor The list consists of the Monitor window name and the address to start monitoring When the left of the list is checked the Monitor window is being displayed Selecting items of the Monitor window you want to hide from the monitor setting list displays no Monitor window and removes the check mark at the left of the list To display the Monitor window again select the hidden the Monitor window J Monitor Se
11. To satisfy the condition of the event point having an arm event the arm event must be in the state where the condition is satisfied or not when No occurrence of is selected When multiple arm events exist on one event point one of the arm events must be in the state where the condition is satisfied or not when No occurrence of selected to satisfy the condition of the event point As the condition of the arm event on one event point either of the states where the condition is satisfied or not should be set To reset an event point with a reset event the condition of the reset event must be satisfied While the condition of the reset point is satisfied no event point is reset even if the condition of the reset event is satisfied again When multiple reset events exist on one event point the event point is reset when the condition of one of reset events is satisfied 241 RENESAS 5 15 8 Setting Trigger Points The trigger point is an event to output a trigger when the specified address has been accessed Up to four trigger points can be set by using the trigger outputs four channels on the bus monitoring circuit of the emulator The settings of the trigger point are displayed and modified on the Trigger sheet n 1 Address H OOFFDEEO Trigger output XT 2 2 Enable ddress H 00FFD404 Trigger output XT 2 3 Enable Address H 00001140 Trigger output XT 2 4 Enable ddress H 00FFEF8C Trigger output Breakpoint
12. A PC Break is set 5 gt PC location 183 RENESAS gt To switch off a column in all source files Click the right hand mouse button on the Editor window Click the Define Column Format menu item The Global Editor Column States dialog box is displayed A check box indicates whether the column is enabled or not If it is checked the column is enabled If the check box is gray the column is enabled in some files and disabled in others 5 Click the OK button for the new column settings to take effect ae Global Editor Column States EXT 2 Trigger Event Editor Cancel Source ddress Figure 5 7 Global Editor Column States Dialog Box gt To switch off a column in one source file 1 Click the right hand mouse button on the Editor window which contains the column you want to remove to display the popup menu 2 Click the Columns menu item to display a cascaded menu item The columns are displayed in this popup menu If a column is enabled it has a tick mark next to its name Clicking the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not 184 RENESAS 5 2 3 Viewing the Assembly Language Code Click the right hand mouse button on the Source window to open the popup menu and select Go to Disassembly to open the Disassembly window at the same address as that for the current Source window If you do not have a source file but wish to view code in the
13. Bit Pivel 8bit Index Color Sampling 44 4 z C BGR C YCbCr Format l chunky z m Buffer Infomation Data Address JH 00000000 Palette Address Width Height Size Pixel Width z Height ft Buffer Size H 00000000 Byte m View Information View Mode 5_ Position Full Size Pasition 0 Part Size Y Position 0 r Start Position Top Width m Width Heiaht Size Pre 4 0 C Bottom aie 0 Figure 5 98 Image Properties Dialog Box The Image Properties dialog box is used to specify the display method of the Image View window 280 RENESAS The following items are to be specified Color Information Specifies the color information of the image to be displayed Mode Specifies the format MONOCHROME Displays in black and white RGB Displayed in R red G green and B blue Displayed in B blue G green and R red Displayed by Y brightness Cb color difference in blue and Cr color difference in red BGR YCbCr Bit Pixel Specifies Bit Pixel according to the selected Mode Valid when RGB or BGR is selected Sampling Specifies the format of sampling Valid when YCbCr is selected Format Specifies Chunky planar Valid when YCbCr is selected Buffer Information Specifies the area to store data size and the address of the palette Data Address Speci
14. Blue outline R The variable s address is within the range that has been set for the monitoring function and the data is readable by using the monitoring function Blue R An updated value of the data at this location has been read by the monitoring function Black outline R The variable s address is outside the range that has been set for the monitoring function and the data is not readable by using the monitoring function Black R A value has been updated by reading the normal data Notes 1 This function can be set per variable or per element or body for structures of data 2 The color of an R in the Name column changes according to the trace and monitoring settings 3 The information is lost when it is scrolled out of the Watch window and when the window is closed 4 A variable that is allocated to a register cannot be selected for monitoring 225 RENESAS Adding a Watch Item Use the Add Watch dialog box in the Watch window to add Watch items to the Watch window gt To use Add Watch from a Watch window Open the Watch window Choose Add Watch from the popup menu The Add Watch dialog box opens Add Watch Variable or expression OK o a Figure 5 53 Add Watch Dialog Box Enter the name of the variable that you wish to watch and click OK The variable is added to the Watch window A variable can be dragged from the Source window and dropped into the Watch window
15. The memory configuration of the device being emulated is displayed by the Memory sheet in the Status window Note Some emulators may not support the emulation memory or the memory mapping function For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 179 RENESAS 5 1 5 Changing the Memory Map Setting Clicking the Add button on the Memory Mapping dialog box or clicking the Modify button after selecting the information on the memory map setting you want to change opens the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box Memory Mapping fom Carel To eT Setting On Chip Read write v Figure 5 5 Edit Memory Mapping Dialog Box Use this dialog box to change the address range and attributes of a memory map From Enter the start address of the map range To Enter the end address of the map range Setting Enter the memory map setting The choices given are listed below The User external memory and Emulator emulation memory attributes can be modified 180 On chip Read write Cannot be changed On chip Read only Cannot be changed On chip Guarded Cannot be changed User Read write Cannot be selected when the single chip mode is selected User Read only Cannot be selected when the single chip mode is selected User Guarded Emulator Read write Emulator Read only Emulator Guarded RENESAS 5 2 Downloading a Program This section de
16. Unregister button A dialog will be invoked which asks you to confirm this action Click Yes to confirm the action Note Unregistering a component does not remove its installation from hard disk It simply removes the information which the HEW was storing about that component i e it disconnects it from the HEW The action can be easily reversed at anytime by registering the tool see above If you want to remove a component from the hard disk i e uninstall a component then refer to the section Uninstalling Components later in this chapter 86 RENESAS 5 5 Viewing and Editing Component Properties To view information regarding a component select it from the Registered components list and then click the Properties button The properties dialog will be displayed with the General tab selected figure 5 4 This tab displays the name version and location of the selected component None of the information on this tab is editable Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 5 1 0 Properties AEG Information Environment Name Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Standard Version 5 1 0 Location c hew Toolchains Hitachi SH4510 Figure 5 4 Properties Dialog General Tab Select the Information tab to view any information about the component figure 5 5 This may include copyright information enhancements bug fixes user notes and so on Hitachi SuperH RISC engine St
17. Workspace tab of the Options dialog 5 Click OK to save the description on the Information dialog Click the Cancel button not to save the description Workspace Properties 2 xi Name demo Location C hew2 project r8 demo demo hws Last modified 16 08 58 Thursday August 16 2001 Cancel CPU family SuperH RISC engine Tool chain Hitachi SuperH Standard Information No workspace information available M Show workspace information on workspace open Figure 6 10 Workspace Properties Dialog When a workspace is opened the High performance Embedded Workshop can display this information so that it is possible to determine whether the workspace is the desired workspace To display this information on opening a workspace set the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace check box 6 4 4 Save workspace before executing any tools To force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving the current workspace before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control commands set the Save workspace before executing any phases check box 6 4 5 Prompt before saving workspace In addition to the above check box set this to prompt before saving 100 RENESAS 6 4 6 Default directory for new workspaces When a new workspace is created the High performance Embedded Workshop invokes the New Workspace dialog One
18. a component that provides key functionality in a certain area of the HEW system Object reader etc These components cannot be unregistered when installed e g The HEW builder debugger and flash support RENESAS 83 5 1 Tool Locations The HEW maintains the locations of HEW compatible components automatically as each new tool is installed After installation the HEW stores information about the component including its location this is referred to as registration Although initial registration is automatic during the course of development or if you want to manage the tools being used in your projects more effectively you may need to register components yourself The remainder of this chapter discusses registration and how it affects you 5 2 HEW Registration Files HRF When a HEW compatible component i e toolchain system tool or utility phase is installed part of its installation will include a file with the extension HRF figure 5 2 i This file named a HEW Registration File describes the component to the HEW The process of registration refers to loading a component s HRF file into the tools administration dialog figure 5 2 11 i INSTALL ii REGISTER a CA a CA MyTool m MyTool pm MYTOOL HRF MYTOOL HRF aa bin f mf bin HEW A etc a etc V help jy help Figure 5 2 HRF File Location and Regist
19. button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time The results of the search are shown in the Located Tools which can be uninstalled list Select a component and click Uninstall to uninstall a component Click Exit to exit the dialog A component may only be uninstalled if it is not currently registered with the HEW If you attempt to uninstall a tool which is registered then the dialog shown in figure 5 9 will be displayed In such a case you must return to the Tools Administration dialog via Tools gt Administration unregister the tool and then invoke the tool uninstaller again 89 RENESAS Hitachi Embedd AN Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 7 1 1 0 is currently registered you may not uninstall a tool that is registered with HEW Please use the administration dialog to unregister the Tool Figure 5 9 Unable to Uninstall Tool Tf a tool is not registered with the HEW then the dialog shown in figure 5 10 will be displayed when the Unregister button is clicked This confirmation dialog displays all of the files and folders that will be deleted If you are certain that these files and folders can be deleted then click the Yes button To abort the uninstall click the No or Cancel buttons Confirmation The following files and folders will be deleted c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH451 O she toolchai
20. gt To define a command 1 Enter the full path of the command into the Version control executable field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 2 Enter the arguments for the command into the Arguments field 3 Enter the initial directory in which you would like to run the executable from into the Initial directory field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button In most cases this should be set to the FILEDIR placeholder i e execute the command from the same directory as the file 4 Set the Executable return code options as described in the following section 5 Click OK to define the new command 8 2 1 Executable return code If the return code of the command s can be used to indicate a failure then you should select the Command has failed if the return code is option and set the two fields to the right as required If the Command has failed if the return code is option is selected then the HEW will check the return code of each command to determine whether a failure occurred If so no further commands will be executed and any other processes which would follow the commands e g build will not be executed If the Return code of tool is not meaningful option is selected then the HEW will not check the return code of each Consequently all commands will execute regardless 117 RENESAS 8 3 Specifying Arguments I
21. mem x General Address Data RAw Area Status Probes S mazo O ro Setting String PROG 7 Cancel Apply Figure 5 80 Trace Find Dialog Box Status Page Don t care Detects no bus condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified bus condition String Select a bus condition not available when Don t care has been checked Note Available bus conditions vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 260 RENESAS 7 Probes page Select the status of four probe signals The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired mem x General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes Rozo a r Setting Probe4 Don t care Probe3 Dont care 7 Probe2 Dont care 7 Probet Dont care 7 Cancel Apply Figure 5 81 Trace Find Dialog Box Probes Page Don t care Detects no probe signal condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified probe signal condition Probe4 to Probe1 Select probe conditions not available when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected probe condition High The status of the probe signal is high Low The status of the probe signal is low 261 RENESAS 8 IRQ7 0 page Select the status of IRQ signals The selection is not available when a time stamp
22. 340 RENESAS 6 18 Performance Measurement Function Performance measurement by the emulator is in the following modes e Time Of Specified Range Measurement e Start Point To End Point Measurement e Start Range To End Range Measurement e Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement e Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement In this tutorial we describe the Time Of Specified Range Measurement 6 18 1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement 1 Select Performance Analysis from the Performance submenu of the View menu to display the Select Performance Analysis Type dialog box Performance Analysis Type Performance Analysis E6000 Performance Analysis Cancel Figure 6 62 Select Performance Analysis Type Dialog Box 2 Select E6000 Performance Analysis from the Performance Analysis combo box in the Select Performance Analysis Type dialog box and click the OK button The Performance Analysis window will be displayed Performance i o x Condition MAX NIN TIME JANANE A Figure 6 63 Performance Analysis Window 341 RENESAS 3 Select the line of the Performance Analysis window that has 1 in its No column and click the right hand mouse button to display a popup menu Select Set from this popup menu to display the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box Performance Anal Measurement Method PA1 Time OF Specified Range Measurem
23. Note Ifthe variable that you have added is a local variable that is not currently in scope the HEW will add it to the Watch window but its value will be blank or set to a question mark Expanding a Watch Item If a watch item is a pointer array or structure then you will see a plus sign expansion indicator to left of its name this means that you can expand the watch item To expand a watch item double click on it The item expands to show the elements in the case of structures and arrays or data value in the case of pointers indented by one tab stop and the plus sign changes to a minus sign If the elements of the watch item also contain pointers structures or arrays then they will also have expansion indicators next to them Expansion Watch loj x indicator a i OxOO0ffef80 ol otha R 0 H OOOOOKE OxOOffef80 long R i H 000015fb 0x00ffef84 long R 2 H 0000167e 0x00ffef88 long R 3 H 00001 cfb OxO0ffefSe long R 4 H 00002781 Ox00ffef90 long R 5 H 00003f54 0x00ffef94 long R 6 H 000041c6 0x00ffef38 long R 7 H 0000446b Ox00ffefSc long R 8 H 000059e2 0x00ffefa0 long R 9 H 0000794b Ox00ffefa4 long Ra Ox0Offef80 flong 10 c m m Figure 5 54 Expanding a Watch Item To collapse an expanded watch item double click on the item again The item s elements will collapse back to the single item and the minus sign changes
24. When the user program is stopped the states of all the event points transit to that where no condition is satisfied When an event point must be in the state where its condition is satisfied or not when No occurrence of is selected as the satisfaction condition of another event point this event point is called the arm event An event point can reset the tested states of conditions of other event points or itself by satisfying the condition This event point is called a reset event A reset event resets event points regardless of their states where the condition is satisfied or not e g resetting the pass count Select an event point from the Event combo box To set an arm event on the selected event point select Is Armed By and check the box corresponding to each event The No occurrence of check box is used to set a condition that the arm event is in the state where its condition is not satisfied To set a reset event on the selected event point select Is Reset By and check the box corresponding to each event At the bottom of the screen is a diagram showing the current sequencing of the events figure 5 64 The S input sets arms an event and the R input resets it The legend S indicates the event is set armed by the non occurrence of the input events Figure 5 64 is an example that Ch1 is the arm event for Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 Ch3 is the arm event for Ch4 Ch2 and Ch4 are the reset events for Chl and Ch2 respectively
25. folder figure 2 20 1 2 8 Configuring the Workspace Window If you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the Projects tab of the Workspace window a pop up menu will be invoked Select the Configure View menu option to modify the way in which information is displayed The following four sections detail the effect of each option on the Configure View dialog 2 8 1 Show Dependencies under Each File If you select Show dependencies under each file the dependent files are shown under the including source file as a flat structure i e the files themselves become folders figure 2 20 ii If this option is not selected then a separate folder contains all dependencies figure 2 20 1 ii E F demo demo Project Projecti amp Project Files E cOsre E o0 sro main c E mainc filelh E sbrk c file2h E sh_hwetg c sbrk c E sh_intv sre sh_hwete c Dependencies sh_intv sre E filet E file2 h E Projects lt Navigation E Projects lt Navigation Figure 2 20 Dependencies under Each File 30 RENESAS 2 8 2 Show Standard Library Includes By default any dependent files found in standard include paths will not be shown figure 2 21 i For example in C code if you write an include statement such as include lt stdio h gt then stdio h will not be list
26. list 3 Click the Remove button to remove the selected files or click Remove All to remove all project files 4 Click OK to remove the files from the project gt To remove selected files from a project 1 Select the files which you want to remove in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Multiple files can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key 2 Press the DEL key The files will be removed 16 RENESAS 2 2 3 Excluding a Project File from Build A file in a project can be individually excluded from build on a configuration by configuration basis gt To exclude a file in a project from build 1 Push the right mouse button on a file which you want to be excluded from build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select Exclude Build file where lt file gt is the selected file from the pop up menu figure 2 5 Then a red cross will be put on the file s icon and the file will be excluded from build 2 2 4 Including a Project File in Build An excluded file can be included in the project again gt To include a file which has been excluded from build 1 Push the right mouse button on a file which has been excluded from build on the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select Include Build file where lt file gt is the selected file from the pop up menu Then a red cross will be removed from the file s icon and the file will be include
27. 4 10 1 Changing the Editor Font scsseceniccienecnieniin i 75 Syntax CONE eae iien A E EENE i ER REE 76 Templates ister cas csswasusssvncesossevonscaoutensacowsedescounenassoutusearououiceneukeutercsnongapentdnguacssbneuaenee tenes tonten 78 4 12 1 Defining a Template lt iccciscsccsccasssescasssscsccevasasasavisevssvsstatevevacevassascasasvasevasasseseaasanse 78 4 12 2 Deleting a Templates csscccesccssexseasvicsscasseznsecscancsssuacecsedevanesssuaasdesasvanesavataecesataats 79 4 123 Inserting a Template secs cicssccscccusessvurascascvevacncuveecsdoveuscsstesaeurooreusceseovenusoesvuecsescsaedes 79 4 124 Brace Matchin gs neiserenvorarciocenenei n e ii a a 79 Editor Column Management ccsceccsccsssssseseceeceeceseeseesecsecseeeeeeaecaecneeeeeeeeaeeaeeeseeeees 80 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 Tools Administration ss oenn a a a na TOOL LOCAUONS m E eer O EE A saienseed HEW Registration Files HIF ccceccsssssseseeseceeeeeeeeceseeseeaeeseceeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaeeeeeneeeaeeaeees Registering Components siiiccssccecshssscestessceasesavessvsesscenaenasseazespaceoacassseaneszeevencssesavausecesaveaaens 5 3 1 Searching Drives for Components Re 5 3 2 Registering a Single Compomentt cecescseceesceseeseeseeeeceeeeeeeseeseceeeeeeeeaeeaeeneees Unresisterin g Components i cscececessecesdiavecescaabeneacesvevec E EEE ia Viewin
28. 7 BREAKPOINT BP Sets a breakpoint at an instruction address 8 BREAKPOINT_CLEAR BC Deletes breakpoints 9 BREAKPOINT_ BD Displays a list of breakpoints DISPLAY 10 BREAKPOINT_ENABLE BE Enables or disables a breakpoint 11 BREAKPOINT_ BS Sets sequential breakpoints SEQUENCE 12 CHANGE_ CC Sets the current configuration CONFIGURATION 13 CHANGE_PROJECT CP Sets the current project 14 CLOCK CK Set the CPU clock rate in the emulator 15 CONFIGURE_ CPF Sets the debugging environment for the emulator PLATFORM 16 DEFAULT_OBJECT_ DO Sets the default object program format FORMAT 17 DEVICE_TYPE DE Selects a device type to emulate 18 DISASSEMBLE DA Disassembles memory contents 19 ERASE ER Clears the Command Line window 20 EVALUATE EV Evaluates an expression 21 EXMONITOR_DISPLAY EXMD Displays the content of the expansion monitor 22 EXMONITOR_SET EXMS Selects whether or not to display the items in the expansion monitor 23 EXMONITOR_ EXMSR Sets the time to update the expansion monitor during SETRATE emulation or a break 24 FILE_LOAD FL Loads an object program file 25 FILE_SAVE FS Saves memory to a file 26 FILE_VERIFY FV Verifies file contents against memory 389 RENESAS Table G 1 HEW Commands cont No Command Name Abbreviation Function 27 GO GO Executes user program 28 GO_RESET GR Executes user program from reset vector 29 GO_
29. Add Instruction Data R W Area Status Clock Probes NMI IRQ7 0 Power0N_Reset 09108 000400 MOV L H OOFFEFCO ER 7a07 RD ROM PROG 1 ql i aqui _main 03582 001034 BSR Gtutorial 8 5502 RD ROM PROG 1 ql i aT tutorial 03578 001038 MOV L ER3 ER 0100 RD ROM PROG 1 ql 1 lau Sample Sample 03558 002000 MOV L ER2 ER 0100 RD ROM PROG i ql i aqui _sbrk 03369 001000 TM L ER2 ER3 3P 0110 RD ROM PROG 1 ql 1 uuu Sample sort long 01667 002068 STM L ER2 ER3 3P 110 RD ROM PROG i ql i aqui Sample change long 00469 0020d6 MOV L ER3 ER7 0100 RD ROM PROG 1 ql 1 qaqa S gt Figure 6 59 Trace Window Function Calls 5 To return the display in the Trace window to its previous state follow the procedure in 3 to display the Function Call Display dialog box Click the Disable button and then the OK button 6 Remove the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Breakpoints window displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this menu to remove all the event points that have been set Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information 339 RENESAS 6 17 Stack Trace Function The emulator uses the stack s information to display the function call history Notes 1 This function can be used only when the load m
30. Address Lo edit box H OOFFEFA7 in this example in the Address Hi edit box This procedure sets the memory range for variable a of the tutorial function 4 Click the Write radio button in the Direction group box to set a write cycle for the specified range This completes the setting of a memory range Click the OK button to close the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Breakpoint Event Properties General Bus Area Signals Action Type Address C PCBreak DontCare C Address Range AddiessLo 00FFEFSO Event Address Hi H Q0FFEFA7 Tl Outside Range m Data Compare Direction gt I Compare J Use Mask C Read Value H O Bute Word Figure 6 49 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box after Setting an Event 332 RENESAS 5 The event that has been set in the Event combo box of the Trace Events group box on the General page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box is displayed Trace Acquisition General Stop Delayed Stop Suppress _ p Time Stamp IV Free Trace I DMAC Cycles Glock I DIC Cycles Disabled hd J Refresh Cycles m Trace Events Event 9 R H FFEF80 range to H FFEFA write Edit Delete Del All Sequence OK Cancel Figure 6 50 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Adding an Event 6 To enable time stamping select 125ns from the Clock combo box of th
31. Area Signals Action Type Address C PCBreak Dont Care Address Range Address Lo Dai H 0000105C Address Hi F o0000000 F Outside Range r Data Compare Direction I Compare F Use Mask C Bead Value D0 5 ahi C White Figure 6 43 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box after Setting an Event 327 RENESAS 4 The event that has been set is now displayed in the Event combo box of the Trace Events group box on the General page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition Add est Figure 6 44 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Adding an Event 328 RENESAS 5 To enable the event condition that has been set uncheck the Free Trace check box on the General page This will add pages 1 to 4 to the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition a Sp Delyedseo 1 J2 19 le a E x a dd en Dete oaan Figure 6 45 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Pages Added 329 RENESAS 6 Select page 1 and click the Range radio button in the Conditions group box This will display the Range Event combo box and the Edit button Trace Acquisition Figure 6 46 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Displaying Page 1 330 RENESAS 7 Select the event you have registered from the Range Event combo box The event is now enabled Click the OK button to complete the trace setting
32. Dialog Box 170 RENESAS e To make a session read only 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 2 Select the session you would like to make read only 3 Click the Properties button to display the Session Properties dialog box figure 4 18 4 Check the Read only check box to make the link read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to be modified accidentally 5 Click the OK button e To save a session with a different name 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 Select the session you would like to save Click the Save as button to display the Save Session dialog box figure 4 19 2 3 4 Browse to the new file location 5 If you want to export the session file to another location leave the Maintain link check box unchecked If you would like the HEW to use this location instead of the current session location check the Maintain link check box Click the OK button a 2x Saven sme denam a Sessionsoox _E6000_Emulator_CP hsf Debug_yyyy_E6000_Emulator_cP Debug_ xox _E6000_Emulator_cP Release a DefaultSession hsf a Sessionyyyy _E6000_Emulator_CP hsf Save as type Sessions hsf 7 Cancel Maintain link A Figure 4 19 Save Session Dialog Box 4 4 3 Saving Se
33. Displays the total execution time of the program 3 Events Sheet Selecting the Events tab on the Status window displays this sheet Table 8 5 Events Sheet Item Item Column Resources Status Column Displays the resource information and the information on events such as the breakpoint 360 RENESAS 8 1 7 Extended Monitor Function Selecting View gt CPU gt Extended Monitor or clicking the Extended Monitor toolbar button displays the Extended Monitor window This emulator displays the following items Table 8 6 Extended Monitor Window Items Item Column Value Column User Standby Displays the status of the standby pin User NMI Displays the status of the NMI pin User Reset Displays the status of the reset pin User Wait Displays the status of the wait pin Inactive is displayed if no corresponding pins exist User System Voltage Displays whether or not the user VCC is equal to or exceeds the value set in User VCC Threshold on the General page of the Configure Properties dialog box User Cable Displays whether or not the user cable is connected Running status Displays the address bus value in the MCU and the status of the CPU while the user program is running and the cause of a break while the user program is halted Break lt Cause of break gt Displays the cause of a break Address lt Address bus value gt Displays the addr
34. E Fa Tutorial B Tutorial EE C source file E dbsct c LE sbrk c B C source file 2 resetprg cpp sort cpp 5 Download modules L Tutorial abs E Projects 0 n 2 3 4 6 6 7 8 9 agagaaaAaaAaaa xxl 0x00001046 0x0000104e 0x00001050 0x00001058 0x0000105a p_sam nev Sample for i 0 i lt 10 i j rand if j lt 0 Jesi At PPD 0x0000105c 0x00001070 0x0000107a 0x00001082 0x0000108a 0x00001096 0x000010a2 0x000010ae 0x000010ba 0x000010c6 0x000010d2 0x000010de 0x000010e8 Ox000010 6 0x000010fc Value Ox00ffef80 H 0000794b 0x00ffef80 H 000059e2 Ox00ffef84 H 0000446b 0x00ffef88 H 000041c6 Ox00ffef8c H 00003154 Ox0Offef90 H 00002781 0x00fef94 H 00001 cfb Ox00ffefS8 H 0000167e Ox00ffefSc H 00001 5tb Ox00ffefal H OOO00H6 Ox00ffefad H 000a R4 afi 3 e p_sam gt sort a p_sam gt change a D p_sam gt s0 a 0 p_sam gt sl a 1 p_sam gt s2 a 2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 p_sam gt s4 a 4 p_sam gt sS a 5 p_sam gt s6 a 6 p_sam gt s7 a 7 p_sam gt s8 a 8 p_sam gt s9 a 9 delete p_sam Type flong 1 0 long long long long long long long long long long int Figure 6 25
35. Emulator Debugger Part SECHON 1 QVELVIOW ccnn e 135 1 1 Features 135 1 2 Warnings 136 1 3 Environmental Condition 137 1 4 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass 137 Section 2 Preparation before Use sssesesssssesessisssrsetstsesrsresisesereesesrsreseseseses 139 2A Emulator Preparation e ecsscccccccsesveccsevseecccgaasncesguenececuasensesevaveccesnavnscsdenverceetacnsssraavecentaeness 139 2 2 Installing Emulator s Software seios iiini eii EE 139 2 3 Connecting to the User System onnie eede ii teniti eiin EE AREAS 140 2 3 1 Example of Connecting the User System Interface Cable Head tothe User Systems ais iene a Eare ENANTA NEEE NEUESTE NEY 2 3 2 Plugging the User System Interface Cable Body into the Emulator 2 3 3 Plugging the User System Interface Cable Body into the Cable Head ZA Power Supply sssivccscasivatciavseccecas E R E E A E DAT PACAJ pleieren oen eea OSAA EO EET E DAQy Ee EARE E E 2 4 3 Power Supply Monitor Circuit 2 0 cccccecsceesceseeeesecseceeceeceseeseeseeaeeeeeeeeaeeaeeate 2 5 SIMM Memory M d le cs cccecizescvcscccaiectczeenceccxcunscutevevceccituvseaceonvenccatenesncunrvebseanasasusdurevsten 2 5 1 Optional SIMM Memory Module Configuration ccecceceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenee 2 6 Hardware Interface aiarra evee waved lel eeen E E E eee ti 2 6 1 Signal Protection on the emulator cceceeceesceseeseeseeeecesceseeseeaeeseceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenee 2 6 2 User System Interface C
36. HFFFF Figure 5 24 Save Memory As Dialog Box Enter the start and end addresses of the memory block that you wish to save and a name and format for the file The File name combo box contains the previous four file names used for saving memory Clicking the button can open the standard File Save As dialog box On clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key the dialog box closes and the memory block will be saved into the disk as a file of the specified format type A memory area in the address space can be verified using the memory verify function Open the Verify Memory dialog box by choosing File gt Verify Memory erify Memory C File name TTT Offset address eee ooo Format __ Cancel Figure 5 25 Verify Memory Dialog Box 196 RENESAS 5 5 11 Disabling Update of the Window Contents Automatic update of the Memory window contents which is performed when user program execution stops and in other cases can be disabled This is done by checking Lock Refresh in the popup menu 5 5 12 Updating the Window Contents The Memory window contents can be forcibly updated This is done by checking Refresh in the popup menu 5 5 13 Comparing the Memory Contents The contents of two memory blocks can be compared Open the Compare Memory dialog box by selecting Memory gt Compare from the main menu or by selecting Compare from the popup menu of the Memo
37. R W Area Status Probes and Timestamp vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help Set filtering conditions and then press the OK button This starts filtering according to the conditions Clicking the Cancel button closes the Trace Filter dialog box which holds the settings at the time when the dialog box was opened In filtering only the trace information that satisfies one or more filtering conditions set in the above pages will be displayed in the Trace window Filtering conditions can be changed several times to analyze data because the content of the trace buffer is not changed by filtering 265 RENESAS 1 General page Set the range for filtering Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data RAW Area TD T Enable Filter oe L Not designation Trace display range Start PTR End PTR Don t care other pages Enable Filter No Trace display range Start PTR End PTR Figure 5 84 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page Only selects the cycle number when this box is checked Other options become invalid Enables the filter when this box is checked Filters information that does not match the conditions set in those pages when this box is checked Sets the range for filtering Enters a PTR value to start filter
38. RENESAS 6 Click the Settings button in the Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 group box to display the Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 dialog box Select PC from the Address Control Mode combo box and then click the OK button PC is now displayed in the Address Control Mode text field of the Common Setting of Performance PA1 8 dialog box Common ings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Me Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 6 66 Common Setting of Performance PA1 8 Dialog Box 7 Click the OK button to display the content that has been set for line 1 of the No column in the Performance Analysis window This completes the settings for a Time Of Specified Range Measurement 0 x Performance Anz Q 10 20 30 No Name Condition MAX MIN TIME Count l sort Range H 00002068 H 000020D4 0 00h OOmin 00s 000ms 000us 000ns 0 EA Figure 6 67 Performance Analysis Dialog Box Setting Completed 8 Set an event point at the address on the line that has p_sam gt change a within the tutorial function H 0000107 in this example so that a break occurs when the specified sort function has been executed three times refer to section 6 15 2 Breaking Execution at Event Points 9 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Performance Analysis window then
39. Select All local menu Undo Reverses the last editing operation Select Edit gt Undo Select Undo local menu Press CTRL Z Redo Repeats the last undone editing operation Select Edit gt Redo lect Redo local menu Press CTRL Y RENESAS 65 4 5 Searching and Navigating through Files The High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides find replace and file navigation functionality The following three sections detail how to use these features 4 5 1 Finding Text gt To search for text in the current file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to search is the active window 2 Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search 3 Select Edit gt Find press CTRL F select Find from the editor window s local menu or click the find toolbar button The Find dialog box will be displayed figure 4 2 Find Fix Find what string Find Next T Match whole word only Direction Cancel I Match case C Up Down T Regular expression Figure 4 2 Find Dialog 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 5 If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Matc
40. Selects Mono or Stereo Buffer Size Specifies the buffer size of data displayed in hexadecimal After the settings have been made in the Waveform Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Waveform View window Even after the Waveform View window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the popup menu 284 RENESAS Figure 5 102 Waveform View Window Displays the memory contents as waveforms The X axis shows the number of sampling data and the Y axis shows the sampling value 5 19 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh in the popup menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops 5 19 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the popup menu immediately updates the window contents 5 19 4 Zoom In Display Selecting Zoom In from the popup menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis enlarged 5 19 5 Zoom Out Display Selecting Zoom Out from the popup menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis reduced 5 19 6 Resetting the Zoom Display Selecting Reset Zoom from the popup menu displays the waveforms in its original size 5 19 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification In the Zoom Magnification submenu of the popup menu the zoom magnification can be selected from 2 4 or 8 5 19 8 Setting th
41. as in a normal paste operation RENESAS Define Template Figure 4 14 Define Template Dialog 4 12 2 Deleting a Template gt To delete a template 1 Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates select Templates gt Define Templates from the local menu press CTRL T or click on the define template bookmark toolbar button al The dialog shown in figure 4 14 will be displayed 2 Use the Template name drop down list to select the name of the template you wish to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Clicking OK saves the template changes and dismisses the dialog 4 12 3 Inserting a Template gt To insert a template 1 Select a template in the toolbar then click the insert template toolbar button Tr select Edit gt Templates gt Insert Template or select Templates gt Insert Template from the local menu The dialog is dismissed and the chosen template is added to the current editor window 4 12 4 Brace Matching Complicated source code can often become unwieldy especially when blocks of C code are deeply nested within each other or when complex logic statements are expressed within an if clause To help in such situations the High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides a match brace feature which highlights text between braces of type and gt To find a matching brace 1 Either highlight the open brace to match from or place the cursor bef
42. relative to the workspace so if the project is one directory above the workspace before it is moved the HEW will try to find the project in the same relative location after the relocation procedure This is especially useful if you are using a project shared between more than one workspace In older versions of the HEW this project would not have been relocated and would have still tried to access the original project path The older version of the HEW could only relocate the projects which were in a subdirectory of the workspace directory This is still the standard behavior for the High performance Embedded Workshop gt To change a projects relative path flag 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click and then select properties 3 Click the Project relative file path checkbox to switch on or off the relative file path feature figure 2 25 4 Click OK Properties i 2 xi Location C Hew2 demo demo demo hwp Last modified 21 47 43 Thursday February 27 2003 ma CPU family H85 H87300 Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain Version 5 0 2 0 IV Project relative file path Figure 2 25 Properties Dialog 35 RENESAS 36 RENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features This chapter explains the more advanced build concepts 3 1 The Build Process Revisited Chapter 2 Build Basics began by describing the build process in terms of a compiler an assembler and a linker fi
43. 1 2 If a delay count has been set the cycle number where the trace stop condition has been satisfied is record 0 For the cycle during delay executed until the trace has stopped earlier record numbers go forward 1 2 the most recent record Address Address 6 digit hexadecimal Instruction Disassembled code of the executed instruction Data Data bus value displayed as 2 digit or 4 digit hexadecimal R W Whether access was read RD or write WR Area Memory area being accessed ROM RAM 8 or 16 bit I O 8 or 16 bit EXT external or DTCRAM not available when a time stamp is acquired Status Bus status during this cycle DTC operation RFU operation PROG prefetch or Data CPU data access cycle not available when a time stamp is acquired Mode Operating mode ACT active or SUB subactive not available when a time stamp is acquired Clock Number of clock cycles in bus cycle as 1 to 8 To indicate more clock cycles OVR is displayed not available when a time stamp is acquired Probes A 4 bit binary number showing the four probe pins in the order of Probe 4 Probe 3 Probe 2 and Probe 1 from the left not available when a time stamp is acquired NMI Status of the NMI input signal not available when a time stamp is acquired IRQ Status of IRQ input signals The content to be displayed depends on the selection made as the Trace option on the General page of the Configuratio
44. 1 the compiler is the first phase the assembler is the second phase and the linker is the third and final phase During the compiler phase the C source files from the project are compiled in turn during the assembler phase the assembler source files are assembled in turn During the linker phase all library files and output files from the compiler and assembler phases are linked together to produce the load module This module can then be downloaded and used by the debugger functionality in HEW The build process can be customized in several ways For instance you can add your own phase disable a phase delete phases and so forth These advanced build issues are left to chapter 3 Advanced Build Features In this chapter only the general principles and basic features will be detailed RENESAS 2 2 Project Files In order for the HEW to be able to build your application you must first tell it which files should be in the project and how each file should be built figure 2 2 Add Project Files N Remove Project Files Debug ON f l s Optimize OFF Set Compiler Options List File YES gt c Source Files Debug OFF s Optimize OFF Set Assembler Options List File YES gt Assembler Source Files Debug ON 5 Sise YES Set Linker options Map File YES gt Library Files Figure 2 2 Editing a Project 12 RENESAS 2 2 1 A
45. 2166 Main 33 MHz Main Target Notes 1 Target in Mode is only available when the target system is connected 2 Target in Clock is only available when the target system is connected 356 RENESAS 8 1 4 Configuration Properties Dialog Box Custom Page Items that can be set in this dialog box are listed below 000 Configuration Properties General Custom Device ROM z RAM 40kB z J Enable Flash memory Pin 144Pin v Modules JV Enable DTC IV Enable PwmMi4 0 I Enable USB JV Enable PWM14 1 JV Enable 104 5 JV Enable SCR JV Enable 1062 3 IV Enable SCN FDA IV Enable IC0A IV Enable LPG Enable MultiMediaCard IV Enable Timer Connection I Enable MS Enable CE Figure 8 2 Configuration Properties Dialog Box Custom Device Page 357 RENESAS Custom Device page ROM Specify the on chip ROM area size None 56kB Sets the on chip ROM area to be 56 kbytes H 000000 to H OODFFF 64kB Sets the on chip ROM area to be 64 kbytes H 000000 to H OOFFFF 96kB Sets the on chip ROM area to be 96 kbytes H 000000 to H 017FFF 128kB Sets the on chip ROM area to be 128 kbytes H 000000 to H 01FFFF 256kB Sets the on chip ROM area to be 256 kbytes H 000000 to H 03FFFF 384kB Sets the on chip ROM area to be 384 kbytes H 000000 to H O5FFFF 512kB Sets the on chip ROM area to be 512 kbytes H 000000 to H 07FFFF RAM Specify the on chi
46. 3 Stopping a Build The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to halt the build process gt To stop a build 1 Select Build gt Stop Build or click the stop build toolbar button The build will be stop after the current file has been built 2 Wait until the message Build Finished appears in the Output window before continuing gt To forcibly terminate a current tool 1 Select Build gt Terminate Current Tool The HEW will attempt to stop the tool immediately Note Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again 2 6 4 Building Multiple Projects The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build multiple projects and configurations at once gt To build multiple projects 1 Select Build gt Build Multiple The figure displayed in figure 2 18 2 The build multiple gives you the choice of which projects and configurations should be built To select which projects and configurations need to be built select the check box next to the project configuration combination you want to build For example in figure 2 18 if you wanted to build the entire hewtest2 project you would check the hewtest2 Debug and the hewtest2 Release selections and leave all other check boxes unchecked 3 When you are happy with your chosen selection click the build button and the HEW will
47. 6 32 Event Window PC Breakpoint Setting Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 320 RENESAS e Close the Event window e To stop the tutorial program at the breakpoint select Reset Go from the Debug menu The program runs until it stops at the breakpoint that has been set 0x00001038 void tutorial void 0x00001044 long a 10 long j ine i class Sample p_sam Ox00001046 p_sam new Sample 0x0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i jf 0x00001050 j rand 0x00001058 1f j lt 0J 0x0000105a j j 0x0000105c ali j 0x00001070 p_sam gt sort a Ox0000107a p_sam gt change a 0x00001082 p_sam gt sO0 a 0 0x0000108a p_sam gt sl a 1 0x00001096 p_sam gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 P_sam gt s3 a 3 0x000010ac p_sam gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_sam gt s5S a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 Pp_sam gt s7 a 7 0x000010de p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea p_sam gt s9 a 9 Ox000010f6 delete p_sam 0x000010fc Figure 6 33 Source Window at Execution Stop PC Break The Status window displays the following contents H8S 2237 E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Emulator PCI Card Driver CPU H8572237 Mode Clock source Main 10MHz Sub 32ZkHz Run status Break Cause of last break PC Break Ev
48. 80 RH no condensation Vibration Operating 2 45 m s max Storage 4 9 m s max Transportation 14 7 m s max Ambient gases No corrosive gases may be present 1 4 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass Table 1 2 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass Item Specifications Dimensions 219 x 170 x 54mm Mass Approximately 1 000 g RENESAS 137 138 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 Emulator Preparation Unpack the emulator and prepare it for use as follows A WARNING READ the reference sections shaded in figure 2 1 before using the emulator product Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Reference Unpack the emulator Component list Check the components against the component list Setup Section 3 Set up the emulator Insert the optional board Install the HEW Connect the interface cable Turn on the user system Section 4 Only when the user system is connected Turn on the emulator Activation Start the HEW Figure 2 1 Emulator Preparation Flowchart 2 2 Installing Emulator s Software To install the HEW refer to the Setup Guide for the E6000 Emulator supplied together with the emulator 139 RENESAS 2 3 Connecting to the User System To connect the emulator to a user system proceed as follows e Connect the user system interface cable head to the user system e Plug th
49. Browse ai Figure 5 13 Open Log File Dialog Box Enter the name of a log file log The logging option is automatically set and the name of the file is shown on the window title bar Opening a previous log file will ask the user if they wish to append or overwrite the current log 5 3 6 Starting or Stopping Logging Choose Logging from the popup menu to toggle logging to file on and off When logging is active the button becomes effective Note that the contents of the log file cannot be viewed until logging is completed or temporarily disabled by clearing the check box Re enabling logging will append to the log file 5 3 7 Entering a Full Path to the File It is recommended that the full path to a file is specified as a file name in the Command line window because the current directory can be moved However care must be taken to enter the correct full path to a file when it is entered from the keyboard To save this trouble a full path can be easily specified by browsing through files Choose Browse from the popup menu to open the Browse dialog box Select a file and click Open to paste the full path to the selected file to the cursor location This option can only be used when the cursor is located on the last line 5 3 8 Pasting a Placeholder Select a placeholder from the Placeholder submenu in the popup menu to paste the selected placeholder to the cursor location This function is only available when th
50. Emulation 5 1 1 Opening the Configuration Properties Dialog Box Selecting Options gt Emulator gt System or clicking the Emulator System toolbar button EAN opens the Configuration Properties dialog box onfiguration Properties 21x General User Signals IV User Reset enable Mode 7 advanced mode single chip IV User NMI enable User Sta Vv enable Reme F User Standby enable IV User Bus Request enable Clock Main 1 OMHz Sub 32kHz Timer Resolution 125ns x Flash Memory Control Y IV Enable read and write on the fly IV Break on access error J Enable internal ROM area write User YCC Threshold 4 00 4 E gt Device Driver E5000 USB Driver I Change driver in start up Figure 5 1 Configuration Properties Dialog Box General Page This dialog allows the user to set conditions for the target MCU before downloading a program to the emulator 175 RENESAS General page Device Selects the MCU to be emulated To use an MCU not included in the list select CUSTOM to specify the functions required for this MCU See the hardware manual for details Mode Selects the MCU s operating mode Clock Selects the speed of the MCU s clock and sub clock Timer Resolution Selects the resolution of the timer for use in execution time measurement The value 20 ns 125 ns 250 ns 500 ns 1 us 2 us 4 us 8 us or 16 us can be
51. Enter a name for the session 5 Browse to the existing session file location that you would like to import into the current project If the Open and maintain link to session file check box is not checked the imported new session file is generated in the project directory If the Open and maintain link to session file check box is checked a new session file is not generated in the project directory but is linked to the current session file If the Make session file link read only check box is checked the linked session file is used as read only 6 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box e To remove a session 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 2 Select the session you would like to remove 3 Click the Remove button Note that the current session cannot be removed 4 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box e To view the session properties 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 2 Select the session you would like to view the properties for 3 Click the Properties button to display the Session Properties dialog box figure 4 18 n Properties Name Sessionoom_E6000_Emulator_CP Location C Hew2 sample sample Sessiomoo_E6000 Last modified 17 37 11 Thursday December 12 2002 Cance I Read only Figure 4 18 Session Properties
52. Event radio button in the Type group box Select the Address radio button in the Address group box Then use the Source window to refer to the address on the line that has a i J j within the tutorial function and enter this address in the Address Lo edit box In this example enter H 0000105c Enter D 5 as the number of times the event condition is to be satisfied in the Required number of event occurrences edit box on the Action page 322 RENESAS Breakpoint Event Properties General Bus Area Signals Action m Type Address C PCBreak Don tCare Address Range Address Lo leven JH 00000105C Address Hi H 00000000 F Outside Range r Data Compare Direction 4 T Compare F Use Mask C Read Value T ue C White Bute Word Mask mooo Either Figure 6 36 General Page Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box e Click the OK button The Event window is displayed as shown below Enable ddress H 0000105C Tutorial cpp 42 address count D S Break Ch2 E Empty Ch3 E Empty Ch4 E Empty Ch5 E Empty Ch6 E Empty Ch E Empty Ch E Empty Cho R Empty Ch10 R Empty Ch11 R Empty Ch12 R Empty aI Breakpomnt Event A Trigger Figure 6 37 Event Window Setting Completed Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to sec
53. HEW project directory This makes it much easier to relocate projects and keep all of the paths correct The High performance Embedded Workshop also has the ability to define custom placeholders This means you can enter your own custom placeholder definition and decide upon its directory value Once defined this placeholder becomes available throughout the rest of the HEW system The placeholders can be defined on an application wide level so the placeholders are available to all workspaces and projects that use the HEW The other method of defining the placeholders is using the workspace wide custom placeholders this means the placeholders can only be used in the current workspace This list is only available when you have a workspace open Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Application wide custom placeholders Placeholder Directory Workspace wide custom placeholders Placeholder Directoy ad Hadit Remove OK Cancel Figure 6 14 Customize Dialog Placeholder Tab gt To add a custom placeholder 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Placeholders tab figure 6 14 2 Choose whether you need to use an Application wide custom placeholder or Workspace wide custom placeholder Click Add on the adjacent button to the list you require 3 The dialog add New Custom Placeholder
54. Parallel Read Access WORD este Internal ROM Parallel Write Access WORD Internal ROM Parallel Write Access High Byte Internal ROM Parallel Write Access Low Byte Internal RAM Parallel Read Access WORD Internal RAM Parallel Write Access WORD Internal RAM Parallel Write Access High Byte Internal RAM Parallel Write Access Low Byte RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED Test H8S 2168 Register Read Write Register REA sa aio via at ah at ot ot ahh ot oi at Stat al shal at atatal at OK Register Decode Test OK LCDRAM Marching TeSt eee eens OK Pegister RESET iie iiaii ii Sr oy i iei Se Sree Bye Sy ar Sy ied OK Medium speed mode Register access OK Test TMR_4 OVI4 Clock select PHI 8 ccceeeees OK OVI5 Clock select PHISUB 2 200 OK OVIG CLOCK seLeGt PHT 8 uena OK OVI7 Clock select PHISUB 2 OK Exiting Watch Mode by OVI OK Tests run for xH xM xS 0 total errors Tests passed emulator functioning correctly 398 RENESAS ows the check results or the bus monitor ontrolling circuits in e E6000 normal ompletion adctanmn Shows the check results for the parallel access controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the register in the H8S 2168 group normal completion Shows the check results for the TMR4 register normal completion Shows the check time Total number of errors
55. Read write HEW Window Step Over RENESAS 7 64 317 6 13 Forced Breaking of Program Executions The HEW can force a break in the execution of a program e Cancel all the breaks e To execute the remaining sections of the tutorial function select Go from the Debug menu or the Go button on the toolbar Figure 6 26 Go Button e The program goes into an endless loop To force a break in execution select Halt from the Debug menu or the Halt button on the toolbar Figure 6 27 Halt Button 6 14 Resetting the MCU Resetting the MCU initializes the internal I O registers and makes the program counter jump to the address set in the reset vector To reset the MCU select Reset CPU from the Debug menu or the Reset CPU button on the toolbar Figure 6 28 Reset CPU Button To execute the program from the reset vector select Reset Go from the Debug menu or the Reset Go button on the toolbar Figure 6 29 Reset Go Button Note This tutorial program is executable from the reset vector 318 RENESAS 6 15 Break Function The emulator s break functions are of two types PC breaks and breaks at event points PC breakpoints and event points are set in the HEW s Event window An overview and setting of the break function are described below 6 15 1 PC Break Function The emulator can set up to 256 PC breakpoints e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of th
56. STBY signal is input the emulator hardware is initialized and the emulator stops emulation In such a case terminate the HEW and restart the emulator Therefore we recommend to clear the User Standby enable check box not selected for general emulation 367 RENESAS 8 2 7 Sub Chip Module Stop Control Registers in the H8S 2168 The values of sub chip module stop control registers AH and AL must be the same as those of sub chip module stop control registers BH and BL respectively 8 2 8 Support of Boundary Scan JTAG This emulator does not emulate the boundary scan JTAG 368 RENESAS Appendix A Troubleshooting I have a text file in the editor but it does not show any syntax coloring Ensure that you have named the file i e saved it and that the Enable syntax coloring check box is set on the Editor tab of the Options dialog which is launched via Tools gt Options HEW checks a file group to which the file s extension belongs and decides whether the file is colored To view the current defined extensions and their file groups use the File Extensions dialog which is launched via Project gt File Extensions To view coloring information select Tools gt Format to display the Format dialog click the item to view its color under icons in the tree and see the Color tab See the Syntax Coloring section in chapter 4 Using the Editor of the HEW Part for details I opened a workspace from my PC and on
57. Sets the input value or character string To set a range the start value must be specified here End Specify the end value if a range has been set only available when Range has been selected Set Adds a new condition to the current one New Creates a new condition Result Obtains the result of statistical information analysis Clear Clears all conditions and results of statistical information analysis Close Closes this dialog box All the results displayed in the Result list will be cleared 276 RENESAS This dialog box allows the user to analyze statistical information concerning the trace information Set the target of analysis in Item and the input value or character string by Start and End Click the Result button after setting a condition by pressing the New or Add button to analyze the statistical information and display its result in the Result list Note In this emulator only PTR can be set as a range Each of other items must be specified as a character string In analysis of statistical information character strings are compared with those displayed in the Trace window Only those that completely match are counted Note however that this test is not case sensitive The number of blanks will not be cared either 5 16 15 Extracting Function Calls from the Acquired Trace Information To extract function calls from the acquired trace information select Function Call from the pop
58. Step Option Menu Command Description Step In Executes each statement including statements within functions Step Over Executes a function call in a single step Step Out Steps out of a function and stops at the statement following the statement in the program that called the function Step Steps the specified times repeatedly at a specified rate 6 12 1 Executing the Step In Command The Step In command steps into the called function and stops at the first statement of the called function e To step through the sort function select Step In from the Debug menu or click the Step In button in the toolbar ie Figure 6 20 Step In Button 314 RENESAS 0x00002000 Ox00002006 Ox0000201c O0x00002026 Ox0000202c 0x00002032 0200002038 0x0000203e Ox00002044 Ox0000204a 0x00002050 0x00002056 0x00002060 0x00002068 0x00002070 0x00002072 0x00002076 0x00002078 0x0000207c 0x00002080 0x00002084 0x000020a4 0x000020a8 0x000020c0 0x000020cc Sample Sample sO0 0 s1 0 s2 0 s3 0 s4 0 s5 0 s6 0 s7 0 s8 0 s9 0 void Sample sort long a long t int i 3 K 9ap gap 5 while gap gt 0 for k 0 k lt gap k for i k gap i lt 10 i i gap f for j i gap j gt k j j gap f if a i gt alitgap t ali ali alj gap a j gap t else break gap gap 2 Figure 6 21 Source Window Step In e The highli
59. X ve sw shared Figure 8 9 Example Mappings Now let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file In order to get all of the files in a project we need to use the following command GET VCDIR FILENAME When the HEW executes the command for a given project file it will replace VCDIR for the equivalent version control directory in the file mapping For example suppose FILE1 C is located at c work application project1 filel c If the get command is applied to FILE1 C then 1 X ve sw app project is substituted for VCDIR as this is the version control directory mapping for c work application project1 2 FILE1 C is substituted for FILENAME 121 RENESAS Project File C work application projectl filel c Arguments VCDIR FILENAME 1 2 Command X vc sw app projectl filel c Figure 8 10 Example of Substitution 8 3 2 Specifying Environment Select the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog to view the current settings figure 8 7 To add a new environment variable click the Add button beside the Environment list the dialog shown in Figure will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field the variable s value into the Value field and then click
60. added to the project and are displayed in the folder in which they were dragged to Note If you add a file to a project when it is an unrecognized file type then it will still be added to the project Certain functions will be disabled with reference to this file When this file is double clicked in the workspace window instead of opening the file in the editor the open operation is passed to Windows operating system The default open operation is then carried out as if the file was opened in Windows Explorer To view the current defined extensions use the File Extensions dialog see the section on file extensions later in this chapter 14 RENESAS 2 2 2 Removing Files from a Project Files can be individually removed from a project selections of files can be removed or all files can be removed gt To remove files from a project 1 Select Project gt Remove Files or select Remove Files from the Projects tab s pop up menu in the Workspace window see figure 2 5 The Remove Project Files dialog will be displayed figure 2 6 i Hod to VOS nove trom ves JOS Figure 2 5 Projects Tab Pop up Menu Remove Project Files demo c c Shew demo demo e hew demo demo c Shew demo demo c hewdemo demo e Shew demo demo e hewdemo demo Figure 2 6 Remove Project Files Dialog 15 RENESAS 2 Select the file or files which you want to remove from the Project files
61. also possible to store all bus cycles and then just look at selected cycles This is called trace filtering 3 1 3 Execution Time Measurements The emulator allows you to measure the total execution time or to measure the time of execution between specified events in the complex event system You can set the resolution of the timer to any of the following values 20 ns 125 ns 250 ns 500 ns 1 us 2 us 4 us 8 us or 16 us At 20 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about six hours and at 16us the maximum time is about 200 days 3 1 4 Performance Analysis The emulator provides functions for measuring the performance of a program The performance of the specified program range can be displayed either as a histogram or in percentage form A timer resolution of 20 ns 40 ns or 160 ns can be selected In addition the execution count of the specified program range can be measured 1 to 65535 151 RENESAS 3 1 5 Bus Monitoring The emulator incorporates a bus monitoring function that monitors and displays the contents of the accessed area in HEW windows without stopping the program execution Up to eight blocks of 256 bytes can be monitored In addition the emulator can output trigger signals from external probe 2 EXT2 when specified addresses four points max are accessed Note that however some products do not support the bus monitoring function 3 2 Complex Event System CES In most practical debugging applications
62. assembly language level either choose View gt Disassembly use the Ctrl D accelerator or click on the Disassembly window s toolbar button The Disassembly window opens at the current PC location and shows Address and Code optional which show the disassembled mnemonics with labels when available 54 while 1 00001036 40FC BRA _main 8 26 aa 28 29 void tutorial void tutorial 01006DF3 MOV L ER3 ER 0000103C 01206DF4 STM L ER4 ER6 SP Hage tee 79370028 SUB W H 0028 R7 00001044 OFF3 MOV L ER ER3 3d long a 10 J2 long j 335 int i J4 class Sample p_sam 35 36 Pp_sam new Sample 00001046 1480 SUB L ERO ERO 00001048 SE002000 JSR Sample Sample 24 oo00104C OF86 MOV L ERO ER6 373 for i 0 i lt 10 i jf ea me SUB W R4 R4 rand 90001060 SEO011EE JSR _rand 24 X Figure 5 8 Disassembly Window 5 2 4 Modifying the Assembly Language Code You can modify the assembly language code by double clicking on the instruction that you want to change The Assembler dialog box will be opened 21 x Address Code newer 00001040 79370028 SUB H 0028 A7 OK Cancel Figure 5 9 Assembler Dialog Box 185 RENESAS The address machine code and disassembled instruction are displayed Enter the new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonic field Pressing the Enter key will assemble the instruction into memory
63. be used The optional SIMM memory modules can be separately purchased The emulation memory can be mapped in 64 byte units to any number of separate memory blocks in the MCU address space Each memory block can be specified using the memory mapping function as user Target or emulator SIMM memory module and in each case the access can be specified as read write read only or guarded The definition of each type of memory is as follows Table 3 1 Memory Types Memory Type Description On chip Uses the MCU on chip memory User Accesses the user system memory Emulator Accesses the emulator SIMM memory module The contents of a specified block of memory can be displayed using the memory function The contents of memory can be modified at any time even during program execution and the results are immediately reflected in all other appropriate windows Note that modifying memory contents during program execution has the following time requirements 1 MCU on chip ROM or RAM or emulator SIMM memory module The emulator modifies the memory contents by temporarily switching the memory bus to the emulator side without stopping the user program execution Therefore the emulator uses the memory bus for up to 80 us in reading of 256 bytes 25 MHz on chip ROM 2 MCU on chip I O DTCRAM or user system memory The emulator stops the user program execution then modifies the memory contents Therefore the user program stops for a maxim
64. before we can actually do anything RENESAS 1 2 The Main Window The HEW main window appears as shown in figure 1 2 3 demo High performance Embedded Workshop resetprg c _ of x lt File Edit View Project Options Build Tools Window Help laj x Dengle rena Trala Fea al lrlee At FEM ISDE xix o ens per PowerON_Reset_PC void 5 demo B E Assembly source file stacksct ste Eg C source file set_vbr void INT_Vectors INT_OFFSET _INITSCT 7 7 _CALL_INIT Remove the comment when you use a ie _INIT_IOLIB 7 7 Use SIM 1 0 4 demo c 2 intprg c errno 0 Remove the comment when you use iF srand 1 7 7 Remove the comment when you use 7 _siptr NULL 7 Remove the comment when you use vecttbl c Dependencies Z sbrk h HardwareSetup Use Hardware Setup set_cr SR_Init main CLOSEALL Use SIM 170 _CALL_END Remove the comment when you uses Build A Debug A Find in Files A Version Control Read wrte 14 88 21 INS Figure 1 2 HEW Main Window There are three main windows the workspace window the editor window and the output window The workspace window shows the projects and files which are currently in the workspace the editor window provides file viewing and editing facilities and the output window shows the results of a var
65. bus status and the memory area being accessed Breakpoint Event Properties 2 x General Bus Area Signals Action Bus State Area F CPU Prefetch M On chip ROM M CPU Data F On chip f F On chip I O 16 bit F DMAC On chip 1 0 8 bit I DIC F External 16 bit F Other I External 8 I DTC RAW Don t Care Figure 5 61 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box Bus Area Page Bus State Sets the bus status as the condition When the Don t care check box is checked the event will be satisfied with any bus status Area Specifies the area for searching When the Don t care check box is checked the event will be satisfied in any area Note Items set for the bus state and memory access area vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 237 RENESAS 3 Signals page Use this page to set external signals Breakpoint Event Properties q 2 x General Bus Area Signals Action Probe 4 m Probe 3 High High C Low C Low 2 Don t Care m Probe 2 Probe 1 High C High C Low C Low Don t Care Don t Care Figure 5 62 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box Signals Page Probe4 Detects the status of the input probe signal 4 High Detects the high level of the input probe signal Low Detects the low level of the input probe signal Don
66. button creates a new source file window with a default name When you save the file you can specify your own filename Open File Click this button if you want to open a file It invokes a standard file chooser select the file which you want to open and then click Open m Save File Saves the active source file Gl Save Al Files Saves all of the files in the editor E Print File To print the contents of the current window click this button ES Cut Clicking this button will remove the current text selection and place a copy of it onto the Windows clipboard it can be pasted back to a file with a paste operation Copy This button allows you to copy the current text selection into the Windows clipboard Paste The paste button copies the contents of the clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor ay Find Click this button if you want to find a certain text string in the current file It invokes a find dialog box where you can specify the search parameters Sy Find in Files To search several files for a text string then click this button All find results are displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window For further information refer to the Searching and Navigating Through Files section later in this chapter Match Braces The match braces button highlights text between braces of type and This is particularly useful when at
67. can enter an address or value into the HEW you can also enter an expression If you enter a register name prefixed by the hash character the contents of that register will be used as the value in the expression Therefore if you open the Set Address dialog box and enter the expression pc the Source or Disassembly window will display the current PC address It also allows the offset of the current PC to be displayed by entering an expression with the PC register plus an offset e g PC 0x100 186 RENESAS 5 3 Debugging with the Command Line Interface Use the Command Line window to enter text based commands instead of window menus and commands 5 3 1 Opening the Command Line Window Choose View gt Command Line or click the Command Line toolbar button to open the Command Line window Command Line Ox gt Figure 5 11 Command Line Window This window allows the user to control the debugging platform by sending text based commands A series of predefined command lines can be called from a file and the output can be recorded in a file The command can be executed by pressing the Enter key after the command is input at the prompt lt on the last line For information on the available commands refer to appendix G Command Lines and the on line help If available the window title displays the current batch and log file names separated by colons Pressing the Ctrl T or Ctrl J keys on the
68. care x Cancel Apply Figure 5 90 Trace Filter Dialog Box Probes Page Don t care Detects no probe signal condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified probe signal condition Probe4 to Probe Select probe conditions not available when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected probe condition High The status of the probe signal is high Low The status of the probe signal is low 272 RENESAS 8 IRQ7 0 page Select the status of IRQ signals The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter xj General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes IRQ7 0 IRQ Dontcare Ings Dontcare z IRQS Don t care IRQ4 Don t care IRG3 Don t care IRG2 Don t care IRQ1 Don t care IRQO Dont care 7 ddd Cancel Apply Figure 5 91 Trace Filter Dialog Box IRQ7 0 Page Don t care Detects no IRQ input condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified IRQ input condition IRQ7 to IRQ0 Select IRQ input conditions not available when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected IRQ input condition High The status of the IRQ input is high Low The status of the IRQ input is low RENESAS 273 9 Timestamp page Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles The specification is not available when a time stamp is a
69. checked out i e being edited by a user The status command displays the current status of a file or file s To view the status of a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose status you would like to view You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Status of Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Status of Files menu option 9 2 7 Viewing the History of a File Visual SourceSafe controls the edits to the files in its projects and allows you to view the complete history of these edits right back to the time that the file was first added to the project To view the history of a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose history you would like to view You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Show History menu option 132 RENESAS 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options You can control the way in which the history and status commands are displayed by selecting Tools gt Version Control gt Configure To display the results of a history command in a dialog box then check the Display dialog box for history check box or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window To display the results of a status command in a dialog bo
70. current registered tool setup of the HEW 2 1 91 RENESAS 5 8 Custom Project Types The Project gt Create Project Type menu item in HEW allows you to create a template for your project This menu item takes the settings of the current project and then creates a project type for you The user can specify the name of the new type and style of the project generation wizard Once created these project types appear in the Tools Administration dialog and are initially hidden in the system components part of the tools administration tree To export one of the custom project generators select the Export button on the Tools Administration dialog The execution environments of the custom project generators are packaged on the execution file that can be installed When this file is executed on the target user s machine the custom project generator is installed 92 RENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 1 Customizing the Toolbar The High performance Embedded Workshop provides 2 standard toolbars as detailed in chapter 1 Overview In addition to these you may also construct your own toolbars via the Customize dialog figure 6 1 Customize Editor Merion Control Teal Ger rene Figure 6 1 Customize Dialog Toolbars Tab gt To create a new toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Click the New button The dialog shown i
71. dialog box shown in figure 5 17 Display Data As Byte amp 1 z Figure 5 17 Set Address Dialog Box Enter the range you wish to display as an address value or an equivalent symbol in the Begin and End fields Select the data size for the display from the Display Data As combo box Click the OK button or press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the Memory window opens The display can be scrolled within the range of the entered display start and end addresses Figure 5 18 Memory Window There are three display columns Address Address of the first item in the Data column of this row Data Data is read from the debugging platform s physical memory in the access width and then converted to the display width Value Data displayed in an alternative format 191 RENESAS 5 5 2 Displaying Data in Different Formats If you want to change the display format of the Memory window select Format from the popup menu The dialog box shown in figure 5 19 is displayed Format Memory Display Display Data As Byte amp 1 x Display Value As ANSI character v Value Font Courier New ne Cancel Figure 5 19 Format Memory Display Dialog Box To display and edit memory in different widths use the Display Data As combo box For example choose the Byte option and the display will be updated to show the memory area as individual byte
72. dialog is displayed figure 6 15 In the fields provided choose a suitable name for the placeholder and a description of what the placeholder means 5 Then choose a directory which relates to this placeholder It is possible to use placeholders that are already defined in this field such as PROJDIR 105 RENESAS New Custom Placeholder x Placeholder ma Cancel Description Directory Figure 6 14 New Custom Placeholder Dialog 6 9 Using Confirmation Dialog Boxes The HEW allows users to specify many items for confirmation even in a single operation These items are usually set by default However it may be annoying to handle the confirmation dialog boxes if you take the same operation several times Use the Confirmation page of the Options dialog box to control those confirmation dialog boxes gt To view the content of Display confirmation dialogs for 1 Select Tools gt Options Then select the Confirmation tab figure 6 16 2 Items to be confirmed are listed in the dialog box 3 To toggle a checkmark for an item select the checkbox on the left of the item s name Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Display confirmation dialogs for Splash Screen Set All Display Welcome dialog Load Program Clear All Unload Program Save Memory hitialize Target Download modules after build Load memory Verify me
73. emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism Emulator Product Throughout this document the term emulator product shall be defined as the following products produced only by Renesas Technology Corp excluding all subsidiary products e Emulator station e User system interface cables e PC interface board e Optional SIMM memory module e Optional board The user system or a host computer is not included in this definition Purpose of the Emulator Product This emulator product is a software and hardware development tool for systems employing the Renesas microcomputer hereinafter referred to as the MCU This emulator product must only be used for the above purpose Limited Applications This emulator product is not authorized for use in MEDICAL atomic energy aeronautical or space technology applications without consent of the appropriate officer of a Renesas sales company Such use includes but is not limited to use in life support systems Buyers of this emulator product must notify the relevant Renesas sales offices before planning to use the product in such applications Improvement Policy Renesas Technology Corp including its subsidiaries hereafter collectively referred to as Renesas pursues a policy of continuing improvement in design performance and safety of the emulator product Renesas reserves the right to change wholly or partially the specifications design user s manual and other documentatio
74. for binary 6 lt bitfields gt section defining the bits within the register Bitfield sections define the bits within a register each entry is of the type bit lt no gt lt name gt 1 lt no gt is the bit number 2 lt name gt is a symbolic name of the bit Comment lines are allowed and must start with a character An example is shown below 381 RENESAS Comment Module Module definition Register name Example H8S 2655 Series I O Register Definitions File Modules FileVersion 2 BaseAddress 0 Module1 Power_Down_Mode_Registers Module2 DMA_Channel_Common Module3 DMA_Channel_0 Module42 Bus_Controller Module43 System_Control Module44 Interrupt_Controller DMA_Channel_Common reg0 regDMAWER reg1 regDMATCR reg2 regDMACROA reg3 regDMACROB reg4 regDMACR1A reg5 regDMACR1B reg6 regDMABCRH reg7 regDMABCRL dep regMSTPCRH 7 0 Bit Value Register definition Register name regDMAWER id DMAWER Oxffff00 B A H dmawer_bitfields Address Size Absolute address flag Format Bit field dmawer_bitfields Bit field bit3 WE1B definition bit2 WE1A bit1 WE0B bit0 WE0A 382 RENESAS Appendix E Symbol File Format In order for HEW to be able to understand and decode the symbol file correctly the file must be formatted as a Pentica B file 1 The file must be a plain ASCII text file 2 The file must start with the word BEGIN 3 Each
75. greater C Hew HDIS SIM SH H diexe gt Browse Session file S CONFIGDIR S PROJECTNAME hds gt Browse Download module s CONFIGDIR S PR OJECTNAME abd gt Browse Cancel Figure 6 13 Customize Dialog Debugger Tab To use an external debugger check the Use external debugger checkbox and specify the items described below There are three items of information which need to be specified Firstly the location of the HDI executable must be specified This must be version 4 0 or greater otherwise the behavior is not guaranteed The second item of data is the session file This tells HDI which session to load when it is launched Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to HDI when the download module changes after a build Click the Launch External Debugger toolbar button to invoke HDI with the specified session file After a build if the download module has been updated the HEW will switch back to HDI to enable immediate debugging Whilst using HDI double clicking in any source window will switch back to the HEW with the source file open at the line which was double clicked 104 RENESAS 6 8 Using Custom Placeholders Throughout the High performance Embedded Workshop the user can use a number of pre defined placeholders for directory definitions For example the user can use the PROJDIR variable to signify the current
76. handling 5 15 10 Modifying Event Points Select an event point to be modified and choose Edit from the popup menu to open the dialog box that corresponds the event which allows the user to modify the event conditions The Edit menu is only available when one event point is selected 5 15 11 Enabling an Event Point Select an event point and choose Enable from the popup menu to enable the selected event point 5 15 12 Disabling an Event Point Select an event point and choose Disable from the popup menu to disable the selected event point When an event point is disabled the event point will remain in the list but an event will not occur when the specified conditions have been satisfied 5 15 13 Deleting an Event Point Select an event point and choose Delete from the popup menu to remove the selected event point To retain the event point but not have it cause an event when its conditions are met use the Disable option see section 5 15 12 Disabling an Event Point Note No trigger point can be deleted Use the Disable option to clear the settings 5 15 14 Deleting All Event Points Choose Delete All from the popup menu to remove all event points Note No trigger point can be deleted If Delete All is selected the settings of all channels become disabled 5 15 15 Viewing the Source Line for an Event Point Select an event point and choose Go to Source from the popup menu to open the Source or Disa
77. input and displayed in decimal Width Height Size Specifies the height and width of the image to be displayed partly Width Pixel Displays the width of display When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Height Pixel Displays the height of display When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal After the settings have been made in the Image Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Image View window Even after the Image View window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the popup menu Image Figure 5 99 Image View Window The memory content is displayed as an image 5 18 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh in the popup menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops 282 RENESAS 5 18 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the popup menu immediately updates the window contents 5 18 4 Displaying the Pixel Information Double clicking within the window displays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located in the Pixel Information dialog box Pixel Information Color mode Index Color Pixel Index No 195 Position eS a Buffer Size Width a Height aa 10 ef Image Size Width Height Fi
78. integrated text editor with user customizable syntax coloring to improve code readability e A configurable environment to run your own tools e An integrated debugger which allows you to build and debug in the same application e Version control support HEW has been designed with two key aims firstly to provide you the user with a set of powerful development tools and secondly to unify and present them in a way that is easy to use RENESAS About This Manual This manual is comprised of two parts HEW Part and Emulator Debugger Part HEW Part Information on the basic look and feel of the HEW and customizing the HEW environment and detail of the HEW s build function Emulator Debugger Part Preparation before use E6000 emulator functions debugging function tutorial and hardware and software specifications of the E6000 emulator This manual does not intend to explain how to write C C or assembly language programs how to use any particular operating system or how best to tailor code for the individual devices These issues are left to the respective manuals Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Visual SourceSafe is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation All brand or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organization
79. left and right of your printouts It is often necessary to set this because some printers cannot print to the edges of an A4 page Furthermore some users have their own layout requirements e g a large left hand margin so that code can be placed in an A4 binder gt To set up the page margins 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 2 Enter into the edit fields the margins required set the inch or mm radio buttons to set the measurements 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect Page Setup 12 xi Margins Left E Right fo Top fo Bottom fo Inch C mm Header gt Footer ome Figure 4 6 Page Setup Dialog gt To set up the page header and footers 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 2 Enter into the header and footer edit fields the text required to be displayed All normal placeholders are available along with page numbering text justification and date fields These are all expanded before the page is to be printed 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 71 RENESAS 4 8 2 Changing Tabs To change tab size 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Enter into the Tab size field the number of desired tabs 3 Click OK for the tab settin
80. lt 10 i 0 00001050 j rand 0200001058 if j lt 04 0x0000105a j j 0x0000105c ali j 0x00001070 p_sam gt sort a 0x0000107a p_sam gt change a 0x00001082 p_sam gt sO0 a 0 Ox0000108a4 p_sam gt sl a 1 0x00001096 p_sam gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 0x000010ae p_sam gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_sam gt sS a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 p_sam gt s a 7 0x000010de p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea p_sam gt s9 a 9 0x000010f6 delete p_sam 0x000010fc Figure 6 3 Source Window Displaying the Source Program e Select a font and size that are legible if necessary For details refer to section 4 Using the Editor in the HEW part Initially the Source window shows the start of the user program but the user can use the scroll bar to scroll through the user program and look at the other statements 302 RENESAS 6 4 Setting a PC Breakpoint A PC breakpoint is a simple debugging function The Source window provides a very simple way of setting a PC breakpoint at any point in a program For example to set a PC breakpoint at the sort function call e Select by double clicking the Editor column on the line containing the sort function call Tutorial a 0x00001038 void tutorial void Tutorial Ox00001044 C source file long a 10 dbsctc el Dis L sbrk c ee a i L 3 C source fie class S
81. of type combo box to select the type of file you want to open or set it to All Files to see every file in a directory 3 Once you have located the file select it and click Open The High performance Embedded Workshop keeps track of the last five files that you have opened and adds them to the file menu under the Recent Files sub menu This gives you a shortcut to opening files which you have used recently gt To open a recently used file Select the File gt Recent Files menu option and from this sub menu select the desired file You can also open a file via the Projects tab of the Workspace window Either double click the file you want to open or select it click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu and then choose the Open lt file gt menu option where lt file gt is the name of the file selected 4 3 5 Closing Files gt To close individual files select one of the following methods Double click on the editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window when not maximized Click on the editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window when not maximized and select the Close menu option Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then press CTRL F4 Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then select File gt Close Click on the close button located a
82. on the applicability of the information and products Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein Renesas Technology Corp semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake Please contact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes such as apparatus or systems for transportation vehicular medical aerospace nuclear or undersea repeater use The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and or the country of destination is prohibited Please contact Renesas Technology Corp for further details on these materials or the products contained therein IMPORTANT INFORMATION READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the
83. red STOP sign and when the program has stopped it is disabled the STOP sign is grayed out Click on the Halt toolbar button or choose Debug gt Halt Program When the program has been stopped by Halt Stop is displayed in the Debug sheet of the Output window 5 12 2 Standard Breakpoints PC Breakpoints When you are trying to debug your program you will want to be able to stop the program running when it reaches a specific point or points in your code You can do this by setting a PC breakpoint on the line or instruction at which to want the execution to stop The following instructions will show you how to quickly set and clear simple PC breakpoints If more complex breakpoint operation is required use the Event window which can be opened by clicking the nE button or choosing View gt Code gt Eventpoints For details refer to section 5 15 Using the Event Points e To set a PC breakpoint in the Source window 1 Make sure that the Disassemble or a Source window is open at the place you want to set a PC breakpoint 2 Choose Toggle Breakpoint from the popup menu or press F9 at the line showing the address at which you want the program to stop 3 You will see a red circle appear in the gutter to indicate that a PC breakpoint has been set 4 The current breakpoint set can be enabled or disabled by using Enable Disable Breakpoint in the popup menu Now when you run your program and it reaches the ad
84. session file used when the HEW is activated must be selected here Check the box against the target platform and then click the Next button For details on the session file refer to section 4 4 Debugger Sessions 159 RENESAS 4 Set the configuration file name The configuration file saves the state of HEW except for the emulator Target name E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Configuration name Debue_yyyy_E6000_Emulator_GP Detail options Modify Finish Cancel nw I a O Q Figure 4 6 New Project Step 8 Dialog Box If multiple target platforms were selected in the New Project Step 7 dialog box shown in figure 4 5 set the name of a configuration file for each of them each time pressing the Next button to proceed to the next target Setting of the configuration file name is the end of the emulator settings Click the Finish button to display the Summary dialog box Pressing the OK button activates the HEW 5 After the HEW has been activated the emulator is automatically connected The message Connected is displayed on the Debug tab in the Output window to indicate the completion of connection 160 RENESAS 4 2 2 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Used 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the HEW is activated select Create a new project workspace radio button and click the OK button yy Open a recent projec
85. symbol must be on a separate line with the value first in hexadecimal terminated by an H followed by a space then the symbol text 4 The file must end with the word END Example BEGIN 11FAH Symbol_name_1 11FCH Symbol_name_2 11FEH Symbol_name_3 1200H Symbol_name_4 END 383 RENESAS 384 RENESAS Appendix F Menus Table F 1 shows GUI menus Table F 1 GUI Menus Toolbar Menu Option Shortcut Button Remarks View Disassembly Ctrl D Opens the Disassembly window Command Line Ctrl L el Opens the Command Line window l Workspace Alt K m Opens the Workspace window Output Alt U A Opens the Output window CPU Registers Ctrl R Opens the Registers window Memory Ctrl M Opens the Memory window IO Ctrl I Opens the IO window Status Ctrl U m Opens the Status window Extended Monitor c3 Opens the Extended Monitor window Monitor Monitor Shift a Opens the Monitor window Setting Ctrl E Windows Opens the Windows Select Select dialog box to list add or edit the Monitor window Sym Labels Shift E Opens the Labels window bol Ctrl A Watch Ctrl W El Opens the Watch window Locals Shift a Opens the Locals window Ctrl W Code Eventpoints Ctrl E E Opens the Eventpoints window Trace Ctrl T Opens the Trace window Stack Trace Ctrl K cal Opens the Stack Trace window 385
86. t care The status of the input probe signal is not detected Probe3 Detects the status of the input probe signal 3 High Detects the high level of the input probe signal Low Detects the low level of the input probe signal Don t care The status of the input probe signal is not detected Probe2 Detects the status of the input probe signal 2 High Detects the high level of the input probe signal Low Detects the low level of the input probe signal Don t care The status of the input probe signal is not detected 238 RENESAS Probe1 Detects the status of the input probe signal 1 High Detects the high level of the input probe signal Low Detects the low level of the input probe signal Don t care The status of the input probe signal is not detected 4 Action page Use this page to decide what action the emulator takes when the defined event occurs Breakpoint Event Properties General Bus Area Signals Action pe id T Start Timer T Stop Timer Delay after detection before break occurs oo bus cycles Required number of event occurrences a Configure Sequence T Enable Sequencing Figure 5 63 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box Action Page Action Selects an action that occurs when the event is satisfied This cannot be used for an event point being used as the trace acquisition condition Break Causes a break stop in the user program w
87. tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 13 allows you to control the way in which the version control tool is executed It also shows the full path to the current version control configuration file 8 4 1 Prompt before executing command If this check box is set then before any version control commands are executed a dialog is displayed figure 8 15 which lists all of the files involved in the operation Files may be deselected by clearing the associated check box Clicking OK will apply the command to each of the selected files Clicking Cancel will abort the operation History 21 x Files demo c c hew demo demo sbrk c c hew demo demo vecttbl sre c hew demo demo Figure 8 15 Command Prompt Dialog Example 8 4 2 Run in DOS Window By default the output of the version control commands is redirected to the Version Control tab of the Output window If you would rather run each command in a separate DOS window then set this check box 8 4 3 Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter By default when the HEW substitutes the placeholder VCDIR it uses the backward slash character to divide directories However if the version control system you are using uses a forward slash character e g Visual SourceSafe to divide directories then set the Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter 8 5 Import
88. the BaseAddress value is subtracted from the defined register address and the resultant offset added to the relevant base address for the selected mode Each module has a section that defines the registers forming it along with an optional dependency The dependency is checked to see if the module is enabled or not Each register name must be defined in the section and the numbering of each register must be sequential The dependency is entered in the section as dep lt reg gt lt bit gt lt value gt 1 lt reg gt is the register id of the dependency 2 lt bit gt is the bit position within the register 3 lt value gt is the value that the bit must be for the module to be enabled The Register definition entry is entered in the format id lt name gt lt address gt lt size gt lt absolute gt lt format gt lt bitfields gt 1 lt name gt register name to be displayed 2 lt address gt address of the register 3 lt size gt which may be B W or L for byte word or longword default is byte 4 lt absolute gt which can be set to A if the register is at an absolute address This is only relevant if the I O area address range moves about on the CPU in different modes In this case if a register is defined as absolute the base address offset calculation is not performed and the specified address is used directly 5 lt format gt format for register output Valid values are H for Hexadecimal D for decimal and B
89. the Environment for further information Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark Toggle Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks l i Ea o oo oo h Figure 1 3 Bookmarks Toolbar Toggle Breakpoint Command Line Enable Disable Breakpoint View Disasse mbly Radix l aw ales og 2 8 Figure 1 4 Debug Toolbar Reset GPU Step Over Go to Cursor Step Out Reset Go Set PC to Cursor Go Step Halt l 1 ET E Ei EL OP 4 Figure 1 5 Debug Run Toolbar New File Print Find Toggle Bookmark Open File Cut Find in File Save File Copy Match Braces sili ha hsert Template e N paat OSE S Bangiir Tra Figure 1 6 Editor Toolbar Find in Files Find Next Search Strine Find Find Previous a alee L ao ANRA Figure 1 7 Search Toolbar RENESAS Build Build All Current Congifuration Current Session Launch Slave Hew View Workspace Build File Stop Launch Debugger View Output seess a alr m Figure 1 8 Standard Toolbar Template Selection Define Template Insert Template al l T Templated T Figure 1 9 Templates Toolbar Add File s Check Out File s Remove File s Check h Files pas File ts a Status Se F A Figure 1 10 Version Control Toolbar When the Standard toolbar or a toolbar is docked it has a control bar as shown in figure 1 11 i If you want to move the docked Standard toolbar cli
90. the specified data Point Specifies single data not available when Don t care has been checked Range Specifies a data range not available when Don t care has been checked From Enter single data or the minimum value of the data range not available when Don t care has been checked To Enter the maximum value of the data range only available when Range has been selected Note Along with setting the data range the minimum and maximum values can be set in the From and To options respectively 268 RENESAS 4 R W page Select the type of access cycles Trace Filter Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data RAV Area r Setting RD WR Cancel Apply Figure 5 87 Trace Filter Dialog Box R W Page Don t care Detects no read write condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified read write condition RD Detects read cycles when this box is checked not available when Don t care has been checked WR Detects write cycles when this box is checked not available when Don t care has been checked 269 RENESAS 5 Area page Select the area being accessed The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data RAV Area im ROM RAM 170 16 170 8 EXT 16 EXT 8 RAM DTC
91. this check box if you would like the High performance Embedded Workshop to automatically open the last workspace you opened when it is launched 6 4 2 Restore the files on opening workspace When you close a workspace the HEW stores which files were open When you open a workspace the HEW can restore i e open the same files so that you can continue your session in exactly the same state as when you left it If you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when you open a workspace then set this check box 99 RENESAS 6 4 3 Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace When many workspaces are being used it is sometimes difficult to remember exactly what was contained within each workspace To help resolve this the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to enter a textual description of each workspace gt To enter a workspace description 1 Select the workspace icon from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop up menu and then select the Properties option The dialog shown in figure 6 10 will be displayed 3 Enter the description into the Information field 4 Check the Show workspace information on workspace open check box if you want a workspace properties dialog to be launched on opening a workspace This check box has the same role as the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace on the
92. way through the current function You can do this with the Step Out feature To step out of the current function either click the Step Out toolbar button or choose Debug gt Step Out 215 RENESAS 5 11 6 Multiple Steps You can step several instructions at a time by using the Step Program dialog box The dialog box also provides an automated step with a selectable delay between steps Open it by choosing Debug gt Step The Step Program dialog box is displayed Step Program Delay seconds 1 25 seconds ha Step Over Calls Source Level Step Caneel Figure 5 44 Step Program Dialog Box Steps Number of steps to be executed Delay seconds Delay between steps when the program is automatically stepped Value 0 to 6 can be specified where value 0 indicates the longest delay Step Over Calls Selecting this box steps over function calls Source Level Step Selecting this box steps the program at the source level Clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key starts step execution 216 RENESAS 5 12 Stopping Your Program This section describes how you can halt execution of your application s code This section describes how to do this directly by using the Halt button and by setting breakpoints at specific locations in your code 5 12 1 Stopping the Program by the Halt Toolbar Button When your program is running the Halt toolbar button is enabled a
93. which you would like to create the folder specified in the Project name field 9 Click OK 10 HEW will require you to repeat steps 7 9 for as many projects as are present in the current workspace SourceSafe Login 2 xi Username Password _Cancel_ Database path Browse Figure 9 1 SourceSafe Login Dialog 129 RENESAS Create SourceSafe Project 2 xi Project name proiect Cancel project Ea C aaip E ariel E bp E commit E def x Figure 9 2 Create SourceSafe Project The HEW has now created the necessary projects within Visual SourceSafe and sets up the version control toolbar and menu for immediate access However although the Visual SourceSafe projects themselves have been created no files have been added to them 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe The previous section has only established the mappings between the project directory on your hard disk i e the working directory and the project directory in Visual SourceSafe i e the controlled directory Although the project directory and any subdirectories on your hard disk may contain many source files whereas the directly its mapped to in Visual SourceSafe will be initially empty Firstly you must select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system To add a file or files to Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to add to Visual SourceSafe You may also select a f
94. will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 2 Select the menu option that you would like to modify and then click the Modify button 3 Make the desired changes on the Modify Tool dialog figure 6 6 and then click OK ModifyT ool 21x Command EINDIR explorer exe gt Browse Arguments 2 Initial directory Ss TEMPOIR D Browse Figure 6 6 Modify Tool Dialog To remove a menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 2 Select the menu option that you would like to remove and then click the Remove button 97 RENESAS 6 3 Configuring the Help System The High performance Embedded Workshop provides context sensitive help within the editor window In other words if you select some text in the editor window and then press F1 the High performance Embedded Workshop will attempt to locate help on that selected item The help files which will be searched are listed in the Help tab of the Customize dialog gt To add a new help file 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Help tab see figure 6 7 Customize 2 xi Toolbars Commands Menu Debugger Log Help Help files Description File Name Add Remove Default help file None 7 Figure
95. will be launched e You must save your own files before you perform a build file build or build all operation 6 6 Customizing File Save The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to customize file save on the Editor tab of the Options dialog figure 6 11 To open the tab select Tools gt Options and click the Editor tab The following sections explain the options related to file save 6 6 1 Save files before executing any tools To force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving edited files before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control commands set the Save files before executing any tools check box 6 6 2 Prompt before saving files In addition to the above check box set this to prompt before saving 103 RENESAS 6 7 Using an External Debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu The Debugger tab of the Customize dialog figure 6 13 is where the HDI related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supported in the new environment Invoke it by selecting Tools gt Customize and then selecting the Debugger tab Toolbars Commands Menu Debugger Log Help MV Use extemal debugger HDI location 4 0 or
96. workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Get Files toolbar button amp or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Get Files menu option 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive This can only be done if another user does not already check out the file or files in question To check out a writable copy of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to check out from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Check Out Files toolbar button S or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check Out Files menu option 131 RENESAS 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of a File into Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users gt To check in edits made to a file or files in Visual S
97. 00001772 Breakpoint Figure 5 57 Event Window Breakpoint Sheet 232 RENESAS Select Add or the PC breakpoint displayed in this window and then select Edit from the popup menu to display the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Breakpoint Event Properties General Type Address C DonitCare Address Range Address Lo C Event H 00000000 Address Hi J Outside Range m Data Compare Direction 4 F Compare F Use Mast C Read jo Write Word Figure 5 58 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box Setting a PC Break In this dialog box select the address condition to set PC breakpoints Type Select the type of a breakpoint Note that the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box is used for setting PC breakpoints and event points Selecting a particular type of breakpoint enables or disables other pages and parts of the dialog according to the options available to that type of breakpoint PC Break Only a single address with a program fetch can be selected Other options are invalid Event Set conditions in detail with other options on this page or on the Bus Area Signals or Action page Address Set address conditions Adderess Lo Select a single address where a PC breakpoint will be set 233 RENESAS 5 15 7 Setting Event Points On the Event sheet the settings for event points are displayed modifie
98. 0_Emulator_CP Source File name Tutorial hws Files of type Workspaces hws 7 Cancel 4 Figure 6 1 Open Workspace Dialog Box Opening this workspace automatically connects the emulator 300 RENESAS 6 3 Downloading the Tutorial Program 6 3 1 Downloading the Tutorial Program Download the object program to be debugged e Select Download module from Tutorial abs of Download modules E Tutorial Tutorial 3 8 C source file L dbsct c L sbrk c C source file L resetprg cpr E sort cpp E Tutorial cpp 3 4 Download modu IB Tutoria 3 Depender Download module E sbrk h Unload module E sort h Configure View v Allow Docking Hide Figure 6 2 Downloading the Tutorial Program 301 RENESAS 6 3 2 Displaying the Source Program The HEW allows the user to debug a user program at the source level e Double click Tutorial cpp under C source file void main void gt Tutorial j 0x00001036 while 1 Tutorial 0x00001034 tutorial 3 C source file LE dbsct c i le ke 0x00001038 void tutorial void Sy C source file Ox00001044 resetprg cpp long a 10 sort cpp ae fal E Tutorial cpp tns T Download modules Glows Sanpla mp ear E Tutorial abs 0x00001046 p_sam new Sample 0x0000104e for i 0 i
99. 0us OOOns Count pooo m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 5 108 Start Point To End Point Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Point The range for the Start Point To End Point Measurement Start Address Address to start measurement End Address Address to end measurement Time Out The timeout value to finish measurement When the minimum time for measurement is 160 ns 40 ns or 20 ns enter the value as follows Example 1h 2min 3s 123ms 456us 789ns If the CPU operating mode is target enter a hexadecimal number in 10 digits Example 123456789A A break occurs every time a value measured in the specified range exceeds the timeout value not the total time This is only available for channel 1 Count The count up value used in measurement of the execution count A break occurs every time the execution count exceeds the count up value This is only available for channel 1 Measures the execution time and the execution count in the range between start address and end address Starts measurement with a detected program prefetch at the start address and then stops with a detected program prefetch at the end address The execution count is incremented every time the program is prefetched at the end address of the specified range The execution time measured includes the time spent
100. 2 Ox00ffef98 H 00001 cfb Ox00ffefSc H 00003f54 Ox00ffefad H OOOOOHE Ox00ffefad H 000a R4 RENESAS lona 1 0 long long long long long long long long long long int Figure 6 18 Watch Window Displaying Array Elements 6 11 Displaying Local Variables The user can display local variables in a function using the Locals window For example we will examine the local variables in the tutorial function which declares four local variables a j i and p_sam e Select Locals from the Symbol submenu of the View menu The Locals window is displayed The Locals window shows the local variables in the function currently pointed to by the program counter along with their values Note however that the Locals window is initially empty because local variables are yet to be declared I ox Name E OxO0ffef80 lona 1 O i H 00ffef80 ERS long i H 000a R4 int p_sam Ox00ffbOd8 ERE class Sample Figure 6 19 Locals Window e Click mark at the left side of array a in the Locals window to display the elements e Refer to the elements of array a before and after the execution of the sort function and confirm that random data is sorted in descending order 313 RENESAS 6 12 Stepping Through a Program The HEW provides a range of step menu commands that allow efficient program debugging Table 6 1
101. 2 DMA_Channel_Common Module3 DMA_Channel_0 Comment Module42 Bus_Controller Module43 System_Control Module44 Interrupt_Controller DMA_Channel_Common DMAWER Oxffff00 B A DMATCR Oxffff01 BA DMACROA Oxffff02 B A DMACROB Oxffff03 B A DMACR1A Oxffff04 B A DMACR1B 0xffff05 B A DMABCRH Oxffff06 B A DMABCRL 0Xffff07 B A Register definition DMA_Channel_0 MAROAH OxfffeeO W A MAROAL Oxfffee2 W A IOAROA Oxfffee4 W A ETCROA Oxfffee6 W A MAROBH Oxfffee8 W A MAROBL Oxfffeea W A IOAROB Oxfffeec W A ETCROB Oxfffeee W A Address Size Absolute address flag Register name 380 RENESAS D 2 File format Bit Field Supported Each module name must be defined in the Modules definition section and the numbering of each module must be sequential Each module corresponds to a register definition section and within the section each entry defines an I O register The user must define File Version 2 at the start of the section It means that this I O register file is described with the version that supports the bit field The BaseAddress definition is for devices where the location of I O registers moves in the address space depending on the CPU mode In this case the BaseAddress value is the base address of the I O registers in one specific mode and the addresses used in the register definitions are the address locations of the registers in the same mode When the I O register file is actually used
102. 230 RENESAS Range Channels Ch9 to Ch12 The emulator has 4 range channels The range channel can be defined as a combination of one or more of the followings e An address or an address range e Outside of an address range e A read a write or either e Data with a mask specification e Bus state e Area e The value of four external probe signals e The number of delay cycles after the event has occurred 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas In the event detection system signals indicating the MCU s bus states and the accessed areas can be specified as the event detection condition These signals are output from the MCU on the emulator the signals to be acquired will vary according to the emulator in use The signals to indicate bus states and areas are used to set the Bus Area condition of the event point They can also be acquired as the trace information The bus state signals are also used to set the condition not to acquire the trace Suppress option and in the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement mode for measuring the hardware performance Access Type option For the trace function refer to section 5 16 Viewing the Trace Information For the hardware performance function refer to section 5 20 Analyzing Performance The following tables show examples of signals to indicate the bus states and areas that can be acquired by the emulator Table 5 1 Bus State Signals Acquired by the Emulat
103. 3 1 Debugging Features 3 1 1 Breakpoints The emulator provides a comprehensive range of alternative types of breakpoints to give you the maximum flexibility in debugging applications and user system Hardware Break Conditions Up to 12 break conditions can be defined using the event and range channels in the complex event system CES For more information about the hardware break conditions see section 3 2 Complex Event System CES Program Breakpoints PC Breakpoints Up to 256 program breakpoints can be defined These program breakpoints are set by replacing the user instruction by a BREAK instruction In target ROM only one breakpoint on chip break can be set 3 1 2 Trace The emulator incorporates a powerful realtime trace facility which allows you to examine MCU activity in detail The realtime trace buffer holds up to 32768 bus cycles and it is continuously updated during execution The buffer is configured as a rolling buffer which can be stopped during execution and read back by the host computer without halting emulation The data stored in the trace buffer is displayed in both source program and assembly languages for ease of debugging However if trace filtering is used only assembly language can be displayed The buffer can be set up to store all bus cycles or just selected cycles This is called trace acquisition and uses the complex event system CES to select the parts of the program you are interested in It is
104. 6 7 Customize Dialog Help Tab 2 Click the Add button The Add Help File dialog will be displayed figure 6 8 3 Enter a description of the help file into the Title field 4 Enter the full path of the help file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking on the Browse button 5 Click OK to define the new help file Add Help File 24 x Title OK Programming in ANSI C Cancel Path fe flesthelp ansihip Figure 6 8 Add Help File Dialog 98 RENESAS To make a help file the default choice select it from the Default help file drop down list or set it to None if you would like to be prompted for a help file when F1 is pressed 6 4 Specifying Workspace Options The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to control several aspects of a workspace via the Options dialog figure 6 9 To invoke it select Tools gt Options and select the Workspace tab Options 2 xi Build Editor Workspace Confirmation IV Restore files on opening workspace Tl Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace Save workspace before executing any tools J Prompt before saving workspace Default directory for new workspaces c hew2 Browse Figure 6 9 Options Dialog Workspace Tab The following sections explain the options available on this tab 6 4 1 Open last workspace at start up Set
105. CCR The mask is set to 1 and the The mask is set to 1 and the other bits are undefined other bits are undefined 7 3 1 A D Converter and D A Converter Due to the use of a user system interface cable there is a slight degradation in the A D and D A conversion than that quoted in the Hardware Manual for the MCU being emulated 352 RENESAS Section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product This section describes the software specifications of the H8S 2168 E6000 emulator 8 1 Software Specifications of the H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator Information specific to this emulator is given below 8 1 1 Target Hardware This emulator software conforms to the H8S 2168 E6000 emulator HS2168EPI61H 8 1 2 Selectable Platform The debugging platform selectable in this emulator is as follows The MCUs that can be emulated differ depending on the debugging platform selected Table 8 1 Selectable Target Platform Debugging Platform Remark H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 For emulation of the MCUs that have the H8S 2000 CPU as the core RENESAS 353 8 1 3 Configuration Properties Dialog Box General Page Items that can be set in this dialog box are listed below H8S 2168 El 2 advanced mode on chip ROM v Mainam d Flash Memory Control M M E Figure 8 1 Configuration Properties Dialog Box General Page 354 RENESAS General page Device Selects th
106. Change driver in start up on the Configuration Properties dialog box allows a selection of the driver next time the emulator is connected E6000 Driver Details Driver HS AE r Details Interface juse interface x Channel E6000 USB Interface Configuration Configure I Change driver in start up Figure 5 3 Driver Details Dialog Box Driver Selects the driver that connects the HEW and the emulator Details Sets the details of the driver being connected Interface The name of the interface to be connected This should not be changed in this emulator Channel Channel for the selected interface This should not be changed in this emulator Configuration Driver setting Configure A dialog box for setting will be displayed when the driver supports the configuration dialog Note that this item is not available with this emulator Change driver in start up Checking this box selects the driver when the emulator is connected the next time 178 RENESAS 5 1 4 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box Selecting Options gt Emulator gt Memory Resource or clicking the Emulator Memory Resource toolbar button opens the Memory Mapping dialog box Memory Mapping System Memory Resources Erm To Mapping Add SIMM Module Tears Carag IP cr glace 1MB SIMM fitted ser Guarde dodifu Ram Bases OOFFB000 OOFFEFBF On Chip R
107. Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics C 7 D mh on lt D D tENESAS H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator User s Manual H8S 2168 E6000 HS2168EPI61HE U2 Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System Renesas Electronics Rev 2 0 2004 02 www renesas com Cautions Keep safety first in your circuit designs 1 Renesas Technology Corp puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury fire or property damage Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs with appropriate measures such as i placement of substitutive auxiliary circuits ii use of nonflammable material or iii prevention against any malfunction or mishap Notes regarding these materials 1 These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corp product best suited to the customer s application they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights or any other rights b
108. G 1 LULL 1 11111111 05567 000404 efcO RD ROM PROG 1 iii i miini 05566 000406 MOV L ER6 ER7 0100 RD ROM PROG 1 ai a iiini 05565 000408 6df6 RD ROM PROG 1 1111 1 11111111 05564 00040a MOV L ER 7 ER6 Off6 RD ROM PROG a llll 1 11111111 05563 ffefbe OOff WR RAM DTC DATA 1 alll or luau 05562 ffefbe efb4 UR RAM DTC DATA t arn x 11111111 05561 00040c ORC B H 80 CCR 0480 RD ROM PROG l 1111 I 11111111 set_imas 05560 00040e JSR __INITSCT 24 Se00 RD ROM PROG 1 1111 X 11111111 _INITSCT 05559 000410 llc2 RD ROM PROG 1 i i ii 05558 00llc2 MOY W R2 Q ER7 6df2 RD ROM PROG 1 1111 1 11111111 __INITSCT 05557 ffefbs 0000 WR RAM DTC DATA 11r 1 11111111 05556 ffefba 0412 WR RAM DTC DATA L llll T 11111111 05555 00llc4 STM L ER4 ER6 SP 0120 RD ROM PROG 1 alll luau 05554 ffefb6 0000 WR RAM DTC DATA 1 iiL 1l LILLIA xl Figure 5 67 Trace Window This window displays the following trace information items PTR Cycle number in the trace buffer When the most recent record is record 0 earlier record numbers go backwards 1 2 If a delay count has been set the cycle number where the trace stop condition has been satisfied is record 0 For the cycle during delay executed until the trace has stopped earlier record numbers go forward 1 2 the most recent record Address Address 6 digit hexadecimal Instruction Disassembled code of the executed instruction Data Data bus value displayed as 2 digit or 4 digi
109. Lists the event points to be used as trace acquisition conditions Add Adds a new event point Edit Changes the setting for the selected event point Sequence Configures an event sequence for the event point being used as a trace acquisition condition To set up the sequence an event must have been set Delete Deletes the selected event point Del All Deletes all event points Notes 1 The bus cycles that can be specified by the Suppress option vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 2 The trace buffer is used for the time stamp information and some of the trace information Therefore when the time stamp is acquired it is impossible to acquire the trace information other than PTR Address Instruction Data R W Source Label and Timestamp 3 If an event that is used for the range trace or trace stop function is deleted that function becomes disabled 247 RENESAS 2 Stop page Sets trace stop conditions It is possible to set trace stop conditions with and without delay with both allowed simultaneously Figure 5 69 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Stop Page Stop Without Delay Defines a trace stop condition Enable Checking this box enables a trace stop Events Lists the event points where trace acquisition conditions have been set If the box that corresponds to an event point is checked trace acqui
110. O and NMI The NMI signal is input to the MCU through the emulator control circuit The rising falling time of the NMI signal must be 8 ns V or less The mode pins are only monitored The CPU mode depends on the configuration settings of the HEW Emulator control O User system circuit interface cable RESET Emulator control circuit O User system interface cable Figure 7 4 User System Interface Circuit for RESET ANO AN7 AVcc AVss and Vref AVcc Z 472 User system MCU ANO AN7 interface cable Z AVss 0 022 uF O AVcc User system O Vref interface cable O AVss 0 022 uF 0 022 uF Figure 7 5 User System Interface Circuit for ANO AN7 AVcc AVss and Vref Signals 351 RENESAS 7 3 Differences between MCU and Emulator When the emulator is turned on or initialized or the system is reset there are some differences in the initial values in some of the general registers between the MCU and the emulator as shown in table 7 2 Table 7 2 Initial Value Differences between MCU and Emulator Status Register E6000 Emulator MCU Power on PC Reset vector value Reset vector value lninalized ERO toER6 Undefined Undefined ER7 SP H 10 Undefined CCR The mask is set to 1 and the The mask is set to 1 and the other bits are undefined other bits are undefined Reset command PC Reset vector value Reset vector value ERO to ER6 Undefined Undefined ER7 SP H 10 Undefined
111. OK to add the new variable to the Environment list Environment Variable 21x Variable OK i Value eoo Placeholder popup menu Figure 8 11 Environment Variable Dialog To modify an environment variable select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment list and then click the Modify button beside it Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable back to the list To remove an environment variable select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment list and then click the Remove button beside it 122 RENESAS 8 3 3 Specifying Comments If a command contains the placeholder COMMENT then the HEW will request that you enter the comment when the command is executed via the dialog as shown in figure 8 12 Please Enter Comment 21x File c hew demo demo sbrk c Cancel Comment T Apply comment to all files Figure 8 12 Please Enter Comment Dialog You may specify a comment for each file or if you would like to specify the same comment for all files check the Apply comment to all files check box before clicking OK 123 RENESAS 8 3 4 Specifying a User Name and Password Most version control tools will require you to pass a user name and password on the command line in order to keep files secure and to keep a record of which file
112. OR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT IN NO EVENT SHALL RENESAS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECTIVE EMULATOR PRODUCT THE USE OF ANY EMULATOR PRODUCT OR ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS WARRANTY THIS EMULATOR PRODUCT IS SOLD AS IS AND YOU MUST ASSUME ALL RISK FOR THE USE AND RESULTS OBTAINED FROM THE EMULATOR PRODUCT zeENESAS State Law Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which may vary from state to state The Warranty is Void in the Following Cases Renesas shall have no liability or legal responsibility for any problems caused by misuse abuse misapplication neglect improper handling installation repair or modifications of the emulator product without Renesas prior written consent or any problems caused by the user system All Rights Reserved This user s manual and emulator product are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by Renesas No part of this user s manual all or part may be reproduced or duplicated in any form in hard copy or machine readable form by any means availabl
113. RENESAS Table F 1 GUI Menus cont Menu Option Toolbar Shortcut Button Remarks View Gra Image Shift LJ Opens the Image window cont phic Ctrl G Waveform Shift Opens the Waveform Ctrl V window Per Performance Opens the Performance form Analysis ance Shift Ctrl P Analysis window Options Debug Sessions Opens the Debug Sessions dialog box to list add or remove the debug session Debug Settings Opens the Debug Settings dialog box to set the debugging conditions or download modules Radix Hexadecimal Uses a hexadecimal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Decimal El Uses a decimal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Octal Uses an octal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Binary Uses a binary for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Emu System lator z Opens the Configuration dialog box allowing the user to modify the debugging platform settings Memory Resource 386 Ll RENESAS Opens the Memory Mapping dialog box allowing the user to view and edit the debugging platform s current memory map Table F 1 GUI Menus c
114. Shows that the E6000 is correctly operating H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator User s Manual Publication Date Rev 2 00 February 17 2004 Published by Sales Strategic Planning Div Renesas Technology Corp Edited by Technical Documentation amp Information Department Renesas Kodaira Semiconductor Co Ltd 2004 Renesas Technology Corp All rights reserved Printed in Japan H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator User s Manual 2CENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation 1753 Shimonumabe Nakahara ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 211 8668 Japan REJ10B0057 0200H
115. Source phase drop down list box Select the destination phase i e which phase takes these files from the Destination phase drop down list box Click OK to create the new mapping Define File Mapping 2 x File group fobiectfie Cancel Source phase Assembler Destination phase eee Figure 3 17 Define File Mapping Dialog gt To modify a file mapping 1 2 Click Modify button The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked figure 3 17 3 4 Click OK to commit the changes Select the mapping to be modified Modify the options as necessary 53 RENESAS 3 6 Controlling the Build By default the High performance Embedded Workshop will execute all of the phases in a build and only stop if a fatal error is encountered You can change this behavior by setting the controls on the Build tab of the Options dialog figure 3 18 Options 2 x Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Errors and warnings V Stop build if the no of warnings exceed 10 Show I Command line I Environment J Initial directory Figure 3 18 Options Dialog Build Tab Select Tools gt Options to invoke the dialog If you want to stop the build when a certain number of errors are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of errors exceed check box and then specify the error count limit in the edit field to the right If you want t
116. Specific to This Product or the online help 176 RENESAS 5 1 2 Selecting an MCU Not Included in the List Selecting Custom in Device of the Configuration Properties dialog box adds the Custom Device page to the dialog box nfiguration Properties 2 x I General Custom Device ROM Bees x F Enable Flash memory RAM 16kB he Pin 120 128PinB Modules V Enable DTC M Enable DA A D Converter M Enable D A Converter Enable ICO a i IV Enable Refresh Controller MV Enable 1101 a M Enable DMAC M Enable WDT1 SCI Select M Enable TPU3 5 Enable TMR2 3 C sco nt scio 2 IV Enable PwM14 C scio3 M Enable MultiProcesserComunication SCI1 4 SCI0 4 Figure 5 2 Configuration Properties Dialog Box Custom Device Page Use this page to specify functions for an MCU not included in the list of MCUs The items are adopted by the device last selected Custom Device page ROM Specify the on chip ROM area size RAM Specify the on chip RAM area size Pin Specify the product package Modules Check this box to validate on chip peripherals Note The items that can be set in this dialog box vary according to the emulator in use Some emulators may not support the Custom Device function For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 177 RENESAS 5 1 3 Selecting the Interface to be Connected Checking
117. Symbol gt Locals or click the Locals toolbar button f 00 lona 1 0 i H OOffef80 ER5 long i H 000a R4 int p_sam Ox00ffbOd8 ERE class Sample Figure 5 56 Locals Window If a local variable is not initialized when defined then the value of the local variable will be incorrect until another value is assigned to the local variable The local variable values and the radix for local variable display can be modified in the same manner as in the Watch window 229 RENESAS 5 15 Using the Event Points The emulator has the event point function that performs breaking tracing and execution time measurement by specifying higher level conditions along with the PC breakpoints standard for the HEW 5 15 1 PC Breakpoints When the instruction of the specified address is fetched the user program is stopped Up to 256 points can be set Note that however only one PC breakpoint can be set in the ROM area of the user system This particular breakpoint is called the on chip breakpoint which stops the user program after executing the instruction of the specified address When it is necessary to set two or more PC breakpoints to the external ROM area of the user system allocate this area to the emulation memory copy the code and then set the PC breakpoints 5 15 2 Event Points Event points can be used for higher level conditions such as the data condition as well as specification of
118. TILL GT Executes user program until temporary breakpoint 30 HALT HA Halts the user program 31 INITIALIZE IN Initializes the debugging platform 32 LOG LO Controls command output logging 33 MAP_DISPLAY MA Displays memory mapping 34 MAP_SET MS Sets memory mapping 35 MEMORY_COMPARE MC Compares memory contents 36 MEMORY_DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents 37 MEMORY_EDIT ME Modifies memory contents 38 MEMORY FILL MF Modifies the content of a memory area by specifying data 39 MEMORY_MOVE MV Moves a block of memory 40 MEMORY_TEST MT Tests a block of memory 41 MODE MO Sets or displays the CPU mode 42 MODULES MU Sets up or displays the on chip peripheral functions 43 MONITOR_CLEAR MOC Deletes a monitor point 44 MONITOR_DISPLAY MOD Displays the content of the monitor 45 MONITOR_REFRESH MOR Controls an automatic update of the content of the monitor 46 MONITOR_SET MOS Sets or displays a monitor point 47 OPEN_WORKSPACE OW Opens a workspace 48 QUIT QU Exits HEW 49 RADIX RA Sets default input radix 50 REFRESH RF Updates windows related to memory 51 REGISTER_DISPLAY RD Displays CPU register values 52 REGISTER_SET RS Sets CPU register contents 53 RESET RE Resets CPU 54 SLEEP Delays command execution 55 STEP ST Steps program by instructions or source lines 56 STEP_MODE SM Sets the step mode 57 STEP_OUT SP Steps out of the current function 58 STEP_OVER SO Steps program not stepping into functions 59 STEP_RATE SR Sets or displays
119. TTS SAGA Loc ls WihIOW neresine Irre E VERO IEE ERa TEKOA NERA ITEAN Using the Event Points noninar tria TAE Noa SIST PG Break Points oeann A EEA KAORE 52152 Eyent POIt naeio sveanke GEENE AE E OEE 5 15 3 Event Detection System 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 5 15 5 Opening the Event Window 5 15 6 Setting PC Breakpoints sis iss sssiscsssavssessvssinscsavsccateieasccctevstsssevssodsuaevssesavasevevsaeescns 232 515 7 Setting Event Points 2c2 ccsscsccacceccssyacssvccagecteaancea Eea eni AEE ERKE RERS 234 9 15 8 Setting Trigger Points sicccccsccececassvecccnssencccgssvenccahovecscgeveuncesae ended EEO 242 5 15 9 Editing vent Points ioeo asierea r EEA E 243 5 15 10 Modifying Event Pointsi oreert iiia a a E E E EE Ras 243 5 15 11 Enabling an Event Point s sccscssicssssstsceevesssessssstatessassccsavassssassassaveavassscsscaatavessaacss 5 15 12 Disabling an Event Poititsicic c cccssessiescescssssesescsstsaacascstsvencsasansedosaseetesasatacosateaaces 541513 Deleting an Event Pointy eieiei niae AAEE e 5 15 14 Deleting All Event Points 5 15 15 Viewing the Source Line for an Event Point Viewing the Trace Information cceceeceeseeseeseceeeeeceeceseeaeeseesecaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeseeeseeeeaeeaeens 5 16 1 Opening the Trace Window cecescesceceeceeeeeseeseeseesececeeeeaeeaeeaeceeseeeeaeeneeaeens 5 16 2 Acquiring Trace Information sisisi ccsceesceeseeseesecseeeeceeeeeeeseeseeseceeeee
120. The HEW supports the Elf Dwarf2 object file format for debugging applications written in C C and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers It provides a powerful way of accessing observing and modifying the symbolic level debugging information about the user application that is running Key Features e Source level debugging e C C operators e C C expression casting pointers references etc e Ambiguous function names e Overlay memory loading e Watch locals and user defined e Stack Trace 5 13 1 C C Operators The C C language operators are available amp l 1 gt gt lt lt lt gt lt gt I amp amp Il Buffer_start 0x1000 R1 B 10001101 pointer 2 increment_size amp H FFFF0O000 gt gt D 15 flag ER4 5 13 2 C C Expressions Expression Examples Object value Specifies direct reference of a member C C p_Object gt value Specifies indirect reference of a member C C Class value Specifies reference of a member with class C value Specifies a pointer C C amp value Specifies a reference C C array 0 Specifies an array C C Object value Specifies reference of a member with pointer C g_value Specifies reference of a global variable C C Class function short Specifies a member function C struct STR value Specifies cast operation C C 219 RENESAS 5 13 3 Suppor
121. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http Awww renesas com inquiry 2CENESAS 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is gra
122. Trace Acquisition 21x General Stop Delayed Stop 1 2 3 4 Conditions Disabled Point to Point Range C Event Range Event Edit 9 R H 105C address Figure 6 47 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Setting Completed 8 Make the setting such that the break occurs after the instruction at the address on the line that has a i j within the tutorial function H 0000105C in this example has been executed five times for details on this refer to section 6 15 2 Breaking Execution at Event Points 9 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays the following content 10 x PTR Address Instruction Data R W Area Status Clock Probes NMI IRQ 7 0 Timestamp Source Label 00004 00105c EXTS L ER4 17f4 RD ROM PROG 1 1111 1 11111111 afi j 00003 00105c EXTS L ER4 17f4 RD ROM PROG 1 aIr t 11111111 ali j 00002 00105c EXTS L ER4 17 4 RD ROM PROG 1 1lll l 11111111 a i j 00001 00105c EXTS L ER4 17 4 RD ROM PROG 1 llll 1 11111111 afi j 00000 00105c EXTS L ER4 17f4 RD ROM PROG l 1111 t 11111111 ali j Figure 6 48 Trace Window Displaying the Result If you have trouble viewing a column drag the header vertical bars below the title bar to adjust the width of the column 10 Remove the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Click
123. Write Protect WEPEEHPTOESCE h ora write stat ot hstat ana stot aia OK Test Hardware Break Break Point Initialized OK Event Detectors CES channel 1 12 0OK Test Sequencing 1 OK Check Range Break 2 0055 4 ceee see siti ait OK Range Break Test for Data OK Check Compare Either OK Test Emulation RAM Trace Free Trace OK REN Ge Tra CS e355 Fevewensuendneusnsnsnsusweneusnsndnans OK Point Co Point Traces ase eee OK Start and Stop Event Trace OK Trace memory Overflow Time STAMP Trace 20MHz Time STAMP Trace 10MHz Time STAMP Trace TEST mode OK Test Runtime Counter Runtime counter 20 0MHz OK Runtime counter 10 0MHz OK Runtime counter SUB 32 768kHz OK Test Emulation Monitor FMA 2S SEIMA 0 yrker kekk we etneaces fences ncenden andes ndanden deter eranden gran denande k OK ACSTAHACS TO cashes esi geese sire ee Gi geee Meas diate Ceas ai ide Cait soley OK ASEST3 ASESTO OK ASEBRKACK ONIN eea 5 ies 9 E E E teste NOCLK NOCLK2 WINDOW pai ieth Sigel suatat Sibi sighat gugtal Sieh sigiagustal subsist gustangne SUBACT carer erenergrererarereigr agi ar ei gieigi gt ear ar eigtae gt ar erareiergr erst arenes OK OTHER lt sivstsetartgisattettettatiottot ot ai ni lot ot nt ate at at at at et tiatint at at el af otlotiet at atiehietieiie OK Test PERFM_GA PIMOAMCASUT SF rietiobates stietotot etahotot
124. a directory other than lt Drive gt Diag such as gt lt Drive gt Diag TM2168 PCI RET If the test program is initiated when the current directory is not lt Drive gt Diag the test program will not operate correctly When S is added to the command line such as gt TM2168 PCI S RET steps 1 to 20 will be repeatedly executed To stop the execution enter Q Notes 1 lt Drive gt is a drive name for the CD ROM drive 2 Do not remove the CD R from the CD ROM drive during test program execution 394 RENESAS The following messages are displayed during test This test consists of steps 1 to 20 Message E6000 H8S 2168 Emulator Tests Vx x BOaAGInNG AGAVE oes seers eee gree er EEA OK Use PCI initialis Ag ALiver sic iseis seis aioe le ee es OK Searching for interface card OK Checking emulator is connected OK Emulator Board Information Main Board ID H S Emulation Board ID H 0d SUB Board ID H 6 1 Test Register A ADRO REGISTE sw sd hah OK B PAGE REGisSt Or eco yr arrra OK C TRACE G A Register OK D PERFM G A Register OK E CES GA registr pace ceee cess OK EJ ADRT REGLSCEOL see ee ee ee ee eS OK G IORS IREGASTE rs essiseseneseseacsenceeee ace OK 2 Test DPRAM A DE COGE TOSE WANNAN AS OK Pi Marchini Test lt ininteteteletetets lets tete ites ts OK RENESAS Description Test program start message Vx x shows the version number Shows that t
125. a file that has changed since the last build For instance if the file test c include s the file header h and the latter has changed since the last build the file test c will be recompiled gt To perform a build Select Build gt Build or click the build toolbar button or press F7 or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build from the pop up menu The build all option compiles and assembles all source files irrespective of whether they have been modified or not and links all of the new object files produced gt To perform a build all Select Build gt Build All or click the build all toolbar button or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build All from the pop up menu Both the build and the build all will terminate if any of the project files produce errors 2 6 2 Building Individual Files The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build project files individually gt To build an individual file 1 Select the file which you want to build from the project window 2 Select Build gt Build File click the build file toolbar button amp or press CTRL F7 or click the right mouse button on a file icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build lt file gt from the pop up menu 27 RENESAS 2 6
126. access prohibited area or writes to a write protected area Enable internal ROM area write When this box is checked writing to the on chip ROM area is enabled For the result of writing see the Extended Monitor window User VCC Threshold Sets the voltage level for the user system Down will be displayed in User System Voltage of the Extended Monitor window when the actual user VCC of the target system is lower than the specified value User Signals When this box is checked the reset NMI and standby signals from the user system are enabled Do not input the standby signal because the hardware standby function is not supported Trace Selects the IRQ inputs to be acquired by tracing IRQ7 IRQO IRQO to IRQ7 are acquired IRQ15 IRQ8 IRQ8 to IRQ15 are acquired Driver Displays the E6000 driver that is currently installed Change driver in start up When this box is checked selection of a driver will be available next time the emulator is connected The MCU selectable by the Device option and options that depend on the MCU are listed below To emulate an MCU with a description in the Expansion Hardware column connect the correct expansion hardware Table 8 2 Environment for the H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Debugging Platform Device Option Mode Option Clock Option Expansion Hardware Custom The MCU previously selected H8S 2168 2 advanced mode on chip ROM Main 24 MHz None H8S 2167 Target Main 25 MHz H8S
127. ace Dialog 6 Ifyou would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match whole word only check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 7 Ifyou would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box 8 If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions check box Refer to appendix B Regular Expressions for further information 9 If you clicked Find Next the editor will search for the first occurrence of the search string Click Replace if you want to replace it Click Replace All to replace all occurrences or click Cancel to stop the replace action If you select Selection in Replace In selected range of the text is replaced If you select whole file the whole files are replaced If you select all open files all files that are currently open in the editor have the replace operation carried out on them 68 RENESAS 4 5 4 Jumping to a Specified Line gt To jump to a line in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window 2 Select Edit gt Goto Line press CTRL G or select Goto Line from the editor window s local menu A goto line dialog box will be displayed figure 4 5 3 Enter into the dialog box th
128. ace project debug HEW EXE is installed in c hew a HRF file of a toolchain i e compiler assembler linker is located at c hew toolchain hitachi sh 5 11 This is referred to as TCINSTALL on the option setting dialogs of the Options menu and as TOOLDIR on the Tools Administration dialog the Windows operating system is installed in c Windows and the Windows system directory is c Windows System a version control executable path is v vc win32 ss exe a user name and its password to login the version control system are JHARK and 214436 respectively COMMENT is specified in a command line to the version control executable and c project is mapped to x vc project on the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog which is invoked via Tools gt Version Control gt Configure an error of compiler or assembler occurred at line 12 376 RENESAS Note Not all of the placeholders are relevant in every field For example the LINE placeholder has no meaning when specifying a dependent files location USERNAME PASSWORD VCDIR and COMMENT placeholders are acceptable only in version control If you enter a placeholder into an edit field where it is not acceptable you might be informed C 4 Placeholder Tips Placeholders are there to allow you to create flexible paths to the various files used by the system e If there is a placeh
129. achine To clarify further the High performance Embedded Workshop does not provide a version control tool itself only a means by which you can integrate the version control system which you use into your workspaces and projects 8 1 Defining Version Control Menu Options The custom version control system allows you to invoke a version control command either by selecting an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button When either of these actions are performed the associated commands are executed and the output is displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window gt To execute a version control menu option or toolbar button 1 Select whichever items you would like to apply the version control command to from the Workspace window This may include a workspace project s folder s and file s When the command is selected all of the files will be extracted from the selected items and passed in turn to the version control command For example if you select the workspace icon then all of the files in all of the projects will be passed in turn to the version control command This will include any system files For example if you select the project item then 2 Select the required menu option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or click the desired version control toolbar button The custom version control support allows you the most flexibility in
130. address detection mode in Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement and PC address detection mode in other measurement modes Otherwise the result of the measurement will be incorrect 5 20 4 Starting Performance Data Acquisition Executing the user program clears the result of previous measurement and automatically starts measuring the rate of execution time according to the conditions that have been set Stopping the user program displays the result of measurement in the Performance Analysis window 5 20 5 Deleting a Measurement Condition Select Reset from the popup menu with a measurement condition selected to delete the condition 5 20 6 Deleting All Measurement Conditions Choose Reset All from the popup menu to delete all the conditions that have been set 297 RENESAS 298 RENESAS Section 6 Tutorial 6 1 Introduction The following describes the main functions of the emulator by using a tutorial program The tutorial program is based on the C program that sorts ten random data items in ascending or descending order The tutorial program performs the following actions e The main function repeatedly calls the tut orial function to repeat sorting e The tutorial function generates random data to be sorted and calls the sort and tutorial functions in order e The sort function enters the array where the random data generated by the tutorial function are stored and sorts them in ascending order e The chan
131. address values will be automatically filled in and the data value to search for and select the search format If pattern search is selected as the search format a byte string of up to 256 bytes can be searched for The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value Search conditions other than pattern search are data match mismatch and search direction Note that only data match and forward direction can be selected with pattern search Click the OK button or press the Enter key The dialog box closes and the HEW searches the range for the specified data If the data is found the address at which the data has been found is displayed in the Memory window If the data could not be found the Memory window display remains unchanged and a message box informing that the data could not be found is displayed If Search Next is selected from the popup menu in the state where data has been found the search will continue from the next address 194 RENESAS 5 5 8 Filling a Memory Area with a Value A value can be set as the contents of a memory address range using the memory fill function To fill a memory range with the same value choose Fill from the popup menu of the Memory window or choose Fill from the Memory drop down menu The Fill Memory dialog box is shown in figure 5 22 Fill Memory Figure 5 22 Fill Memory Dialog Box If an add
132. aeeasess 8 4 1 Prompt before executing command 8 4 2 Run in DOS Window 8 4 3 Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter 126 Importing and Exporting a Set up eccecescessceseeseeseeseceeeeseeseeeceeceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseeseeeeneeeees 126 Using Visual SourceSafe oo ec cece E E EA EEA 129 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a Workspace cceeceesceseeseeseeeeceseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 129 O11 Selecting Visual SourceSate i ccccicccssccscsesesnscssssacosesvascscsavscevasassscaescvasevavvssvessaeeees 129 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe ce ecesesceseeseceeeeeeeseeseeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaee 130 9 2 Visual SourceSafe Commands reiris in E iE ENEE EE 131 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control ccccceceesesseeseeeeeeeceseeseeeeceeceeeeseeaeeaeenee 131 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Control 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of a File into Version Control 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation ceeeeceeseeseeseeseeseeneeeeceeceseeseeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeaeeaee 132 9 2 6 Viewing the Status of a File cee esceecseeeeeeeseceeceeeseeseeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeaeeaeenes 132 9 2 7 Viewing the History of a File ce ccesseecsceecceseeseeseeseeeeceeeesecaeeseceeceeeeeeeaeeaeeaee 132 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options ccecceseeseeseceseeeeeseceeeceeeeseeseeseeeeseaeeaeeaeeneeeees 133
133. akpoint at the start of the function 208 RENESAS 5 10 2 Adding a Label Choose Add from the popup menu and open the Add Label dialog box to add a label Add Label AES me O O a Address fHoooo0000 x Cancel Figure 5 37 Add Label Dialog Box Enter the new label name into the Name field and the corresponding value into the Address field and press OK The Add Label dialog box closes and the label list is updated to show the new label When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 5 10 3 Editing a Label Choose Edit from the popup menu and open the Edit Label dialog box to edit a label Edit Label _main MEI Address H000001012 x Cancel Figure 5 38 Edit Label Dialog Box Edit the label name and value as required and then press OK to save the modified version in the label list The list display is updated to show the new label details When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 209 RENESAS 5 10 4 Deleting a Label To delete a label select the label and choose Delete from the popup menu A confirmation message box appears Confirm
134. alog allows the user to choose multiple input file groups for the custom phase being added to the project To select a file group check the box next to the file groups name One or more file groups can be selected in this dialog The third step figure 3 3d requests the fundamental information about the new build phase Enter the name of the phase into the Phase name field Enter the location of the program file into the Command field do not insert any command line options as these options are specified via the Options menu of the HEW menu bar Specify the default options for the phase i e what options you would like new files to take when added to the project into the Default options field If you have a preferred directory in which you would like this program to run from i e where you want the current working directory to be set to before the tool is executed then enter it into the Initial directory field New Build Phase Step 3 of 4 Phase name MyPhase Command excluding parameters e Mtools mytool exe gt Browse Default options SFULLFILE gt Initial directory s CONFIGOIR gt Browse lt Back l Next gt Cancel Figure 3 3d New Build Phase Dialog Step 3 41 RENESAS The fourth and final step figure 3 3e allows you to specify any environment variables which the phase requires New Build Phase Step 4 of 4 21x J Does the com
135. alt the search at any time 5 The results of the search are shown in the Located components list Select a component and click Register to register an individual component or click Register All to register all located components 6 Click Close to exit the dialog 85 RENESAS 5 3 2 Registering a Single Component The HEW allows you to navigate directly to a single component in order to register it The HEW Registration File HRF is located in the root directory of a component s installation gt To register a component 1 Click the Register button on the Tools Administration dialog A standard file open dialog will be launched with its file filter set to HEW Registration Files hrf 2 Navigate to the HRF file of the component you would like to register select it and then click Select 3 A dialog will be invoked which displays information regarding the selected tool Click Register to confirm that you want to register the tool or click Close to abort the operation 5 4 Unregistering Components The components which are registered with the HEW affect the way in which it behaves For example every compatible system tool which is registered will be added to the tools menu when a new project is created Sometimes this may not be desirable If so open the Tools Administration dialog select the component from the Registered components list and then click the
136. ample p_sam L resetprg cpp 0x00001046 p_sam new Sample 8 sort cpp 0x0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i Tutorial cpp O0x00001050 j rand Re 0x00001058 TEC OJA Download modules 0x0000105a j j DEME 0x0000105c ali j 0x00001070 p_sam gt sort a 0x0000107a Pp_sam gt change a 0x00001082 p_sam gt s0 a 0 0x0000108a p_sam gt sl a 1 0x00001096 p_sam gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 0x000010ae p_sam gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_sam gt s5 a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt sb a 6 0x000010d2 p_sam gt s7 a 7 0x000010de p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea p_sam gt s9 a 9 Ox000010f 6 delete p_san 0x000010fc Figure 6 4 Source Window Setting a PC Breakpoint The symbol will appear on the line containing the sort function This shows that a PC breakpoint has been set 303 RENESAS 6 5 Setting Registers Set a value of the program counter before executing the program e Select Registers from the CPU submenu of the View menu The Register window is displayed Register Value H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000010 H 000400 Figure 6 5 Register Window e To change the value of the program counter PC double click the value area in the Register window with the mouse The following dialog box is then displayed and the value can be changed Set the program counter to H 00000400 in this t
137. and move on to the next instruction Clicking the OK button will assemble the instruction into memory and close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing the Esc key will close the dialog box Note The assembly language display is disassembled from the actual machine code in the debugging platform s memory If the memory contents are changed the dialog box and the Disassembly window will show the new assembly language code but the content of the Source window will not be changed This is the same even if the source file contains an assembler 5 2 5 Viewing a Specific Address When you are viewing your program in the Disassembly window you may wish to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address Select Set Address from the popup menu and the dialog box shown in figure 5 10 is displayed Set Address 21x ee main Cancel Figure 5 10 Set Address Dialog Box Enter the address or label name in the edit box and either click on the OK button or press the Enter key The Disassembly window will be updated to show the code at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 5 2 6 Viewing the Current Program Counter Address Wherever you
138. andard Toolchain 5 1 0 Properties AEG Environment Information Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain Ver 5 1 0 C C Compiler Ver 5 1 Assember Ver 4 2 OptLinker Wer 1 1 Linkage Editor Ver 6 0D Figure 5 5 Properties Dialog Information Tab 87 RENESAS Select the Environment tab if it exists to view and edit a component s environment settings figure 5 6 This dialog is most commonly used to modify the environment of a toolchain Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 5 1 0 Properties AEG General Information Environment Environment variables SHC INC c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH451 O include Add SHC_LIB c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin SHC_TMP c TEMP Modify Remove gt l Cancel Figure 5 6 Properties Dialog Environment Tab To add a new environment variable click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 5 7 will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the Environment tab Placeholder pop up menus are included to ensure that the environment can be specified as flexibly as possible For a detailed description of placeholders see appendix C Placeholders To modify an environment variable select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment tab and then click
139. andard commands either by selecting an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a Workspace The following sections describe how you can associate Visual SourceSafe with your current workspace 9 1 1 Selecting Visual SourceSafe First you need to select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system gt To use Visual SourceSafe 5 0 or 6 0 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog will be displayed figure 7 3 which lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 entry from the Version Control Systems list and click the Select button 3 Click OK to confirm the selection The SourceSafe Login dialog is displayed figure 9 1 4 Enter your Visual SourceSafe login into Username and password into Password 5 Enter into Database path the full path to the Visual SourceSafe database i e SRCSAFE INI into which you would like to add this project 6 Click OK The Create SourceSafe Project dialog is invoked figure 9 2 7 The Project name field displays the name of the project i e folder to be created in the database If necessary you can change this name to another 8 The tree underneath the Project name field shows the structure of the database specified in step 6 Select the folder into
140. array a in the Source window to position the cursor e Select Instant Watch with the right hand mouse button The following dialog box will be displayed Instant Watch 21x Add a 0x00ffef80 long 10 Figure 6 14 Instant Watch Dialog Box e Click the Add button to add a variable to the Watch window 15 x OxO0ffef80 lona 1 O Figure 6 15 Watch Window Displaying the Array 310 RENESAS The user can also add a variable to the Watch window by specifying its name e Click the Watch window with the right hand mouse button and select Add Watch from the popup menu The following dialog box will be displayed Add Watch Variable or expression Figure 6 16 Add Watch Dialog Box e Input variable i to Variable or expression edit box and click the OK button The Watch window will now also show the int type variable i F OxO00ffefS0 i H 000a R4 Figure 6 17 Watch Window Displaying the Variable 311 RENESAS The user can click mark at the left side of array a in the Watch window to watch all the elements 0 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D D a a a a a a a ae 312 i Ox00ffef80 H 000041c6 Ox00ffef80 H 0000167e Ox00ftef84 H 00002781 Ox00ftef8s H 0000446b Ox00ffefB8c H 0000794b Ox00ffef90 H 000015fb Ox00ffef94 H 000059e
141. at indicate addresses in the program These names are called labels in the HEW The Disassembly window shows the first eight characters of each label instead of the corresponding address or as a part of an instruction operand Note When a label value matches an operand the corresponding instruction operand is replaced by the label If two or more labels have the same value the one that comes first in alphabetical order is displayed When edit control accepts an address or a value a label can be entered instead 5 10 1 Listing Labels Choose View gt Symbol gt Labels or click the View Labels toolbar button m to list all labels defined in the current debugger session lolx Name Lab BP Address H o00001000 _sbrk H 00001034 _main H 00001038 tutoriali H 0000110a _abort H o0000110C __INITSCT H 00001122 loopl H 0000112C loopz H oOoOo011ZE next_loopZ H 00001132 next_loopl H oo0001144 loop3 H o0001152 loop4 H o0001158 next_loop4 H oooo115C next_loop3 H o00001168 operator newlunsigned long H OOOO11BE __ CALL _INIT H 000011E0 __CALL_END H oooo11E4 operator delete void H OOOO1LEE _rand H 00001226 _srand H 00001232 DIVL33 H 0000123C not_negX v J ore ay Figure 5 36 Label Window You can view symbols sorted either alphabetically by ASCII code or by address value by clicking on the respective column heading Double clicking in the BP column can set or clear a software bre
142. ation Request Delete Label_BTBL Figure 5 39 Message Box for Confirming Label Deletion If you click OK the label is removed from the list and the window display is updated If the message box is not required then do not select the Delete Label option of the Confirmation sheet in the HEW Options dialog box 5 10 5 Deleting All Labels To delete all the labels from the list choose Delete All from the popup menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request Delete All Labels J Don t ask this question again Figure 5 40 Message Box for Confirming All Label Deletion If you click OK all the labels are removed from the HEW system s symbol table and the list display will be cleared If the message box is not required do not select the Delete All Labels option of the Confirmation sheet in the HEW Options dialog box 210 RENESAS 5 10 6 Loading Labels from a File A symbol file can be loaded and merged into the HEW s current symbol table Choose Load from the popup menu to open the Load Symbols dialog box Load Symbols Look in fareut sis al c 3 tutorial sym File name my_code sym Files of type l Symbol Files syrm Cancel Figure 5 41 Load Symbols Dialog Box The dialog box operates like a standard Windows open file dialog box select the file and click Open to start loading The standard file extension for symbol fi
143. back to a plus sign 226 RENESAS Editing a Watch Item s Value You may wish to change the value of a watch variable e g for testing purposes or if the value is incorrect due to a bug in your program To change a watch item s value use the Edit Value function gt Editing a watch item s value Enter a value directly in the window In another way select the item to edit by clicking on it you will see a flashing cursor on the item Choose Edit Value from the popup menu The Edit Value dialog box opens ax Expression jo Current H OOOOOME Ox00ffef80 Value New Value Cancel Ceea Figure 5 55 Edit Value Dialog Box Enter the new value or expression in the New Value field and click OK The Watch window is updated to show the new value 227 RENESAS Deleting a Watch Item To delete a watch item select it and choose Delete from the popup menu The item is deleted and the Watch window is updated To delete all watch items choose Delete All from the popup menu All items are deleted and the Watch window is updated Specifying Realtime Update The R mark shown to the left of each variable indicates whether the variable is updated in real time When an R mark is displayed in bold face the value of the corresponding variable will be updated in realtime during user program execution A popup menu containing the following options is available in the Watch window e Auto Update Mark
144. bed below gt To add a new configuration 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations to display the Build Configurations dialog figure 2 16 2 Click the Add button The Add Configuration dialog will be invoked figure 2 17 Add Configuration x Configuration name MyConfig Cancel Based on configuration Debug x ema Configuration directory c hew demo demo MyContig Figure 2 17 Add Configuration Dialog 3 Enter the new configuration name into the Configuration name field As you enter the new configuration name the directory underneath changes to reflect the configuration directory that will be used Select one of existing configurations from which you want to copy a configuration out of the drop down list of the Based on configuration field Click OK on both dialogs to create the new configuration To remove a configuration 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations to display the Build Configurations dialog figure 2 16 2 Select the configuration that you want to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Click OK to close the Build Configurations dialog 26 RENESAS 2 6 Building a Project The outline of the build process is shown in figure 2 1 2 6 1 Building a Project The build option only compiles or assembles those files that have changed since the last build Additionally it will rebuild source files if they depend upon
145. ble5 5 Trace Find Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Sets the range for searching Address Sets an address condition Data Sets a data condition R W Selects the type of access cycles Area Selects the area being accessed not available when a time stamp is acquired Status Selects the status of a bus not available when a time stamp is acquired Probes Selects the status of four probe signals not available when a time stamp is acquired IRQ7 0 Selects the status of eight probe input signals not available when a time stamp is acquired Timestamp Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles only available when a time stamp is acquired Note Items other than General Address Data R W Area Status Probes and Timestamp vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help Clicking the OK button after setting conditions in those pages stores the settings and starts searching Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without setting of conditions When a trace record that matches the search conditions is found the line for the trace record will be highlighted When no matching trace record is found a message dialog box will appear Only the trace information that satisfies all the conditions set in above pages will be searched If a find operation is succes
146. broutine 296 RENESAS 5 20 3 Selecting the Address Detection Mode and Resolution In measurement of hardware performance there are two types of address detection modes prefetch address detection mode and PC address detection mode Select the appropriate address detection mode according to the measurement mode in use The resolution can also be selected here To select an address detection mode and resolution click the Settings button on the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box The Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 dialog box will be displayed Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode Time Measurement Unit 160ns x Cancel Figure 5 112 Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Dialog Box Address Control Mode Select the method to detect addresses for the rate of execution time PC PC address detection mode Prefetch Prefetch address detection mode Time Measurement Unit Select the timer resolution to be used for measurement from 160ns 40ns 20ns or Target The timer for execution time measurement has a 40 bit counter At 20 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about six hours and at 160 us the maximum time is about two days When the counter overflows Timer Overflow is displayed as the result of measurement When Target is selected the counter is incremented by an input clock The result of measurement is displayed as 10 digits in hexadecimal Select the prefetch
147. build parts of your workspace without HEW This is particularly useful of you want to send a project to a user who does not have the HEW or if you want to version control an entire build including the make components gt To generate a makefile 1 Ensure that the project which you want to generate a makefile for is the current project 2 Ensure that the build configuration that you want to build the project with is the current configuration 3 Select Build gt Generate Makefile 4 Once this menu has been selected a dialog is displayed which asks the user what parts of the workspace need to be added to the make file See figure 3 23 5 Select the radio button which is relevant for your make file and then click OK For the current configuration in the currently active project For all configurations in the currently active project Cancel For all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace IV Scan dependencies before make file generation Figure 3 23 Generate makefile Dialog The HEW will create a subdirectory make within the current workspace directory and then generate the makefile into it It is named after the selection with a mak extension for example the current project and configuration e g project_debug mak The executable HMAKE EXE located in the HEW installation directory is provided for you to execute the makefiles generated by the HEW It is not intended to execute ma
148. but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers
149. ceeeeeeaeeseeseeeceeceeeeaeeaeeaeenee 285 5 19 9 Non Display Of Cursor s cssisscvsscsscassavssecssasascnssaxctetaieczascsavaxestoaseniasaevarevavasecsedenaate 286 5 19 10 Displaying the Sampling Information ccceseseeseesecesceseeeeseeeceeceeeeeeeaeeaeenee 286 5 20 Analyzing Performance cis eei r EEE EE EEEE E TEE 287 5 20 1 Opening the Performance Analysis WindOW ccccecceseeseeteeseceeeeeeeseeaeeaeenee 289 5 20 2 Setting Conditions for Measurement cceeceeseeseeseeeeceseeseeseeneeseceeeeseeseeseeaeenes 290 5 20 3 Selecting the Address Detection Mode and Resolution cceseeceeseeseeteeteeeee 297 5 20 4 Starting Performance Data Acquisition ececeseseeceeeeeeseeteeeeceeceeeeaeeaeeaeeate 297 5 20 5 Deleting a Measurement Condition ceececceseeseeseeseeeeceeceseeseeseceeceeeeeeeaeeaeenes 297 5 20 6 Deleting All Measurement Conditions ccecceseeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeaeeaeeneeeee 297 Section 6 Tutorial nisnin nenion hea heed ostde tease died iadi ia 299 6 1 Mntrod ction sins AR ENESE nite i eae 299 6 2 Rimming the HEW v cssccscissevevssessses sansasavesessscssansavedescsscsctansessdevesscnesasazesavavancossanasetsseasesesadgaas 300 6 3 Downloading the Tutorial Program ccccscsecseesseeseeseceeceeceseeseeseeseceseeseeaeeseseeeeeeeeeeaeenees 301 6 3 1 Downloading the Tutorial Program cceeeceseeseeseeeececeeeeeseesecaeceeeeeeseeaeeneeneeeee 301 6 3 2 Displaying th
150. cessor 7 Documents Expanded assembly source file Librarian g Lil Library file Library list file Library section list file Linkage map file Linkage symbol file No application obj Object file Figure 2 11 File Groups and Applications gt To associate an application with a file group 1 Select the file group to be associated from the File Extensions dialog figure 2 11 2 Click the Open with button The Modify File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 12 Modify File Extension load None Windows default ie a erry ue Figure 2 12 Modify File Extension Dialog 3 Select None to remove any association select Editor to open this type of file in the internal external editor or select Other if you want to open this type of file with a specific application If you select Other then you can select from any previously defined application from the drop down list or specify a new application 4 Click Add to define a new application The Add Application dialog will be displayed figure 2 13 21 RENESAS Add Application 2 xi Name Cancel Command excluding parameters gt Browse Parameters 2 Initial directory E 22 Figure 2 13 Add Application Dialog 5 Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the full path to the tool in the Command field do not includ
151. changes RENESAS gt To float the Workspace window or the Output window Allow Docking must be checked on the pop up menu of the window to float the Workspace window or the Output window The pop up menu will be displayed when you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the window Then you have two ways to float the window 1 Double click on the control bar of a docking window or 2 Drag the control bar of a docked window and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar gt To hide the Workspace window or the Output window Click on the close button which is located in the top right corner of the window Or push the right mouse button anywhere inside a floating window and select Hide on the pop up menu gt To display the Workspace window or the Output window Select View gt Workspace or View gt Output respectively 1 2 5 The Editor Window The editor window is where you will work with the files of your project The HEW allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them and to edit them in whichever order you want to By default the editor window is displayed in a notebook style where each text file has a separate tab as shown in figure 1 16 The editor contains a gutter on the left hand side of the window The gutter in HEW can be configured to contain many co
152. cified address range Selecting the start or Start Timer and Stop Timer on the Action page end of the execution time measurement Specifying the count Required number of event occurrences on the Action page when an event occurs twice or more Specifying sequencing Enable Sequencing on the Action page 234 RENESAS 1 General page The address and data conditions are set Type Breakpoint Event Properties p 2x General Bus Area Signals Action Type Address C PCBreak Don tCare Address C Range AddressLo o0000000 Address Hi J Outside Range m Data Compare Direction I Compare J Use Mask C Read Value fr 9 z C write Bute Word Mask fo Either Figure 5 60 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box General Page Select the type of a breakpoint Note that the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box is used for setting PC breakpoints and event points Selecting a particular type of breakpoint enables or disables other pages and parts of the dialog according to the options available to that type of breakpoint PC Break Only a single address with a program fetch can be selected Other options are invalid Event Set conditions in detail with other options on this page or on the Bus Area Signals or Action page Address Sets the address condition Don t care Sets no address condition Address Allows a s
153. ck and drag its control bar to the new location Figure 1 11 i shows the Standard toolbar when it is docked and figure 1 11 ii shows the Standard toolbar when it is floating i S BBS foes JAn A ii amp Debus 7 At lust A Figure 1 11 Standard Toolbar Docked and Floating gt To dock the menu bar or a toolbar 1 Double click on the title bar of a floating menu bar or toolbar or 2 Drag the title bar of a floating menu bar or toolbar and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating bar changes gt To float the menu bar or a toolbar 1 Double click on the control bar of a docked menu bar or toolbar or 2 Drag the control bar of a docked menu bar or toolbar and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar RENESAS 1 2 4 The Workspace Window The Workspace window when the HEW is launched only has a single pane This is the Projects tab If a workspace is opened then the workspace window displays two default tabs The Projects tab shows the current workspace projects and files figure 1 12 You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its corresponding icon E F demo E Projecti Project Files E cOsre main c sh_hwete c sh_int
154. cquired Trace Filter x General Aima Data RAW Timestamp Setting Point Range Cancel Apply Figure 5 92 Trace Filter Dialog Box Timestamp Page Don t care Detects no time stamp value when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified time stamp value Point Specifies a single time stamp not available when Don t care has been checked Range Specifies a time stamp range not available when Don t care has been checked From Enter a single time stamp value or the minimum value of the time stamp range The format is as follows hour h minute min second s millisecond ms microsecond us nanosecond ns Not available when Don t care has been checked To Enter the maximum value of the time stamp range The format is as follows hour h minute min second s millisecond ms microsecond us nanosecond ns Only available when Range has been selected Note Along with setting the time stamp range the minimum and maximum time stamp values can be set in the From and To options respectively 274 RENESAS 5 16 13 Calculating the Difference in Time Stamping Select Timestamp Difference from the popup menu to calculate the time difference between the two points selected by the result of tracing in acquisition of time stamp information Select 2 line First PTR Second PTR Timestamp Difference Get Difference Clea
155. cters unless the newline character is included within the brackets AEIOU Finds every uppercase vowel lt gt Finds a literal lt gt or A Za z0 9_ Matches an upper or lowercase letter a digit or an underscore 0 9 Matches any character except a digit t n Matches a space a tab or newline Ml Matches a literal if is placed after This is the regular expression override character If the character following the backslash is a regular expression character it is treated as a normal character The backslash is ignored if it is followed by a normal non regular expression character Searches for every occurrence of an asterisk Searches for every occurrence of a backslash RENESAS Appendix C Placeholders This appendix describes how to use the placeholders a feature provided by several of the HEW components C 1 What is a Placeholder A placeholder is a special string inserted into text which is replaced at some subsequent time for the actual value For example one of the HEW placeholders is FULLFILE which represents a file with a full path Suppose that you have an editor in c myedit myeditor exe which can take the file to edit as a parameter When invoking the editor the following shortcut could be made e g c myedit myeditor exe c files file1 c if you wanted to open FILE1 C from the directory c files However what happens if you want the HEW to open any file
156. ctions click OK to set them To obtain further information use the context sensitive help button or select the area in which you need assistance and then press F1 23 RENESAS 2 5 Build Configurations The HEW allows you to store all of your build options into a build configuration figure 2 14 This means that you can freeze all of the options and give them a name Later on you can select that configuration and all of the options for all of the build phases will be restored These build configurations also allow the user to specify debugger settings for a build configuration This means that each configuration can be targeted at a different end platform See Emulator Debugger Part in this manual for further information Figure 2 14 shows three build configurations Default MyDebug and MyOptimized In the first configuration Default each of the phases compile and assemble are set to their standard settings In the second configuration MyDebug each of the files are being built with debug information switched on In the third configuration MyOptimized each of the files are being built with optimization on full and without any debug information The developer of this project can select any of those configurations and build them without having to return to the options dialogs to set them again
157. cuted the command is applied to each file in the project of a certain file group For example if you set the input file group to be C source files then the command will be executed once for each C source file in the project A single phase is executed once at most during a build New Build Phase Step 2 of 4 Y W What type of phase would you like to create Multiple phase The command is applied to each file in a file group An example of this type of tool is a compiler or assembler Select input file group C source file Single phase The command is only ever executed once per build An example of this type of tool is a linker lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 3 3b New Build Phase Dialog Step 2 The input file group list contains the current file groups defined for the project It is possible to define multiple input file groups by selecting the Multiple Groups entry in the input file group list Selecting this list entry displays the dialog in figure 3 3c Select Groups Assembly source file Binary file OC header file Cancel CIC list file MIC source file C header file C list file MC source file CICPU information file Expanded assembly source file Figure 3 3c Modify multiple input file groups 40 RENESAS Once this choice has been made the input file group selection is displayed as Multiple Groups This di
158. d Click this button if you want to find a certain text string in the current file It invokes a find dialog box where you can specify the search parameters amp FindNext Finds the next occurrence of the current search string B Find Previous Finds the previous occurrence of the current search string 4 2 4 Bookmarks Toolbar Buttons mm Toggle Bookmarks Sets a bookmark at the current line or clears a bookmark at the current line mial Next Bookmark Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file from the current line m a Previous Bookmark Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current file from the current line Ina Clear All Bookmarks Clears all bookmarks in the current file 62 RENESAS 4 2 5 Templates Toolbar Buttons Tr Define Template Specify template text for subsequent insertion IF Insert Template Insert the template selected in the drop down list at the current cursor position 4 3 Standard File Operations 4 3 1 Creating a New File gt To create a new editing window Select File gt New or click the new file toolbar button CT or press CTRL N The window will be given an arbitrary name by default You can provide a new name when you save the file 4 3 2 Saving a File gt To save the contents of an editing window 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select File gt Save or click the save file toolbar button J or press CTRL S 3 If th
159. d and added Address H O0000106A Tutorial cpp 37 address bus prefetch Trace Enable Address H OO00107E Tutorial cpp 45 address bus prefetch Trace Enable Address H 000010A40 Tutorial cpp 49 address area ROM Trace Enable Address H 00001140 address area ROM Trace Eupty Enpty Enpty Enpty Enpty Empty Figure 5 59 Event Window Event Sheet Select Add or the event point displayed in this window and then select Edit from the popup menu to display the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box The conditions for the event point are set on the General Bus Area Signals and Action pages The search condition for the event point is set by multiple conditions set on these pages Notes 1 Channel 8 has the trigger output function When the condition on channel 8 is satisfied the low level signal will be output from the external probe 1 EXT1 for a bus cycle 2 When the event point is used as the condition for acquiring the trace information select Trace Acquisition from the popup menu For the trace function refer to section 5 16 Viewing Trace Information 3 If a condition that is unavailable for a range channel is set in editing of the range channels Ch9 to Ch12 the selected channel is automatically replaced by an unused event channel Ch1 to Ch8 Table 5 3 Conditions Unavailable for a Range Channel Condition Related Options Selecting outside the Outside Range on the General page spe
160. d W svcasa secessnvsucsensovecnessosentonstugseendsngusossvtenaenowadusasbacencunstonngssessxeen 7 1 2 6 The Output Wind Ow o sisssesssevavesssusesosssavavesscasascessevancsszavavesssezancsavanevessazeensvevsazess 8 1 274 GUNG Status Bares erie ASEE TEATE EENEN 8 1 3 The Help System 1 4 Launching the HEW L3 Exi ns thes HEW ct saiswesesel sv estesi vases saucdssivverdidivencdias veces N E EAE 1 6 Component System Overview ccecesccsccecceseeseeseeseeeceeeeseeseeseesececeeeeseesecneeeseaeeaeeaeeate 10 2 Bild Basics A E A tues ee Ree E 11 2A e The Bud RPOCESS 3 5 EAEAP ERKE EREEREER EE E AVEA E EERE 11 2 2 Project Hales icc so Seevessssccesdutvecessdibupeccua vasccbaseneccgvavescigevenecagsseasesahovnecateswescsahovescadeveasecaievevtees 12 221 Adding Piles t0 a Projects oneec orcii a A R dunes cess 13 2 2 2 Removing Files from a Project ciemne aa E A A EE 15 2 2 3 Excluding a Project File from Build cece eseseeseesceeeceeeeeeeseeeeseeseceeeeaeeseeaeees 17 2 2 4 Including a Project File in Build 2 3 File Extensions and File Groups ccsccscssssssesssososccasensesssesesscsacenesseeosesacsanenesseesseasenss 2 4 Specifying How to Build a File eee eeeeceeceeseeseeseeeeeeseeseeseesececeeeeeeeseesecseeeeseeeeaeeaeenee 2 5 Build Confi stration seru oee n oore EEE AE EE sibanesatavecscdsvensects 2 5 1 Selecting a Configuration n i oia eren E EEEE T OE R 2 5 2 Adding and Deleting Configurations s
161. d in build 2 3 File Extensions and File Groups The HEW can identify files by their extension The system defines certain extensions depending upon the tools which are being used For example if you are using a compiler then the c extension will be in the C source file group and be used as input to the compiler phase figure 2 1 Typical Build Process Additionally the HEW allows you to define your own extensions For example if the project you are developing uses assembler source files the default extension may be src If you would like to use a different extension instead of src e g asm then you can define a new extension and request that the HEW treats it in the same way as a src file File extensions and file groups can be viewed and modified via the File Extensions dialog figure 2 7 This is invoked by selecting Project gt File Extensions This dialog displays all of the extensions and file groups which are defined within the current workspace Group Absolute file Assembly include file Assembly list file Assembly source file C header file list file C source file C header file C list file C source file CPU information file Fynandad accambly source fila Figure 2 7 File Extensions Dialog RENESAS The File Extensions list shown in figure 2 7 is divided into two columns On the left are the file extensions themselves whilst on the right are the file groups Many
162. d in the new environment Invoke it by selecting Tools gt Customize and then selecting the Debugger tab Toolbars Commands Menu Debugger Log Help MV Use extemal debugger HDI location 4 0 or greater C Hew HDIS SIM SH H diexe gt Browse Session file S CONFIGDIR S PROJECTNAME hds gt Browse Download module s CONFIGDIR S PR OJECTNAME abd gt Browse Cancel Figure 3 22 Customize Dialog Debugger Tab When an external debugger is used check Use external debugger and then set the following items Firstly the location of the HDI executable must be specified This must be version 4 0 or greater otherwise the behavior is not guaranteed The second item of data is the session file This tells HDI which session to load when it is launched Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to HDI when the download module changes after a build Click the Launch External Debugger toolbar button to invoke HDI with the specified session file A After a build if the download module has been updated the HEW will switch back to HDI to enable immediate debugging Whilst using HDI double clicking in any source window will switch back to the HEW with the source file open at the line which was double clicked 57 RENESAS 3 10 Generating a Makefile The HEW allows you to generate a makefile which can be used to
163. dding Files to a Project Before you can build your application you must first inform the High performance Embedded Workshop which files it is composed of gt To add files to a project 1 Select Project gt Add Files select Add Files from the Workspace window s pop up menu see figure 2 3 or press INS when the Workspace window is selected sag to Vise k Remove trom WES from vos out trom vor in to vie Figure 2 3 Project Pop up Menu 2 The Add dialog will be displayed 3 Select the file s that you want to add and then click Add 13 RENESAS There are a number of other ways to add new files to the project These are described below e Clicking right button on an open file in the editor window displays a pop up menu option figure 2 4 If the file is already in the project then the Add File to Project menu option is disabled Selecting the Add File to Project then adds the file to the current project Build File dbsct c Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctri G Paste Cty Add kile To Project Eind Ctrl F Find h Files F4 Replace Ctri H Goto Line CtrHG Match Braces Ctri M Bookmarks Templates Toggle Breakpoint F9 Enable Disable Breakpoint GiritRg Figure 2 4 Editor Window Pop up Menu e In the HEW it is also possible to Drag and Drop files from Windows Explorer onto the workspace window These files will be automatically
164. der certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas
165. displays the information shown below The value shown in the Count column is 3 which indicates that the sort function has been executed three times and the execution time s iojxi No Name Condition MAX MIN TIME Count 0 10 20 30 l sort Range H 00002068 H 000020D4 18 00h OOmin 00s 000ms 352us 480ns 3 8 8s8hssee Performance Analysis A Figure 6 68 Performance Analysis Dialog Box Displaying the Result 10 Delete the setting for performance analysis and remove the event point Click the right hand mouse button on the Performance Analysis window to display a popup menu Select Reset All from this popup menu to delete all of the settings Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Event window also displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this popup menu to remove all the event points that have been set 343 RENESAS 6 19 Monitor Function The emulator allows monitoring of the content of specified addresses in memory during execution of the user program In this example we monitor the content of the address range where variable a of the tutorial function is stored 1 Select the CPU submenu from the View menu Then selecting Monitor Setting from the Monitor submenu displays the Monitor Setting dialog box Monitor Setting Monitor Setting Name monitori m Options Address Size byte Access Format IV Auto Refresh at rate m
166. dress at which you set the PC breakpoint execution halts with the message PC Break displayed in the Debug sheet of the Output window and the Source or Disassembly window is updated with the PC breakpoint line marked with an arrow in the gutter Note When a break occurs the program stops just before it is about to execute the line or instruction at which you set a program PC breakpoint If you choose Go or Step after stopping at the PC breakpoint then the line marked with an arrow will be the next instruction to be executed 217 RENESAS e To set a PC breakpoint by using the Breakpoints dialog box Selecting Edit gt Source Breakpoint displays the Breakpoints dialog box Milowsre chLine 12 Cancel Edit Code Remove All Figure 5 45 Breakpoints Dialog Box The Breakpoints dialog box allows the user to view the current breakpoints set Clicking the Edit Code button displays the source where each breakpoint is set The Remove or Remove All button deletes one or all breakpoints respectively The check box of each breakpoint enables or disables the breakpoint e To toggle PC breakpoints It is possible to toggle the PC Breakpoints setting by either double clicking in the BP column of the line where the PC breakpoint is set or placing the cursor on the line and pressing the F9 key The setting to be toggled depends on the debugging platform 218 RENESAS 5 13 Elf Dwarf2 Support
167. e gt To use Tooltip Watch Open the Source window showing the variable that you want to examine Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine a tooltip will appear near the variable containing basic watch information for that variable p_sam new Sample gt for i 0 i lt 10 i j rand H 0003 if j lt 0 n s Tag afi 3 Figure 5 50 Tooltip Watch 5 14 2 Instant Watch Open the Source window showing the variable that you want to examine Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine and choose Instant Watch from the popup menu the Instant Watch dialog box will appear and display the variable at the cursor location Instant Watch str Ox cO00088 struct strB Figure 5 51 Instant Watch Dialog Box shown to the left of the variable name indicates that the information may be expanded by clicking on the indicates that the information may be collapsed Clicking Add registers the variable in the Watch window Clicking Close closes the window without registering the variable in the Watch window variable name and 223 RENESAS 5 14 3 Watch Window You can view any value in the Watch window Opening a Watch Window To open a Watch window choose View gt Symbol gt Watch or click on the Watch toolbar button if it is visible A Watch window opens Initially the con
168. e Version Add Version Mody Remove Figure 6 4 Customize Dialog Menu Tab 2 Click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 6 5 will be invoked If you would like to add an existing system tool to the menu then select the Select from existing system tools radio button choose the tool from the drop down list and then click OK Alternatively if you would like to add a tool of your own then follow the remaining steps Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the command excluding arguments into the Command field Enter any arguments that you would like to pass to the command into the Arguments field Enter an initial directory in which you would like the tool to run into the Initial directory field Psy Ut op Click OK to add the menu option to the Tools menu 96 RENESAS Add Tool 24 x Define new user tool OK m Tool details Cancel Name E xplorer Command StWINDIF explorer exe gt Browse Arguments 2 Initial directory s TEMPOIR gt Browse C Select from existing system tools Figure 6 5 Add Tool Dialog New menu options are added to the bottom of the list i e bottom of the tools menu by default The order of menu options in the Tools menu can also be modified gt To modify a menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1
169. e character will match as few occurrences as are necessary to make the rest of the pattern match Example 1 t o matches the to of too the tro of trowel and the ty o of sporty orange but not smart orange because the character does not match across a new line e Symbol n Meaning This character matches the newline character n would be used to search for line endings or in patterns that cross line boundaries Example 1 n matches every occurrence of a newline following a semicolon Example 2 nif searches for a semicolon a new line and a line beginning with if 371 RENESAS e Symbol Meaning Example 1 Example 2 e Symbol Meaning Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 Example 6 e Symbol Meaning Example 1 Example 2 372 t This character matches the tab character t8 Finds every occurrence of a tab character followed by an 8 init t Finds every occurrence of a tab character following init This matches any one character or a range of single characters listed within the brackets Brackets cannot be nested specifies a range of characters e g a z or 0 9 The beginning character in the range must have a lower ASCII value than the ending character of the range matches a single character if it is not any one of the characters between and This pattern also matches newline chara
170. e Time Stamp group box Trace Acquisition General Stop Delayed Stop Suppress _ p Time Stamp IV Free Trace I DMAC Cycles Clock T DIC Cycles bd I Refresh Cycles m Trace Events Event 9 R H FFEF80 range to H FFEFA write Add Edit Delete Del All Sequence Cancel Figure 6 51 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Time Stamping is Available 333 RENESAS 7 To enable the event condition that has been set uncheck the Free Trace check box on the General page This will add pages 1 to 4 see figure 6 45 Trace Acquisition dialog box 8 Select page 1 and click the Range radio button in the Conditions group box This will display the Range Event combo box and the Edit button see figure 6 46 Trace Acquisition dialog box 9 Click the Range Event combo box to select the event you have registered The event is now enabled Click the OK button to complete the trace setting General Stop Delayed Stop 1 2 3 4 m Conditions C Disabled Point to Point Range C Event Range Event 9 R H FFEFS0 range to H FFEFA Figure 6 52 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Setting Completed 10 Make the setting such that the break occurs after the instruction at the address on the line that has p_sam gt s0 a 0 within the tutorial function H 00001082 in this example for details on this
171. e View menu The Event window is displayed e Select the Breakpoint sheet 2101 xi 4 gt Breakpoint Event A Trigger Figure 6 30 Event Window Before Setting a PC Breakpoint e Click the Event window with the right hand mouse button and select Add from the popup menu e The Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box is displayed RENESAS 319 Breakpoint Event Properties 2 x General Type m Address PC Break Dont Care Address Range Address Lo oo fH 00001082 Address Hi oo aaa F Outside Range Data Compare Direction F Compare F Use Mask Read Value pmo ahi write Word ho Either Figure 6 31 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box e Check the PC Break radio button in the Type group box e Use the Source window to refer to the address on the line that has p_sam gt sO a 0 within the tutorial function and enter this address in the Address Lo edit box of the Address group box In this example enter H 00001082 Note This dialog box differs according to the product For the items of each product refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help e Click the OK button The PC breakpoint that has been set is displayed in the Event window lene TT Program Enable PC H 00001082 Tutorial cpp 47 Break 4 gt Breakpoint Figure
172. e 3 15 except the title will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required and then click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list To remove a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button 51 RENESAS 3 5 File Mappings By default the files input to a phase are only taken from the project i e all project files of the type specified in the Select input file group drop down list on the New Build Phase dialog figure 3 3b If you would like a phase to take files output from a previous phase i e intermediate files then you must define this in the File Mappings tab of the Build Phases dialog figure 3 16 Build Phases Object file Object file Modia HEMGyE Figure 3 16 Build Phases Dialog File Mappings Tab 52 RENESAS A file mapping states that you would like the HEW to pass output files of a certain type produced by one phase referred to as the source phase to another phase referred to as the destination phase Such intermediate files are passed in addition to the project files gt To add a file mapping 1 2 Click Add The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked figure 3 17 Select the file group which you want to pass between the phases from the File group drop down list box Select the source phase i e which phase generates the files from the
173. e 5 48 Overlay Dialog Box Address Range Selected The Section Name list box displays the section groups assigned to the selected address range 221 RENESAS gt Setting section group When using the overlay function the highest priority section group must be selected in the Overlay dialog box otherwise the HEW will operate incorrectly First click one of the address ranges displayed in the Address list box The section groups assigned to the selected address range will then be displayed in the Section Name list box Click to select the section group with the highest priority among the displayed section groups Address Section Name OOFFB800 OOFFBSDB Figure 5 49 Overlay Dialog Box Highest Priority Section Group Selected After selecting a section group clicking the OK button stores the priority setting and closes the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without storing the priority setting Note Within the address range used by the overlay function the debugging information for the section specified in the Overlay dialog box is referred to Therefore the same section of the currently loaded program must be selected in the Overlay dialog box 222 RENESAS 5 14 Looking at Variables This section describes how you can look at variables in the source program 5 14 1 Tooltip Watch The quickest way to look at a variable in your program is to use the Tooltip Watch featur
174. e Horizontal Scale In the XScale submenu of the popup menu the size of the X axis can be selected from 128 256 or 512 pixels 285 RENESAS 5 19 9 Non Display of Cursor Selecting Clear Cursor from the popup menu hides the cursor display 5 19 10 Displaying the Sampling Information Selecting Sample Information from the popup menu displays the Sample Information dialog box Sample Information Data Size 8bit Channel Mono x H 00000310 y H 23 Value Figure 5 103 Sample Information Dialog Box Displays the sampling information of the cursor location in the Waveform View window The following information is displayed Data Size Displays 8bit or 16bit Channel Displays the data channel Value X Displays the X axis of cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of cursor location displays Y axes for both the upper and lower plots when Stereo is selected 286 RENESAS 5 20 Analyzing Performance Use the performance analysis function to measure the rate of execution time The performance analysis function does not affect the realtime operation because it measures the rate of execution time in the specified range by using the circuit for measurement of hardware performance included in the emulator Select either of the following five modes according to the purpose of measurement Table 5 7 Available Measurement Modes Mode Description Purpose Time Of Speci
175. e MCU to be emulated To use an MCU not included in the list select Custom to specify the functions required for this MCU See the hardware manual for details Mode Selects the MCU s operating mode Single chip mode When this box is checked the single chip mode is allowed Clock Selects the speed of the MCU s clock and sub clock Timer Resolution Selects the resolution of the timer for use in execution time measurement The value 20 ns 125 ns 250 ns 500 ns 1 us 2 us 4 us 8 us or 16 us can be selected The timer for execution time measurement has a 40 bit counter At 20 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about six hours and at 16 us the maximum time is about 200 days When the counter overflows the maximum time possible for measurement will be displayed with prompt gt that indicates that the counter has overflowed Enable read and write on the fly When this box is checked it is possible to access the target system memory while the user program is running Do not check this box if you require realtime emulation When accessing the on chip ROM on chip RAM or emulation memory HEW accesses the memory directly as the bus mastership is released to the emulator without breaking the user program When accessing the on chip I O DTCRAM or user memory Memory is accessed with breaking the user program This pause is approximately 1 2 ms while operating at 33 MHz When the on chip RAM is d
176. e Order The Build Order tab figure 3 6 displays the current order in which phases will be executed when the build or build all 4 operation is selected The check box to the left of each phase indicates whether or not it is currently enabled By clicking this box the phase can be toggled on or off Build Phases 2 xi Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Build phase order SH C C Library Generator Add VISH C C Compiler SH Assembler Madi OptLinker Eme eere OVE Mose Up Move Down gt Import Figure 3 6 Build Phases Dialog Build Order Tab In addition the following operations can be performed gt To remove a phase 1 Select the phase that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button gt To view the properties of a system phase 1 Select the system phase that you would like to examine 2 Click the Modify button gt To move a phase 1 Select the phase that you would like to move 2 Click the Move Up or Move Down button gt To import a phase 1 Click the import button A dialog is displayed which allows the user to browse to an existing project to import a custom phase from 2 Choose the location of the project you wish to import a custom phase from Once selected a dialog is displayed which lists the custom phases in the imported project 3 Selecting a phase name and then clicking properties d
177. e Source Program ccceccessssesseesceseeseeseeseeeeeeseesecaeeseeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeenes 302 6 4 Setting a PC Break point io annae raae EENE r E AETERNE EEE 303 GD Setting RE GiSters iecere piesio aE re EErEE EEEE TEIE TARRO PIEEO O TOEKS EISOES ETEA 304 6 67 Executing the Programm ssicscsssissccsssssescsesciescessieessvessizescsenasscascizusnasnasaseascizestassansseesesaustausazs 305 6 7 Reviewing Breakpoints 307 6 8 Referring to Symbols 308 6 9 Viewing Memory 309 6 10 Watching Variables 310 6 11 Displaying Local Variables 313 6 12 Stepping Through a Program 314 6 12 1 Executing the Step In Command 314 6 12 2 Executing the Step Out Command 316 6 12 3 Executing the Step Over Command 317 6 13 Forced Breaking of Program Executions 318 6 14 Resetting the MCU sses 318 6 15 Break Function 319 6 15 1 PC Break Function 319 6 15 2 Breaking Execution at Event Points 322 6 16 Trace Bun Ct ONS vies tes errie Eo r EE E NES 325 6 16 1 Displaying a Trace when Time Stamping is not Available 326 6 16 2 Displaying a Trace when Time Stamping is Available 332 61037 StaliStiCS esi etay sass vesesaksvedt sevaveneaavszcnesesvesssissene esse 335 6 16 4 Function Calls 339 617 Stack Trace Functions seines EA E EE ones agsueeaas woes cas ansealbveges 340 6 18 Performance Measurement Function 0 cece eee es ceecsceeeseceeeesseeecsessceesseesenessaeaeeees 341 6 18 1 Time Of Specif
178. e any parameters Enter the parameters that are required to open a file in the Parameters field Be sure to use the FULLFILE placeholder to specify the location file see appendix C Placeholders for more information on placeholders and their uses Enter the initial directory in which you would like the application to run into the Initial directory field Click OK to create the application 6 Click Modify to modify an application The Modify Application dialog will be displayed This dialog is the same as the Add Application dialog described above except that the Name field is read only Modify the settings as desired and then click OK 7 Click OK to set the application for the selected file group RENESAS 2 4 Specifying How to Build a File Once you have added the necessary files to the project the next step is to instruct the HEW on how to build each file To do this you will need to select a menu option from the Options menu The contents of this menu depend upon which tools you are using For example if you are using a compiler assembler and linker then there will be three menu options each one referring to one of the tools gt To set options for a build phase 1 Select the options menu and find the phase whose options you would like to modify Select this option 2 A dialog will be invoked which allows you to specify the options 3 After making your sele
179. e cable body into the emulator e Plug the cable body into the cable head For details of these steps refer to the User System Interface Cable User s Manual Figure 2 2 gives details of the connectors provided on the emulator lt PC interface cable connector User system interface connector p lt Power connector External probe gt Power switch connector Figure 2 2 E6000 Emulator Connectors 2 3 1 Example of Connecting the User System Interface Cable Head to the User System Screw x 4 User system interface Figure 2 3 Example of Connecting User System Interface Cable Head to User System e Ensure that all power is off to the emulator and the user system e Insert the cable head into the socket on the user system Note Depending upon the package it may be possible to orientate this cable head in any position on the socket so care should be taken to correctly identify pin 1 on the emulator and socket when installing 140 RENESAS e Screw the cable head to the socket with the screws provided Progressively tighten the screws in the sequence shown in figure 2 4 until all are finger tight Figure 2 4 Sequence of Screw Tightening Note Be careful not to over tighten the screws as this may result in contact failure on the user system or damage the cable head Where provided use the solder lugs on the QFP socket to provide extra strength to the emulato
180. e cursor is located on the last line 188 RENESAS 5 4 Looking at Registers If you are debugging at assembly language level then you will probably find it useful to see the contents of the CPU s general registers You can do this by using the Register window 5 4 1 Opening the Register Window To open the Register window choose View gt CPU gt Registers or click the Register toolbar button m The Register window opens showing all of the CPU s general registers and the values displayed in hexadecimal lol x Register Value H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 000000 0 N H 00000000 H 00000000 2l Figure 5 14 Register Window 5 4 2 Expanding a Bit Register If a register is used as a set of flags at the bit level for the control of state its one character symbol rather than its state indicate each bit Double click on the register s name to display the Register dialog box and switch each bit on or off Checking the box for any bit specifies it as holding a 1 while removing the check specifies it as a 0 Register CCR _ Ilmask User Imask Half carry User Figure 5 15 Expanding a Bit Register 189 RENESAS 5 4 3 Modifying Register Contents To change a register s content open the Edit Register dialog box in one of the following methods e Double click the regist
181. e file has not been saved before a file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 4 Ifthe file has been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed gt To save the contents of an editing window under a new name 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select File gt Save As 3 A file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 4 3 3 Saving all Files gt To save the contents of every open editor window 1 Select File gt Save All or click the save all files toolbar button Gi 2 If any of the files has not been saved before a file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 3 If any of the files have been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed 63 RENESAS 4 3 4 Opening a File gt To open a file 1 Select File gt Open or click the open file toolbar button or press CTRL O 2 An open file dialog box will be displayed Use the directory browser on the right to navigate to the directory in which the file you want to open is located Use the Files
182. e number of the line that you want to go to and then click OK 4 The insertion cursor will be placed at the start of the line number specified Goto 21x Figure 4 5 Goto Dialog 69 RENESAS 4 6 Bookmarks When working with many large files at a time it can become difficult to locate specific lines or areas of interest Bookmarks enable you to specify lines that you want to jump back to at a subsequent time One example of its use is in a large C file where you may want to set a bookmark on each function definition Once a bookmark has been set it exists until it is removed or the file is closed gt To set a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the line to mark 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark press CTRL E2 select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the local menu or click the toggle bookmark toolbar button QA 3 A green mark appears in the blank on the left side of the line to indicate the presence of an active bookmark 2 To remove a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the marked line 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark press CTRL E2 select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the local menu or click the toggle bookmark toolbar button QA 3 The mark will be removed and the line will return to normal text To jump to the next bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select Edit gt Bookmark
183. e of my colleagues opened the same workspace simultaneously from another PC I changed the settings of the workspace and saved it He or she saved the workspace after me I opened the workspace again and found that the settings of the workspace differed from what I had set before The settings saved last are enforced Once HEW opens a workspace it is updated inside the memory HEW does not save the settings into a file until a user saves the workspace intentionally 369 RENESAS 370 RENESAS Appendix B Regular Expressions The HEW editor allows you to include special characters in search strings when performing a find or replace operation These characters are listed in table B 1 and are detailed in the following pages Table B 1 Regular Expression Characters Character Function Matches any single character except a newline Matches any number of occurrences 0 or more of any character except a newline n Matches a new line character t Matches a tab character Matches any one character or range listed within the brackets Overrides any following regular expression character e Symbol Meaning This character matches any single character except the newline character Example t p matches top tip but not trap e Symbol Meaning This character matches any number of occurrences 0 or more of any character except a newline Thus this character will not match across new lines Th
184. e split bar button to split the window in half or click on the split bar button keep the button pressed move the mouse down and then release the mouse button at the point you want to split the window gt To adjust the position of the split bar Click on the split bar itself keep the button pressed then move the bar to the new position and then release the button gt To remove the split bar Double click on the split bar or move the split bar to the top or bottom of the window 74 RENESAS 4 10 Configuring Text The following sections detail how to change the appearance of the text displayed in the editor windows 4 10 1 Changing the Editor Font The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to specify the font to be used in its internal editor All editor windows regardless of the file type use the same font To change the editor font 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed Select the Source icon in the tree figure 4 10 2 Select the desired font from the Font list Select the size of the font from the Size list BY Click OK to confirm the new editor settings Format Views P Selected Text D Text Assembly include file Assembly list file Assembly source file C header file _ C list file E C source file E C header file C list file C source file fo Hex file Library information file Linkage
185. e third example place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder select the required placeholder from the combo box and then click the Insert button 373 RENESAS Placeholder Configuration directory x Insert Figure C 3 Placeholder Combo Box In the fourth example type the placeholder into the field directly Ensure that you type the placeholder name in uppercase and that it is preceded by and followed by i e This is correct FILEDIR These are incorrect Filedir FILEDIR SFILEDIR 374 RENESAS C 3 Available Placeholders Table C 1 lists the placeholders and their meanings Table C 1 Placeholders Placeholder Meaning FULLFILE Filename including full path FILEDIR File directory FILENAME Filename excluding path and including extension FILELEAF Filename excluding path and extension File extension Workspace directory WORKSPNAME Workspace name PROUJDIR Project directory PROJECTNAME Project name CONFIGDIR Configuration directory CONFIGNAME Configuration name HEWDIR HEW installation directory TCINSTALL Toolchain install directory on option dialog TOOLDIR Tool installation directory Tools Administration TEMPDIR Temp directory WINDIR Windows directory WINSYSDIR Windows system directory EXEDIR Command directory User login Version con
186. e without Renesas prior written consent Other Important Things to Keep in Mind 1 Circuitry and other examples described herein are meant merely to indicate the characteristics and performance of Renesas semiconductor products Renesas assumes no responsibility for any intellectual property claims or other problems that may result from applications based on the examples described herein 2 No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of any third party or Renesas Figures Some figures in this user s manual may show items different from your actual system Limited Anticipation of Danger Renesas cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard The warnings in this user s manual and on the emulator product are therefore not all inclusive Therefore you must use the emulator product safely at your own risk Ill ENESAS SAFETY PAGE READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism DEFINITION OF SIGNAL WORDS gt This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will re
187. ead write _Mosity _ D not used OOFFEFCO OOFFF7FF User Guarded 1 not used OOFFFS800 OOFFFFFF On Chip Read write Reset 2 not used 3 not used Close Target Device Configuration 00000000 OOO3FFFF Internal ROM OOFFBO00 OOFFEFBF Internal RAM DOFFF800 OOFFFF3F Internal 10 OOFFFF60 OOFFFFBF Internal 10 OOFFFFCO OOFFFFFF Internal RAM Figure 5 4 Memory Mapping Dialog Box This dialog box displays the current memory map The E6000 H8S supports four blocks of user memory These can be 256 kbyte or 1 Mbyte each depending on the SIMM fitted Each block can be placed in the address space on a 256 kbyte or 1 Mbyte boundary The memory mapping has a granularity of H 40 D 64 bytes Each 64 byte block can be set to the internal emulation or external memory and can be guarded access prohibited write protected or read write The H8 300 series E6000 generally incorporates an emulation memory In the memory map the memory can be set as an internal emulation or external guarded access prohibited write protected or read write in a byte unit Add Displays the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box allowing the user to modify the address range and attributes of a memory map Modify Displays the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box allowing the user to modify the address range and attributes of a memory map Reset Resets the map memory to its default settings Close Closes the dialog box
188. eaeeaeenee 192 5 5 4 Viewing a Different Memory Area ccecceceesceseeseeseeseeeeceseeseeaeeseceeeeeeeneeaeeaeenee 192 5 5 5 Modifying the Memory Content ccssceseecceseeseesecseeeeceecesecaeeseeeeeeeeeseeaeeaeente 193 5 5 6 Selecting a Memory Range eccccecsseseeseceecesceseeseeseeeeeeeeaeesecseeeceeceeeeaeeaeeaeenee 193 5 5 7 Finding a Value in Memory ccecessescessceeeesceseeseeseeseeececeeeeaeeseceeeeeseneeaeeaeenee 194 5 5 8 Filling a Memory Area with a Value ccceeccesceseeseeseeeeceeeeseeseeseceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenee 195 5 3 9 Copying a Memory Area aeniei ae ear T l 195 5 5 10 Saving and Verifying a Memory Area sessseeessesesessesrsierseeestsrsesresrsresreersessee 196 5 5 11 Disabling Update of the Window Contents cccccescceseeseeseeteeeeceeeeseeaeeneeaeenee 197 5 5 12 Updating the Window Content ccceceeceesceeeeeseeeeceseeaeesecseeseeeeceeeeaeeaeeaeents 197 5 5 13 Comparing the Memory Contents cceccececeseeseesecseeeeeeseeseeaeceeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaeenee 197 5 5 14 Loading a Memory Area from a File ccceeceeseeseeseeseeeeceseeseeaeeseceeeeeeaeeaeeaeenes 198 Viewing the 1 O Memory cs cvecdiassvecccgisecccsassvavccuesenecadssvesccussvecdaguseenccahevecdcauvenceausvanessoueneed 199 5 6 1 Opening the IO Window ee eceeeseeseeeeceeceseeseeseeseceeeeseeaeeaeeaeeaeseeeeeeeeaeeaeenee 199 5 6 2 Expanding the I O Register Display ccccceceseesesseeseeeeceeceseese
189. eaeens 169 4 4 3 Saving Session Information ccecsecceeeceeeeeesecseeeceeceaeeeeeaeeseceeeceeeeaeeaeeaeens 171 43 Connecting the Emulator cs iccssesSeecsacessvccesevcuccscesteaceesvencsucessuyedes ciucearovastea ndussesteveseneovesscates 172 4 6 Ending the Emulator seneni arric ir eR EE EEE EAEE EER a 173 Section S DEDUBSING iea E p hr EErEE ERE E EEK RES 175 5 1 Setting the Environment for Emulation ccececesceseceeceseeseeeeeceeceeceeeeaecneeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaee 175 5 1 1 Opening the Configuration Properties Dialog BOX eceseseeseeeeeeeeeeneeseees 175 5 1 2 Selecting an MCU Not Included in the List 0 0 eeeeeeceeceneeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeseeneees 177 5 1 3 Selecting the Interface to be Connected 00 eeecesseseeeeceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 178 5 1 4 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog BOX eceeeeceeseeceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 179 5 1 5 Changing the Memory Map Setting cceeceeseeseeseeseeeeceeceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeaeeaeeneees 180 5 2 Downloading a Program aise sss cssasessseccvssssasiscdasessesstevcsnssanesscovaonasesavavsneossasesesvavancdeavarsats 181 5 2 1 Downloading a Program sciscisccisscesssssessisciscesseacictevscvesessvasecnavaiaierasentesasatansessteiaons 181 5 2 2 Viewing the Source Codeseira riii iii sasea EAn AEA E 182 5 2 3 Viewing the Assembly Language Code ecesssceseeccesceeeeeneeeceeeeseeaeeaeeaeeneees 185 5 2 4 Modifying the Assembly Language Code sssseeeeeeeee
190. ect Generator 2 Properties Project Generators Custom Version Control System Export gt Custom CS 2 0 Toolchain Support Search disk b Hitachi SH Toolchain Supporter 2 1 Definition Parser Tool information b Custom Parser 1 0 Be Uninstaller oe V Show all components Unregister Ck Q Q Current HEW tools database location et Shew20 exe win debug Modify Figure 5 11 All Components Shown When seeking technical support you may be asked to give details about some or all of these components To do so open the respective folder select a component and click the Properties button The properties dialog that will be invoked behaves in the same way as discussed previously in this chapter with the exception that there is no Environment tab The HEW also has a feature which outputs tool information regarding the registered components to a file This allows you to retrieve information on the entire HEW system This information can then be sent to your technical support contact if you are experiencing problems with the HEW gt To output tool information 1 Click the Tools gt Administration menu item 2 Click the Tool information button A standard windows file save dialog is displayed 3 Choose the file location and click OK 4 A file is created in the chosen location with the
191. ect all functions in the Select Function Name list box click the gt gt button Deselecting a Function Click the function you wish to deselect from the Set Function Name list box and click the lt button To deselect all functions click the lt lt button The deselected function will be moved from Set Function Name list box back to the Select Function Name list box 220 RENESAS Setting a Function Click the OK button to set the functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box The functions are set and the Select Function dialog box closes Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without setting the functions 5 13 4 Debugging an Overlay Program This section explains the settings for using the overlay functions Displaying Section Group When the overlay mode is used that is when several section groups are assigned to the same address range the address ranges and section groups are displayed in the Overlay dialog box Open the Overlay dialog box by choosing Memory gt Configure Overlay Section Name Cancel Figure 5 47 Overlay Dialog Box at Opening This dialog box has two areas the Address list box and the Section Name list box The Address list box displays the address ranges used in the overlay mode Click to select one of the address ranges in the Address list box Address OUFFB800 OOFFBSDB Section Name Cancel Figur
192. ect from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select the Set as Current Project option or 1 Select the project which you want to make active from the Project gt Set Current Project sub menu 2 10 Inserting a Project into a Workspace When a workspace is created it contains only one project but after it is created you can insert new or existing projects into a workspace gt To insert a new project into a workspace 1 Select Project gt Insert Project The Insert Project dialog will be displayed figure 2 23 2 Set the New Project option 3 Click OK The Insert New Project dialog will be invoked 4 Enter the name of the new workspace into the Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character As you enter the project name the HEW will add a subdirectory for you automatically This can be deleted if desired 5 Click the Browse button to graphically select the directory in which you would like to create the project Alternatively you can type the directory into the Directory field manually 6 The Project type list displays all of the available project types e g application library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list 7 Click OK to create the project and insert it into the workspace Note W
193. ed as a dependent file To view such system include files select the Show standard library includes option figure 2 21 ii i E f demo n re demo B Projecti Projecti 3 Project Files 3 Project Files B cl sre E cO sre E main c E main c E sbrk c Z sbrk c 2 sh_hwetg c B sh_hwofg c Z sh_intv sro sh_intv sre fen Dependencies E stddet h E stdioh Pemet Figure 2 21 Standard Library Includes 2 8 3 Show File Paths If Show file paths is selected all of the files in the project window are shown with their full path i e from a drive letter figure 2 22 c hew demo demo hws i Projecti Project Files E C Hew demo demo cl sre Z C Hew demo demo main c C Hewdemo demo sbrk c E C Hew demo demo sh_hwefg c E C Hew demo demo sh_inty ste at S Projects lt 1 Navigation Figure 2 22 File Paths Shown 31 RENESAS 2 9 Setting the Current Project A workspace can contain more than one project but only one of the projects can be active at any time This active project is the one which build actions and debug operations can be performed on It is possible to change the builder or debugger options for the project An active project is displayed in bold gt To set a project as the current project 1 Select the proj
194. eeeaeeaeeneees 5 16 3 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions ececeseeseceeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeneees 5 16 4 Searching for a Trace Record viscssvecechesesscessvactcssonssesahenevestesvesestesvendsspeauteedsvensesds 5 16 5 Clearing the Trace Information 5 16 6 Saving the Trace Information in a File eceseseeseeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneees 5 16 7 Viewing the Source Window ccsceseeeecceseeseeseeeceeceeeeseeaeeseceeeseaeeaeeaeeneees 5416 8 Timmins the Soure iiss teire na s E ani anise 5 16 9 Acquiring a Snapshot of the Trace Information as 5 16 10 Temporarily Stopping Trace Acquisition eceseseeeeceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeneees 5 16 11 Restarting Trace Acquisition e re en A 5 16 12 Extracting Records from the Acquired Information c eseseseeeereeteereeeees 265 5 16 13 Calculating the Difference in Time Stamping cecececeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeaeen 275 5 16 14 Analyzing Statistical Information 5 16 15 Extracting Function Calls from the Acquired Trace Information eeee 277 Viewing the Function Call History cc ccecescesecseeeeceeceseeseeseceeceaeeseeaeeseceeeseeeeaeeaeeaeens 278 5 17 1 Opening the Stack Trace Window cccceecceseeseeseeeeceeceeeeseeaeeseceeeeeeeeaeeaeeneee 278 5 17 2 Viewing the Source Program csssceescseeeeeeseeseeseeseceeeeeeeseeseeseceeneeeeseaeeaeeaeees 278 5 17 3 Specifying the Views isisiss ceeseseecasesatecsevezeces
195. eeeeeeeaeeaeeaeens 103 Using an External Debug eer sis cssicesssscsedisssesceieasessdivstest essboacdessvaseasestocesivesestuseesicoueveoas 104 Using Custom Placeholders ccccescsssesseeccesceseeseeseeececeeseeseeseeaeceaeeseeaeeseceeeeeeseeaeeaeeneees 105 Using Confirmation Dialog Boxes cccceccesessseseeseeeeeeeeeseeseesececeaeeseeaeeseseeeseeseeaeeaeeneees 106 Version Controls a Aoki achat hebeelachchigunch cheats coche tncnehends 107 Selecting a Version Control System ccecsesesesssceceeceeseeseceeeeeeeeeeaeeaesseeeeseeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeees 108 Using the Custom Version Control System 8 1 1 System Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons cceeeeeceeseeseeneeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaee 8 1 2 User mente optionsics eette oiee e rE Ei N S TE Defining Version Control Commands cceccsscssseeceeseeseeseeseeseeseceeeeceaeeaeeseeaeeeeeeaeeaeeneees 117 8 2 1 Executable retum Code serran nna RAN E NE 117 Specifying ArgUMeNnts vives sccayesssvsvescsavascsveveseecdssvancsussvsavsvetvayegagavavesavavavcnssdsasesavavancvssaseacss 118 83 1 Specifying File Locattons esnie iiien i ieai ii EAER AE KA 119 8 3 2 Specifying Enyit nm ntednaeseeee ri E E E 122 8 3 3 Specifying Comments sciri ieii iri i EAR a 123 8 3 4 Specifying a User Name and Password csscsscssscssesceeseeseeseeseeecereeeeeeeeaeeaeenes 124 Controlling Execution siscscccsssssevssevsssesscsstasstsceevesasesavsacateveascccsavarsstavessdeaaevatesavavavesa
196. eeeeeeeeeeneeaeeaeeaee 199 5 6 3 Modifying the I O Register Content cceceeceeseesecseeeeceeceseeseeseceeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaee 200 Viewing the Current Status cceecseecceceeseeeeseeeececeeceseeseesecseeececeeeeaeesecreeeeeaeeaeeaeeats 200 Reading and Displaying the Emulator Information Regularly cc cseeceeeeceereeneeeeeeee 201 5 8 1 Opening the Extended Monitor Window c ccceseseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenee 201 5 8 2 Selecting Items to be Displayed eeeeeeseesceseeseeseeseeeeceeceseeseeeceeceeeeeeeaeeaeenee 202 Displaying Memory Contents in Realtime cececeeceeseesesseeseeeeceseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeseeaeeaeeaes 203 5 9 1 Opening the Monitor Window cscecceseeceseeseeseeseeeeceeceeecseeseceeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaee 203 5 9 2 Changing the Monitor Settings 0 205 5 9 3 Temporarily Stopping Update of the Monitor 5 9 4 Deleting the Monitor Settings 205 5 9 5 Monitoring Variables 205 5 9 6 Hiding the Monitor Window 5 9 7 Managing the Monitor Window Looking at Labels cceeeceeseeseteeeeeees 208 5 10 1 Listing Labels 5 10 2 Adding a Label 5 10 3 Editing a Label 209 5 10 4 Deleting a Label 210 5 10 5 Deleting All Labels 210 5 10 6 Loading Labels from a File 211 5 10 7 Saving Labels into a File 211 5 10 8 Searching for a Label 211 5 10 9 Searching for the Next Label 5 10 10 Viewing the Source Co
197. eeseeseeaeeneeeaeeaeeaes 35 3 Advanced Build Features ceccesssccssceseeseesseeeseseeeeeesseeneeeaeenes 37 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 The Build Process Revisited Eroa arrossar ass gavsveutsavsvessgasscesasestenssisisoussszssenvaassveasedeasccersyeas 37 Ikl What 18 2 Build Aineina ea enee E NE asses ENA 37 Creating a Customi Build Phase sn sccccvesccssvccaxcessvcencscaveavevsivtesessav AE AEE 39 Ordering Build Ph s Sraid iea E E E ERE ERA 43 3 3 1 Build Phase Ordersasesyei e O a 44 3 3 2 Build File Phase Ordet ccsssesssscsssscsecsesscssesovscssesesssncssesessonsscnecsseseveoesneees 46 Setting Custom Build Phase Options c ecesccseeseeseeseeseeseeececeeeeseesecaeeeeeeseaeeseeaeeaees 47 S41 Options Tab Sentar ATEN UNTE TEE EEAO IANDE SESA 48 PE EIR Outpub Piles Mab EE E E A A 49 34 3 Dependent Files Tabni ore E EEEE E EATR 50 File Mappings 2c ien aeee SeSe Ea OEC IESE EA EOE EESE ESEIA Oa EoLA EINES EENE 52 Controlling the Build sarrus a E TE E T ee ae eee ea 54 Logging Build Output sive ccccssssvesssevssccscnsscsvassssessscvasescssnascossvzssctazavasevssasenssasasatetedeascsedanaaes 55 Changing Toolchaitt Version is c sciscccssssssscssseseveseencsnsesseiaeetersezeseoauatevasaasacesasvatesasaneecouasaaie 56 Using an External Debugger isiro a e E AEEA ORRA 57 Ge n tatin ga Makef
198. elonging to Renesas Technology Corp or a third party Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage or infringement of any third party s rights originating in the use of any product data diagrams charts programs algorithms or circuit application examples contained in these materials All information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp without notice due to product improvements or other reasons It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp by various means including the Renesas Technology Corp Semiconductor home page http www renesas com When using any or all of the information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision
199. emove button 3 4 3 Dependent Files Tab The Dependent Files tab figure 3 14 is where you can specify the dependent files that are needed by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the dependent files are of a more recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e dependent files have been modified since the input file or files were last modified If not the phase is not executed for the files Options Output Files Dependent Files CONFIGDIR I File5 obj Add CONFIGDIR File6 obj CONFIGDIR File obj CONFIGDIR File8 obj Modify c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File1 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File2 obj Remove c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File3 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File4 obj if Figure 3 14 Dependent Files Tab in Custom Options 50 RENESAS gt To add a dependent file 1 Click Add The Add Dependent File dialog will be invoked figure 3 15 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click OK to add this output file to the list Placeholder popup menu 21x ee gt Browse Cancel Figure 3 15 Add Dependent File Dialog gt To modify a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to modify 2 Click Modify The Modify Dependent File dialog which is the same as figur
200. en built and up to date before the second application can build correctly To achieve this situation we can specify the library as a dependent i e child project of the application project This would then allow the library to be built first if it is out of date When a dependent project is built the HEW attempts to match the configuration in the dependent project with that of the current project This means that if the current configuration is Debug then the HEW will attempt to build the Debug configuration in the dependent project If this matched configuration does not exist then the HEW will use the configuration that was last used in the dependent project gt To make projects depend upon another 1 Select Project gt Dependent Projects The Dependent Projects dialog will be displayed figure 2 24 2 Select the project to which you would like to add dependents to When you do this the Dependent projects list will display all of the projects in the workspace excluding the selected project 3 The Dependent projects list has a check box for each project listed Set the associated check boxes to make those projects depend upon the selected project 4 Click OK to confirm the new project dependencies Dependent Projects 21 x main_project hd Cancel Dependent projects Mdepend01 Figure 2 24Dependent Projects dialog 33 RENESAS 2 12 Removing a Project from a Workspace To re
201. ent Range Name PA1 Range Start Address H 00000000 End Address H o0000000 Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode Prefetch Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 6 64 Performance Analysis Properties Dialog Box 4 Select Time Of Specified Range Measurement from the Measurement Method PA1 combo box 5 The parameter settings are as follows e Enter sort in the Range Name edit box Click the button to the right of the Start Address edit box to display the Input Function Range dialog box Enter the function name sort in the Function edit box of this dialog box and then click the OK button The corresponding addresses for the function sort will now be set in the Start Address and End Address edit boxes Input Function Range 2 xi Function sort Cancel Figure 6 65 Input Function Range Dialog Box Note The addresses figured out in the Input Function Range dialog box are just for reference In some cases the end address of a function may be different Check the last instruction of the function in the Disassembly window to correct the value set in End Address so that it will be the address of the last instruction in general the last instruction of a function is a RTS instruction A label name or an expression can be entered instead of an address value in boxes where an address should be entered 342
202. ent Time Count 00h OOmin 00s O00ms OOO0us O00ns Run Time Count 00h OOmin 00s OOlms O9Zus 500ns Figure 6 34 Displayed Contents of the Status Window PC Break Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 321 RENESAS 6 15 2 Breaking Execution at Event Points Setting up of an event point on event channel 1 Ch1 such that a break is triggered when the event point s conditions have been satisfied five times is explained as an example of the use of event points Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu The Event window is displayed The breakpoint that has been previously set must be deleted Click the Breakpoints window with the right hand mouse button and select Delete All from the popup menu to delete all the breakpoints that have been set Click the Event tab Up to 12 event points eight event channels and four range channels can be set up as independent conditions In this example we are setting the condition for event channel 1 Figure 6 35 Event Window Event Channel 1 Ch1 Select the line for Ch1 in the Event window Double click on this line that is highlighted The Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box is displayed Make the following settings in the boxes on the General page Select the
203. ep a single source line In the Disassembly window a step operation will step a single assembly language instruction If the instruction calls another function or subroutine you have the option to either step into or step over the function If the instruction does not perform a call then either option will cause the debugger to execute the instruction and stop at the next instruction e Stepping Into a Function If you choose to step into the function the debugger will execute the call and stop at the first line or instruction of the function To step into the function either click the Step In toolbar button or choose Debug gt Step In e Stepping Over a Function Call If you choose to step over the function the debugger will execute the call and all of the code in the function and any function calls that that function may make and stop at the next line or instruction of the calling function To step over the function either click the Step Over toolbar button or choose Debug gt Step Over e Stepping Out of a Function There are occasions when you may have entered a function finished stepping through the instructions that you want to examine and would like to return to the calling function without tediously stepping through all the remaining code in the function Or alternatively you may have stepped into a function by accident when you meant to step over it and so want to return to the calling function without stepping all the
204. eps only one source line 387 Table F 1 GUI Menus cont Toolbar Menu Option Shortcut Button Remarks Debug Halt Program Esc Stops the execution of the user cont program Initialize Disconnects the debugging platform and connects it again Disconnect Disconnects the debugging platform Download Modules Downloads the object program Unload Modules Unloads the object program Memory Search Searches for the specified value from the specified memory area Copy Copies the specified memory fe area to the specified address Compare Compares the specified two memory areas Fill A Fills the specified value in the amp specified memory area Test Tests the specified memory A area Refresh Forces a manual update of the contents of all the Memory windows open Configure Overlay Selects the target section group when the overlay function is used 388 RENESAS Appendix G Command Lines Table G 1 lists the HEW commands Table G 1 HEW Commands No Command Name Abbreviation Function 1 Comment 2 ANALYSIS AN Enables or disables performance analysis 3 ANALYSIS_RANGE AR Sets or displays a performance analysis range 4 ANALYSIS_RANGE_ AD Deletes a performance analysis range DELETE 5 ASSEMBLE AS Assembles instructions into memory 6 ASSERT Checks if an expression is true or false
205. equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense VI tENESAS Introduction The E6000 emulator is an advanced realtime in circuit emulator which allows programs to be developed and debugged for the H8S family microcomputers The E6000 emulator can either be used without a user system for developing and debugging software or connected via a user system interface cable to a user system for debugging user hardware High performance Embedded Workshop hereafter referred to as HEW is a Graphical User Interface intended to ease the development and debugging of applications written in C C programming language and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers Its aim is to provide a powerful yet intuitive way of accessing observing and modifying the debugging platform in which the application is running HEW is a powerful development environment for embedded applications targeted at Renesas microcontrollers The main features are e A configurable build engine that allows you to set up compiler assembler and linker options via an easy to use interface e An
206. er you want to change e Select the register you want to change and choose Edit from the popup menu Value H o0000000 Set As Cancel Whole Register x Figure 5 16 Edit Register Dialog Box You can enter a number or C C expression in the Value field You can choose whether to modify the whole register contents a masked area floating or flag bits by selecting an option from the combo box the contents of this list depend on the CPU model and selected register When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 5 4 4 Using Register Contents Use the value contained in a CPU register by specifying the register name prefixed by the character e g R1 PC R6L or ER3 when you are entering a value elsewhere in the HEW for example when displaying a specified address in the Disassembly or Memory windows 190 RENESAS 5 5 Operating Memory This section describes how to look at memory areas in the CPU s address space How to look at a memory area in different formats how to fill and move a memory block and how to load and verify a memory area with a disk file are described 5 5 1 Viewing a Memory Area To look at a memory area choose View gt CPU gt Memory or click the View Memory toolbar button amp to open the Memory window This will open the Set Address
207. es 1 In this emulator odd addressees cannot be specified as the start addresses for monitoring 2 Selection of the foreground or background color may not be available depending on the operating system in use After setting clicking the OK button displays the Monitor window 204 RENESAS w monitor monitor H OOFFEFAG Address Data OxOOFFEFAO 00 00 OD B3 00 00 06 FA OxOOFFEFA8 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxOOFFEFBO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxOOFFEFBS 00 00 10 36 00 00 04 IE Figure 5 33 Monitor Window During user program execution the display is updated according to the setting value of the auto update interval Note Select Refresh from the popup menu when data is not displayed correctly after changing the address or content of memory 5 9 2 Changing the Monitor Settings Selecting Monitor Setting from the popup menu of the Monitor window displays the Monitor Setting dialog box which allows the settings to be changed Colors the size of accesses and the display format can be easily changed from Color or Access of the popup menu 5 9 3 Temporarily Stopping Update of the Monitor During user program execution the display of the Monitor window is automatically updated according to the auto update interval Select Lock Refresh from the popup menu of the Monitor window to stop the update of display The characters in the address section are displayed in black and the update of display is stopped
208. es The first i shows the effect of pressing return when the auto indentation feature is disabled the insertion cursor returns to the left hand side of the window on the next line When the line int z 20 is typed it is not aligned with the previous two lines The second example ii shows the effect of pressing return when auto indentation is enabled the insertion cursor drops underneath the i void myfunction void int x 5 int y 10 Ye int z 20 void myfunction void int x 5 int y 10 sala int z 20 i Auto Indentation Disabled ii Auto Indentation Enabled 66399 of the previous line Now when the line int z 20 is typed it is automatically aligned i e automatically indented Figure 4 8 Effect of Auto Indentation gt To enable disable Auto Indentation 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Enable auto indentation check box accordingly 3 Click OK for the setting of the auto indentation check box to take effect RENESAS 73 4 9 Splitting a Window The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to split a text window into two Figure 4 9 shows the split bar button which is located just underneath the maximize button at the top right hand corner of any text window Figure 4 9 Split Bar Button gt To split a window Double click on th
209. esceeseeteeeeeneeeeeeee 367 8 2 5 Support of Flash Memory sissors karesas rair rauei eriin 367 8 2 6 Hardware Standbyocoo ie osent aei a E E T E 367 8 2 7 Sub Chip Module Stop Control Registers in the H8S 2168 seeeeeeneeeereeeeeeee 368 8 2 8 Support of Boundary Scan JTAG eseeeseesseeeeeeseessesrsesesessesrsrseesesessrsrseesesrsses 368 Appendix A Troubleshooting 0 cece cece eee ce cece eeesaesaesaeeaeeaeeaeeaeegs 369 Appendix B Regular Expressions 0 c cece cee sseeceeeseesetsessessessessessessessenes 371 Appendix C Placeholders O13 C 1 What is a Placeholder C 2 Inserting a Placeholder C 3 Available Placeholder 375 CA Placeholder Tips Esan E RE EAR TE AEEA AEE 377 Appendix D I O File Format D 1 File format Bit Field Not Supported a D 2 File format Bit Field Supported cececeeseeseeseeseeeeceeceseeseesecsecseceeeeseeseceeeeeeeeeaeeaeente Appendix E Symbol File Format 0 0 ccc cece cee csecesesesaesesaesaeeanegs 383 Appendix F gt MOnus cic ticteeteestestvecteestesstvectveslosssvecteestosslvectvegtossivecivestosslvestveses 385 Appendix G Command Lines sssssessesssesessisssesetstsesesreststsesesststnesessrsrsenersest 389 xi Appendix H Diagnostic Test Procedure cece ceeeeeeesceseeeeeeneeeseteeeeeeeseeaeeeaeens H 1 System Set Up for Test Program Execution ccceccesesseeseesecseceeceeceseeseeseeeeceecneeeeeeneenees H 2 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using Tes
210. eseeereeeerstssrsrsrsresesrssrsrses 185 5 2 5 Viewing a Specific Address eee 186 5 2 6 Viewing the Current Program Counter Address 186 5 3 Debugging with the Command Line Interface 187 5 3 1 Opening the Command Line Window 187 5 3 2 Specifying a Command File 0 000 187 5 3 3 Executing a Command File 188 5 3 4 Stopping Command Execution 188 5 3 5 Specifying a Log File 188 5 3 6 Starting or Stopping Logging 188 5 3 7 Entering a Full Path to the File 188 5 3 8 Pasting a Placeholder 188 5 4 Looking at Registers ceeeeeeeeeees 189 5 4 1 Opening the Register Window 189 5 4 2 Expanding a Bit Register 189 5 4 3 Modifying Register Content cccseeceseeseceeeeeeeesececeeseeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeens 190 vii 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 11 viii 5 44 Using Register Content ccis ccccscissessvecssscascsasasesstsssasesesavsnsstavcaadaoaevasesavvsevesasenees 190 Operating MeMOry is scsavcsssncsccessessvizesessseusenaseise sea sneqeseaseasectarscnsseeatareharaasdeeatearesavniasoaateees 191 55A Va with a Memory Areas gcc 5 seis is iceowvcnscdaaveayccoivescensavnecieosevaceisovencseuseveveisenestss 191 5 5 2 Displaying Data in Different Formats ccceseseeseeseeeeceeeeseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenee 192 5 5 3 Splitting Up the Window Display cececcecceseeseeseeseeeeceeceseeeeeseeaeeeeeee
211. ess bus value during the user program execution While in subactive mode SubActive is displayed after the address bus value Status lt Status of the CPU gt Displays the status of the CPU PREFETCH CPU instruction prefetch cycles DATA CPU data access cycles DTC Operation of DTC RFU Operation of RFU SLEEP Sleep mode STANDBY Standby mode WATCH Watch mode SUBSLEEP Subsleep mode ROM Write Displays whether or not the ROM has been written to during the user program execution Once the ROM has been written to the user program stops The state is retained until the user program execution resumes Target Mode Displays the mode to be input from the user system Target Clock Displays whether or not there is a clock signal to be input from the user system Note In this emulator the update interval of the Extended Monitor window cannot be selected or changed 361 RENESAS 8 1 8 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas The following tables show examples of signals to indicate the bus states and areas that can be acquired by the emulator Table 8 7 Bus State Signals Acquired by the Emulator Bus State Trace Display Status Description CPU Prefetch PROG CPU prefetch cycles CPU Data DATA CPU data access cycles DTC DTC DTC cycles RFU RFU RFU operation Other OTHER Others Table 8 8 Area Signals Acquired by the Emulator Area Trace Display Area De
212. essions dialog box figure 4 16 21x Debug sessions oo DefaultSession Sessionyyyy_E6000_Emulator_CP Cancel Sessiomooc_E6000_Emulator_CP Add Remove VE as Properties Current session DefaultSession b Figure 4 16 Debug Sessions Dialog Box 2 Select the session you want to use from the Current session combo box 3 Click the OK button to set the session 168 RENESAS 4 4 2 Adding and Deleting Sessions A new session can be added by copying settings from another session or deleting a session e To add a new empty session Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 Click the Add button to display the Add new session dialog box figure 4 17 Check the Add new session radio button Enter a name for the session Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box This creates a file with the same name as the entered session name If the file name already exists an error is displayed Add new s Figure 4 17 Add new session Dialog Box RENESAS 169 e To import an existing session into a new session file 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 2 Click the Add button to display the Add new session dialog box figure 4 17 3 Check the Use an existing session file radio button 4
213. explorer to modify the options for more than one selection On the right hand side are the 3 options tabs This is where you set the options that you want to apply to the selected file s You can also choose which configuration information is being viewed from the configuration list on the upper left of the dialog box Each configuration is listed along with a special entry named Multiple configurations If you select multiple configurations then a dialog is displayed which allows you to select more than one configuration This method is used throughout HEW for modifying multiple configurations at once 47 RENESAS 3 4 1 Options Tab The Options tab figure 3 11 allows you to define the command line options that will be passed to the phase The Command field displays the command which was entered when you defined the phase figure 3 3d Enter into the Options field the command line arguments that you would like to pass to the command If you want to insert a placeholder select the relevant placeholder from the Placeholder drop down list box and then click the Insert button For a detailed description of placeholders see appendix C Placeholders sub CONFIGDIR buildlib sub Configuration directory a plead x ca Figure 3 11 Custom Options Options Tab 48 RENESAS 3 4 2 Output Files Tab The Output Files tab figure 3 12 is where you can specify the outp
214. ext Label Choose Find Next from the popup menu to find the next occurrence of the label containing the text that you entered 5 10 10 Viewing the Source Corresponding to a Label Select a label and choose View Source from the popup menu to open the Source or Disassembly window containing the address corresponding to the label 212 RENESAS 5 11 Executing Your Program This section describes how you can execute your program s code You will learn how to do this by either running your program continuously or stepping single or multiple instructions at a time 5 11 1 Running from Reset To reset your user system and run your program from the reset vector address choose Debug gt Reset Go or click the Go Reset toolbar button The program will run until it hits a breakpoint or a break condition is met You can stop the program manually by choosing Debug gt Halt or by clicking the Halt toolbar button Note The program will start running from whatever address is stored in the Reset Vector location Therefore it is important to make sure that this location contains the address of your startup code 5 11 2 Continuing Run When your program is stopped the HEW will display an yellow arrow mark in the gutter of the line in the editor and Disassembly windows that correspond to the CPU s current program counter PC address value This will be the next instruction to be executed if you perform a step or continue running
215. ffers This provides for effective investigation of hardware and software problems by accurately isolating and identifying the conditions under which such problems arise 348 RENESAS Section 7 Hardware Specifications Specific to This Product This section describes the hardware specifications on the H8S 2168 E6000 emulator 71 H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator Specifications The H8S 2168 E6000 emulator supports the system development using the following microcomputer e H8S 2168 group 7 1 1 Supported MCU and User System Interface Cable The user system interface cable HS2168ECN61H is required for emulation of the H8S 2168 group MCU For details refer to the user s manual attached to the user system interface cable See the development support tool catalog for the MCU type names and packages supported by the E6000 emulator and for the combination of the E6000 user system interface cables and optional boards 7 1 2 Operating Voltage and Frequency Specifications Table 7 1 shows the MCU operating voltage and frequency specifications supported by the E6000 emulator If the emulator is used in an environment that exceeds the operating voltage range and operating frequency range guaranteed for the MCU operation normal emulator operation is not guaranteed Table 7 1 Operating Voltage and Frequency Specifications MCU Type Operating Voltage V Operating Frequency 0 MHz H8S 2168 group 3 0 3 6 5 33 NOTE For details on the opera
216. fied Range Measures the execution time and Measurement of time taken for Measurement execution count in the specified processing of functions except for range that required for child functions called from the functions Start Point To End Point Measurement Measures the execution time and execution count between the specified addresses Measurement of time taken for processing of functions Start Range To End Range Measurement Measures the execution time from a specified range to another specified range Measurement of execution time spent from calling of any of sequential subroutines to calling of any of another sequential subroutines in a program that includes subroutines in sequence such as an assembly program Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Measures the number of times a specified range is accessed from another specified range Measurement of the number of times a global variable is accessed from a specific function Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Measures the number of times a specified range has called another specified range Measurement of the number of times a function is called from a specific function Use eight performance channels installed on the circuit for measurement of hardware performance in the emulator for setting of conditions for measurement Up to eight points can be set Note however that up to four points can be set in Start Range To E
217. fies the start address of the memory where image data is to be displayed Displayed in hexadecimal Palette Address Specifies the start address of the memory of color palette data Displayed in hexadecimal Valid when 8Bit is selected for RGB or BGR Width Height Size Specifies the width and height of the image Width Pixel Specifies the width of the image When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Specifies the height of the image When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Displays the buffer size of the image from the width and height Displayed in hexadecimal Height Pixel Buffer Size Specifies the location size and data start location of the part to be displayed among the entire image View Information View Mode Specifies the entire part to be displayed in the image Full Size Displays the entire image Part Size Displays part of the image Start Position Top Displays data from the upper left Bottom Displays data from the lower left 281 RENESAS Position Specifies the start position of the image where part of the image is to be displayed Valid when Part Size is selected X Position Specifies the X axis of the start location When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Y Position Specifies the Y axis of the start location When a prefix is omitted the values are
218. figure 4 11 Enter the name of the keyword group in the Category Title field then click OK to create the new keyword group Add Category Category Title pee RAE ce Figure 4 11 Add Category Dialog gt To create new keywords 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the item underneath the source view icon in the tree you wish to modify the syntax highlighting for This should be the file type e g C source file and correct keyword group e g identifier or pre processor 3 Select the Keywords tab figure 4 12 76 RENESAS Format Yiews 24 xi Source E All Assembly include file Assembly list file Assembly source file Colour Font Keywords Comments C header file C list file C source file D Comments D Control D Declaration D Operator D PreProcessor C header file C list file C source file Expanded assembly Hex file i ll Add Modify Remove OK Cancel Figure 4 12 Format Views Dialog Keywords Tab Remove HEV Sample Text 4 Click the Add button to add a keyword Then the Add Keyword dialog figure 4 13 will be launched Specify a keyword in the Keyword field and click OK to close the dialog To remove a keyword select the keyword and click the Rem
219. file extensions can belong to the same group For example assembler source files may have several extensions in a single project e g src asm mar etc as shown in figure 2 8 ma i mi i SRC ASM MAR LIB EPF Assembler source files C source files Library files Figure 2 8 File Extensions and Groups When creating a new extension you should consider whether the extension belongs to a group which is already defined or whether you need to create a new file group If you are adding a completely new type of file then you will want to create a new file group This process is described below 18 RENESAS gt To create a new file extension in a new file group 1 Select Project gt File Extensions from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed figure 2 7 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 9 3 Enter the extension which you want to define into the File extension field It is not necessary to type the period character The drop list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to a new group option and enter a description which defines this new file group 5 At this stage it is possible to change the associated application There are four available choices in the
220. g and Editing Component Properties Uninstalling Component saeir A AS E E A E Technical Support Issues sccscvccssseiscessecsvessvssiscvesoxevasavevicevssvsszssasevasevasvsaeisassvasesavatavevsaeviacss Custona Project Types sivesssecssesssavsvesasvaiscessancacsvecensszoasscestaiaiaessoavasaccovaiauevesvarescascaznevereatecs Customizing the Environment 0 cesses eee ceeceeeeteteeseeaes 93 Customizing the Toolbar ee eeeeeeeee Customizing the Tools Menu Configuring the Help System Specifying Workspace Options 6 4 1 Open last workspace at start up ccceeecceseeseeseeseeseeeeeceeeeceaeeaeeseeaeeeeeeeeeaeeneeas 6 4 2 Restore the files on opening workspace 6 4 3 Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace cee eee 100 6 4 4 Save workspace before executing any tools cceseseececeesceeeeteeeeeeeeeseeseeaeeaeees 100 6 4 5 Prompt before saving workspace seceeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeceeceeceseeseeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeens 100 6 4 6 Default directory for new Workspaces ccceccesceseeseeteeeeceeeeseeseeseceeeeeceeeeeeeeneees 101 6 4 7 Prompt before saving SCSSION cseeceesceseeseeseeseceesececeseeseeseeseceeeeesseaeeaeeneees 101 Using an External Editor Customizing File Save 6 6 1 Save files before executing any tools ccecceceeseeseeseeeeceeceeceeeeseeseeseeeeeeaeeaeeneees 103 6 6 2 Prompt before saving files cc ceceseeseeseceeeeeceeceseeseesecsececeeeeeeeaece
221. g box shown in figure 5 20 is displayed Edit Memory x Current Value Cancel New Value D Figure 5 20 Edit Memory Dialog Box A number or C C expression can be entered in the New Value field After you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key Then the dialog box closes and the new value is written into memory The memory contents can also be modified by moving the cursor on the memory unit and entering the new value in hexadecimal through the keyboard 5 5 6 Selecting a Memory Range Tf the range to be selected is in the Memory window you can select the range by clicking on the first memory unit according to the Memory window display choice and dragging the mouse to the last unit The selected range is highlighted If the memory address range is larger than or outside the Memory window you can enter the start address and byte count in the respective fields of the Memory dialog box 193 RENESAS 5 5 7 Finding a Value in Memory To find a value in memory open the Memory window and select Search from the popup menu The Search Memory dialog box shown in figure 5 21 is displayed Data Search Data As Byte amp 1 z IV Search Equal Data Search Backward Figure 5 21 Search Memory Dialog Box Enter the start and end addresses of the range in which to search if a memory area was selected in the Memory window the start and end
222. g specified to take effect Options 2 xi Build Editor Workspace Confirmation r Spacing I Use spaces as tabs Tabsie 4 IV Enable auto indentation r General IV Save files before executing any tools I Show files in notebook I Prompt before saving files MV Enable syntax coloring r External editor I Use extemal editor Figure 4 7 Options Dialog Editor Tab When a TAB key is pressed in the editor a tab character is usually stored in the file However sometimes it is preferable to store spaces instead The representation of tab characters can be controlled via the Options dialog gt To use spaces as tabs 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Use spaces as tabs check box as appropriate 3 Click OK for the tab setting specified to take effect 72 RENESAS 4 8 3 Auto Indentation When you press return in a standard editor the insertion cursor will move to the next line down at the first column i e against the left hand side of a window Auto Indentation is a feature which when return is pressed places the insertion cursor on the next line as before but under the first non white space character of the previous line This enables you to type neat C C or assembler code faster as you don t have to type leading spaces or tabs yourself Figure 4 8 illustrates two exampl
223. ge function then sorts the array which was sorted in ascending order by the sort function in descending order The file tut orial cpp contains source code for the tutorial program The file Tutorial abs isa compiled load module in the Dwarf2 format Notes 1 After recompilation the addresses may differ from those given in this section 2 This section describes general usage examples for the emulator For the specifications of particular products refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help The operation address of Tutorial abs attached to each product differs according to products Replace the address used in this section with the relevant address in each product after checking that it is placed on the corresponding line of the source program In this tutorial the H8S 2633 E6000 emulator is taken as an example File paths or the appearance of figures differs according to products 299 RENESAS 6 2 Running the HEW Open a workspace by following the procedure listed in section 4 2 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace Select the following directory HEW installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000 2633 Tutorial Note The file path differs depending on the product Refer to section 8 2 1 Environment for Execution of the Tutorial Program Then select the file indicated below Open Works Look in S Tuoi ss e HK ED Debug_H85_2237_E600
224. ge is measured with Time Of Specified Range Measurement mode Note Available bus cycle conditions vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 295 RENESAS 5 Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Performance Anal Properties Measurement Method PA1 Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Range Name PA1 Range Call Range Start Address H o0000000 E Start Address H o0000000 l End Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 5 111 Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Range The range for the Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Call Range The range for the Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement As the call range specify the start and end addresses of the selected subroutine Start Address Start address End Address End address Measures the number of times the range specified as the call range is called from the range specified by the start and end addresses The execution time in the specified range can be measured with Time Of Specified Range Measurement mode As the call range specify the start and end addresses of the selected su
225. ghted line moves to the first statement of the sort function in the Source window RENESAS 315 6 12 2 Executing the Step Out Command The Step Out command steps out of the called function and stops at the next statement of the calling statement in the main function e To step out of the sort function select Step Out from the Debug menu or click the Step Out button in the toolbar Figure 6 22 Step Out Button GY Tutorial High perf ce Embe tutorial cpp ij m oj x lt gt File Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window 18 x jo saa S smeloTo sml aale m a Jagi IE ao i h Debua H8s_2237_E6000 SessionH8S_2237_E6000 al ne Tae a JE amp amp IE BEELA mme salm mja E G xix ir int i class Sample p_sam a Sy Tutorial ag Tutorial 0x00001046 p_sam new Sample Eg C source file Ox0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i E dbsct c 0x00001050 j rand B sbrke 0x00001058 if j lt 0 0x0000105a j j B C source file L resetpra cpp 0x0000105c ali sort cpp neerpen 0x00001070 e Pp_sam gt sort a tS SEEE 0x0000107a D p_sam gt change a L Tutorial abs 0x00001082 p_sam gt s0 a 0 0x0000108a p_sam gt s1 a 1 0x00001096 p_sam gt s2 a 2 Ox000010a2 p_san gt s3 a 3 0x000010ae p_sam g
226. gs The Demonstration is a program for the simulator attached to the H8S H8 300 compiler package To use the generated source file delete the Printf statement in the source file 162 RENESAS 3 Make the required setting for the toolchain When the setting has been completed the following dialog box is displayed 2 xi Miyyyy E6000 Emulator GPU 2000 Micox E6000 Emulator CPU 2600 Target type all Targets x lt Back Finish Cancel Figure 4 9 New Project Step 7 Dialog Box The target for the session file used when the HEW is activated must be selected here Check the box against the target platform and then click the Next button For details on the session file refer to section 4 4 Debugger Sessions 163 RENESAS 4 Set the configuration file name The configuration file saves the state of HEW except for the emulator Target name E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Configuration name Debue_yyyy_E6000_Emulator_GP Detail options Value Modify Figure 4 10 New Project Step 8 Dialog Box If multiple target platforms were selected in the New Project Step 7 dialog box shown in figure 4 9 set the name of a configuration file for each of them each time pressing the Next button to proceed to the next target Setting of the configuration file name is the end of the emulator settings Complete the creation of a new workspace according to the i
227. gure 2 1 This will be the case for most installations of the HEW However if you want to begin changing the build process e g adding and removing phases then it is important to understand more about the way in which a build functions 3 1 1 What is a Build Building a project means applying a set of tools upon certain input files in order to produce the desired output Thus we apply a compiler upon C C source files in order to create object files we apply an assembler upon assembler source files in order to create object files and so forth At each step or phase of the build we apply a different tool upon a different set of input files Figure 3 1 presents another view of the build process Yas BEGIN fea Ho Phase 1 Input Files Phase 1 Output Files gt PHASE 2 gt Phase 2 Input Files Phase 2 Output Files gt PHASE 3 gt Phase 3 Output Files Phase 3 Input Files ZT PHASE X gt F Phase X Input Files Phase X Output Files Figure 3 1 Build Process 37 RENESAS The High performance Embedded Workshop provides the ability to change this build process via its Build Phases dialog which can be accessed via the Options gt Build Phases figure 3 2 On the left hand side are the phases that are defined in the current project Figure 3 2 shows a standard set of build phases The remainder of th
228. gure 5 100 Pixel Information Dialog Box This dialog box displays pixel information on the cursor location Color Mode Displays the format of the image Pixel Displays color information of the cursor location Displayed in decimal Position Displays the cursor location in X and Y axis Displayed in decimal X Displays the X axis of the cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of the cursor location Buffer Size Displays the buffer size Displayed in decimal Width Displays the buffer width Height Displays the buffer height Image Size Displays the width and height of the display Displayed in decimal Width Displays the width Height Displays the height 283 RENESAS 5 19 Displaying Memory Contents as Waveforms Memory contents can be displayed as waveforms in the Waveform View window 5 19 1 Opening the Waveform View Window Choose View gt Graphic gt Waveform or click the Waveform toolbar button IEN to open the Waveform Properties dialog box shown in figure 5 101 Waveform Properties Data Address H o0000000 7 Data Size bit 7 Cancel Channel Mono Stereo Buffer Size H o0000000 v Figure 5 101 Waveform Properties Dialog Box Specifies the waveform format The following items can be specified Data Address Specifies the start address of data in memory displayed in hexadecimal Data Size Selects 8Bit or 16Bit Channel
229. h whole word only check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 6 If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box 7 If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions check box Refer to Appendix B Regular Expressions for further information 8 The Direction radio buttons allow you to select the direction of the search Selecting Down means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the bottom of the file Selecting Up means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the top of the file 9 Click the Find Next button to begin the search Click Cancel to stop the find action The High performance Embedded Workshop editor also allows you to search for a string across many files 66 RENESAS 4 5 2 Finding Text in Multiple Files gt To search for text in many files 1 Select Edit gt Find in Files select Find in Files from the editor window s local menu or click the find in files toolbar button i The Find in Files dialog box will be displayed figure 4 3 Find In Files 2 xi Find M Struct X n x Cancel In files types 1 c cpp exp fsy h hpp inc lis p cma Directory fe hew demo demo X Br
230. hardware Program Name Displays the program file name 359 RENESAS 2 Platform Sheet Selecting the Platform tab on the Status window displays this sheet Table 8 4 Platform Sheet Items Item Column Connected To Status Column Displays emulator name driver used CPU Displays the target MCU name Mode Displays the selected mode Clock source Displays the selected clock Run status Displays the execution status Break The user program breaks Running The user program is running Cause of last break Displays the cause of the emulator stopped at a break If a program breaks in the sub active state SubActive will be displayed after the cause of the break Ready User program not executed immediately after starting the HEW User Break Break by the user PC Break Break by program breakpoint On Chip Break A Break by hardware PC Break Complex Event System Break by complex event system Stepping Completed Break by stepping completed Stepping Aborted Break by stepping aborted ROM Write Access Break Break by writing to ROM Write protect Access Break Break by writing to a read only memory Unused Area Access Break Break by accessing to a guarded memory Performance Break Break by Performance Analysis Invalid breakpoint Break by a break instruction without PC Break Event Time Count Displays the measured result of the timer between events Run Time Count
231. he OK button to enforce your choice Change Toolchain Version Toolchain name Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Current version 6 0 4 Cancel Available versions E o A v Toolchain build phases OptLinker 7 04 SH Assembler 5 08 SH C C Compiler 6 04 SH C C Library Generator iil Figure 3 20 Change Toolchain Version Dialog To show information of toolchain components select a tool from the Toolchain build phases list on the Change Toolchain Version dialog and click the Information button Then a tool information dialog figure 3 21 will show you the information of the tool Click the Close button to close the dialog SH C C Compiler Information 24 x Information SuperH RISC engine C C Compiler Ver 7 0 Copyright C 1992 2001 HitachiLtd Hitachi Software Engineering Co Ltd Licensed Material of Hitachi Ltd Hitachi Software Engineering Co Ltd Figure 3 21 Toolchain Information Dialog 56 RENESAS 3 9 Using an External Debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu as described in chapter 6 Customizing the Environment The Debugger tab of the Customize dialog figure 3 22 is where the HDI related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supporte
232. he PC interface board is correctly installed in the host computer Shows that the E6000 is correctly connected to the host computer ows the ID number of e lower board of the 6000 always 5 Hd Mn ows the ID number of e middle board of the 6000 always 0d At NHN ows the ID number of e upper board of the 6000 always 6 At Nn Shows the check results for the registers in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of decoding test and marching test for the dual port RAM in the E6000 normal completion 395 3 Test Firmware RAM A Decode Test page H 700 H 71f OK B Marching Test page H 700 H 71f OK 4 Test Trace memory A Decode Test page H 000 H 04f Lower 32K OK B Marching Test page H 000 H 04f Lower 32K OK C Decode Test page H 000 H 04f Upper 32K OK D Marching Test page H 000 H 04f Upper 32K OK 5 Test Map control memory A Decode Test page H 200 SoH ZIEL EEn OK B Marching Test page H 200 H 27f OK 6 Test Internal ROM and RAM A Decode Test Internal ROM OK B Marching Test Internal ROMs 55 5 oe sete ty tet See OK C Decode Test Internal RAM s s ss sisciees y OK D Marching Test Internal ROMI s 4 46 6 e84 OK 7 RESERVED 8 Test Emulation RAM STEP Operation Bi Step OPS PALL ON syrerne e rer e e a e e a OK 396 RENESAS Shows the results of decoding test for the fi
233. he current state of the HEW Figure 1 18 shows the seven sections of the status bar Displays HEW statu PESIS i Read only status Line number Column number Insertion Mode Ready Read write 274 ft INS zal L Caps lock Num lock Figure 1 18 Status Bar 8 RENESAS 1 3 The Help System The help menu is the rightmost menu on the HEW menu bar It contains the menu option Contents which when selected takes you to the main HEW help window To obtain help on specific dialogs click on the context sensitive help button which is located in the top right hand corner of each dialog box as shown in figure 1 19 Context sensitive help e Cancel button Figure 1 19 Help Button When this is clicked the mouse pointer will change to a pointer with a question mark above it Whilst the mouse pointer is in this state click on the part of the dialog box that you require assistance on Alternatively select the control that you require help for and then press the F1 key RENESAS 1 4 Launching the HEW To run the HEW open the Start menu of Windows select Programs select High performance Embedded Workshop and then select the shortcut of the High performance Embedded Workshop 2 By default the Welcome dialog box shown in figure 1 20 will be displayed Welcome 27 xi m Options i o ES Cancel 2 Open a recent project workspace Administration gt
234. he user system interface cable is not connected the read value is 1 due to pull up resistors In the emulator accesses to the following registers for controlling the flash memory are invalid e Flash code control status register FCCS H FE88 e Flash program code select register FPCS H FE89 e Flash erase code select register FECS H FE8A e Flash key code register FKEY H FE8C e Flash MAT select register FMATS H FE8D e Flash transfer destination address register FTDAR H FE8E Note The addresses indicate the lower 16 bits 8 2 3 Access to the Reserved Area When accessing the reserved area note the following If the reserved area is used the operation in the actual MCU cannot be guaranteed If the user program extends to the reserved area during debugging select the MCU having the largest ROM capacity 8 2 4 Using the On Chip RAM Area as External Addresses When the RAME bit in SYSCR is 0 the on chip RAM area can be used external addresses Note that however the only memory that can be accessed is User external not Emulator emulation memory In this case the On Chip Read write Internal RAM setting is applied for memory mapping 8 2 5 Support of Flash Memory This emulator does not emulate the flash memory in the MCU 8 2 6 Hardware Standby When the User Standby enable check box is selected in the Configuration window the STBY signal on the user system is directly input to the emulator When the
235. he value of variable i The value is 4 indicating that the break occurred after the condition had been satisfied five times Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help Remove the event point Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Event window displays a popup menu Select Remove All from this menu to remove all event points 324 RENESAS 6 16 Trace Functions The trace functions of the emulator use the realtime trace buffer which is able to store the information on up to 32 768 bus cycles The content of this buffer which is constantly updated during execution is displayed in the Trace window Select Trace from the Code submenu of the View menu to display the Trace window loxi PTR Address Instruction Data R W Area Status Clock Probes NMI IRQ7 0 Timestamp Source taves Figure 6 40 Trace Window When trace information is displayed in the Trace window clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information The following sections give an overview of the trace functions and methods for setting them 325 RENESAS 6 16 1 Displaying a Trace when Time Stamping is not Available The method used
236. hen a new project is being inserted the CPU family and tool chain cannot be specified as these properties are already defined by the workspace i e all projects within the same workspace target the same CPU family and toolchain Insert Project 2 xi Insert icy Existing project MA Browse Figure 2 23 Insert Project Dialog 32 RENESAS gt To insert an existing project into a workspace 1 Select Project gt Insert Project The Insert Project dialog will be displayed 2 Set the Existing Project option 3 Enter the full path of the project database file HWP file into the edit field or click Browse to search for it graphically 4 Click OK to insert the existing project into the workspace Note When an existing project is being inserted into a workspace the CPU family and tool chain upon which that project is based must match those of the current workspace If they do not then the project cannot be inserted into the workspace 2 11 Specifying Dependencies between Projects The projects within a workspace can be dependent upon one another so that when one project is built all its dependent projects are built first This is useful if another project uses one of the others in the workspace For example imagine that a workspace contains two projects The first project is a library that is included by an application project In this case the library must have be
237. hen the event occurs This is the default action Start Timer Starts the run timer the run timer value is displayed in the Status window Stop Timer Stops the run timer the run timer value is displayed in the Status window Delay after detection before break occurs Sets a 16 bit delay in bus cycles after the event has occurred before the action is taken The delay is only applicable to break events and there is only one delay counter in hardware therefore only one breakpoint can have a non zero delay The range of values is D 0 to D 65 535 only available when Break has been selected This cannot be used for an event point being used as the trace acquisition condition 239 RENESAS Required number of event occurrences Allows a 16 bit pass count to be set The event must occur the specified number of times before the action is taken The range of values is D 0 to D 65 535 Enable Sequencing Allows the event to take part in a sequence of events setting this requires the event to use an event detector Configure Sequence Displays the Event Sequencing dialog box to allow the event sequencing to be configured only available when Enable Sequencing has been selected 5 Event Sequencing dialog box This dialog box allows the user to define which events are triggered by other events If this dialog box is accessed directly or indirectly from Trace Acquisition only those events assig
238. hing Drives for Components In some cases it is useful to search a drive for HEW compatible components This is especially useful if the HEW installation was deleted or corrupted as it can recreate your tool information instantly To search for components 1 Click the Search Disk button on the Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 The Search Disk for Components dialog will be displayed figure 5 3 Search Disk for Components Select the directory in which to begin the search hew Browse IV Include subfolders Start Located components Component Version HRF Location Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Standard Toole 5 1 0 c hewT oolct Hitachi H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain c hew Toolch Register AII Hitachi H Series Librarian Interface 1 0 c hewST oolck Cygnus GNUPro SH v98r2 sc hew Toolck IAR ICCH8 Toolchain 1 23a c hewSToolck i eie Register w Search Status 5 file s found Figure 5 3 Search Disk for Components Dialog 2 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 3 Check the Include subfolders check box if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 4 Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to h
239. hown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Select the standard toolbar from the Toolbars list and then click the Reset button To show or hide toolbar tooltips 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Set the Show Tooltips check box as desired To modify the toolbar name of a toolbar created by a user 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 In the Toolbars list select a toolbar which has been created by a user and whose name you want to modify 3 Modify the name of the toolbar in the Toolbar name filed 95 RENESAS 6 2 Customizing the Tools Menu The Tools menu can be customized to include your own menu options gt To add a new menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 The first thing for you to decide is whether you are adding a global application wide tool Application wide tools which will be available to all of your workspaces Or whether you wish to add a workspace wide tool Workspace wide tool which is only valid for the current workspace Once you have made the choice choose the relevant section of the dialog Customize 2 xi Toolbars Commands Menu Debugger Log Help Application wide tools Name Version Modi Remove Workspace wide tools Nam
240. ial Value Color Change Indicator Change 7 Foreground as Background CI JV Mayfly Detail DETAIL NOT SUPPORTED Detail History Figure 6 70 Monitor Setting Dialog Box Setting Completed 345 RENESAS 3 Click the OK button to open the Monitor window monitor monitor1 HOOFFEFSO Address Ox00FFEFSO OxO0OFFEF88 Ox00FFEF90 Ox00FFEF98 Ox0OFFEFAO Ox00FFEFAS8 Ox00OFFEFBO OxOOFFEFB8 Ox00FFEFCO Ox00FFEFC8 Figure 6 71 Monitor Window 346 RENESAS 4 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu When the content of the address range changes with execution the updated values are red i e the color that was selected in the Foreground and Background combo boxes Values will be displayed in black if they have not been updated or a certain period of time has elapsed since the last update monitor Ox00FFEF80 Ox00FFEF88 Ox00FFEF90 Ox00OFFEF98 OxO0OFFEFAO Ox00OFFEFA8 Ox00OFFEFBO Ox00OFFEFB8 Ox00FFEFCO Ox00FFEFC8 Figure 6 72 Monitor Window during Execution 5 After you have finished checking the states in the Monitor window select Halt Program from the Debug menu to halt the program s execution 347 RENESAS 6 20 What Next This tutorial has described the major features of the emulator and the use of the HEW Sophisticated debugging can be carried out by using the emulation functions that the emulator o
241. ied Range Measurement Performance An Measurement Method PA1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement Range Name PA1 Range Start Address H 00000000 End Address H o0000000 m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 5 107 Time Of Specified Range Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Range The range for the Time Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Address to start measurement End Address Address to end measurement Measures the execution time and the execution count in the range between the start address and end address Starts measurement with a detected program prefetch in the range specified between the start and end addresses and then stops with a detected program prefetch out of the specified range Measurement can be restarted with a detected program prefetch in the specified range The execution count is incremented every time the program is prefetched at the end address of the specified range The execution time measured does not include the time spent while being called from the specified range 291 RENESAS 2 Start Point To End Point Measurement Performance An roperties Measurement Method PA1 Start Point To End Point Measurement Range Name PA1 Point Start Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 Time Out 00h COmin 00s O00ms O0
242. ied Range Measurement 0 0 0 0 cceeseeseeeececeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeaeenee 341 6 19 Monitor PUN ti Onis sss sev aaraa aaa trde OTSE Er Ea E OOTO TIERO TERENE ERS 344 6 20 What Next sisscstisseacianaudsssriaccaseavesrsorisbosusststassialacabacastarcons suavsszadheassprepassisicenssaeelcaness 348 Section 7 Hardware Specifications Specific to This Product 349 7 1 H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator Specifications ccecesescceeceseeseeneeeeceeceseeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaees 349 x 7 1 1 Supported MCU and User System Interface Cable oo cece eee eeeeeeeeeeee 349 7 1 2 Operating Voltage and Frequency Specifications ccceceeseeseeeeeeeeereeneeteeneees 349 ED USER System Interface neien areias ien EA EE E E AEN 350 T2 Signal ProtectiOm ss 3 csscisceccessssceaneisieicesspacseaeeaeoenvaeaaeeusvaveaaaviasdevasenaeuavsissceaateaaens 350 7 2 2 User System Interface CitCUits i ssssrissrsssrirssorisisirisnieri rassir easda rva 350 7 3 Differences between MCU and Emulator s sssssssesssesesseseseessesesesesssrsrsrsrsrsrnrnrnrnrseseresene 352 7 3 1 A D Converter and D A Converter ce cece eeesecesceseeeecsesseeetsesesseeeesesaeegs 352 Section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product 353 8 1 Software Specifications of the H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator cececeseseeeeeeeeeeneeneeeees 353 8 1 1 Target Hardware kisiri aii asir Ee SEEE ENEE ETA 353 8 1 2 gt Selectable Pl tforMes iraia ia e E EEA EEKE OEE o 353 8 1 3 Configurat
243. ied before command execution File path name Full path and name of file involved in operation Filename Filename including extension of file involved File leaf Filename excluding extension of file involved File extension Extension of file involved in operation File directory Directory of file involved in operation Configuration directory Current configuration directory Project directory Current project directory Workspace directory Current workspace directory Temp directory Temporary directory Command directory Version control executable directory Windows directory Directory where Windows is installed Windows system directory Directory where Windows system files exist Workspace name Current workspace name Project name Current project name Configuration name Current configuration name 8 3 1 Specifying File Locations When referring to a file s location be sure to use a placeholder otherwise the command will only relate to a hardwired file For example let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file The Arguments field could be specified as GET c vc files project main c However when executed this command can only ever get the file MAIN C To resolve this problem HEW uses a system of placeholders and directory mappings The latter tell the HEW which working directories i e where source files are being worked on map t
244. ile csreiessces cascevessiueactavesaccieevencdlassacavshbenedn EEEE NE SENKES ESEA 58 Usima the Editora a aeaaea 59 TheEditor WNdo Wherry i an E R A R A TE SAE VES 59 Working with Multiple Files cscssssssesscscsescssesscescssesesenesssessecsencenssasenesaeenssseenes 60 42 1 The Editor Toolbars n aeaa E Eea ear S EAAS Aa ARAT 60 4 2 2 Editor Toolbar Buttons i ccscsssesccssssesecerseacccstsuevecosavesestestesestestondecvsmotessosestestuenees 61 4 2 3 SearchsToolbar Buttons 3 5 ssseessseisess ceessoctd viscera tau e Gea Gate lialseotds 62 4 2 4 Bookmarks Toolbar Buttons cece eesecceecsececeesseseeeessesessenseeesaeteeseeaes 62 4 2 5 Templates Toolbar Buttons ec csesceeeceececceseeseesecseceeeeaeesecseeseceeeeeeeeeaeeaeenes 63 Standard File Operations cssecssssessescssssesceesensonsestsrccescenevasenessssscsesensenenatenaesesensanens 63 4 3 1 Creating a New File 63 4 3 2 Saving a File 63 4 3 3 Saving all Files 4 3 4 Opening a File 4 3 5 Closing Files Editing a Files c ccssccscissesssecassessavsssazeense 65 Searching and Navigating through Files 4 5 1 Finding Text 66 4 5 2 Finding Text in Multiple Files 67 4 5 3 Replacing Text 0 68 4 5 4 Jumping to a Specified Line 69 Bookmarks 70 Printing a File 70 Configuring Text Layout 71 4 8 1 Page Set up 71 4 8 2 Changing Tabs 4 8 3 Auto Indentation Splitting a Window 74 Configuring Text 0 0 eee 75
245. ile folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof When selecting the project or workspace folder then the system files will be added to the selected file list For example selecting the project folder will also add the project file to the file list If the project file is then checked out and the version is newer than when it was last loaded you will be asked whether you want to reload the project 2 Click the Add Files toolbar button ies or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Add Files menu option When you add files to Visual SourceSafe the local versions in your working directory will become read only To check that the add files operation was carried out as you expected or to quickly review the status of all of the files in a project 1 Select the poject folder whose files you want to check 2 Click the Status of Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Status of Files menu option 3 The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window The information shown includes whether the file is added to the project if the file is checked out and if it is checked out who did so 130 RENESAS 9 2 Visual SourceSafe Commands The following 8 operations are available e Add a file to version control e Remove a file from version control e Get a read only copy of a file or files e Check out a read write copy of a file or fi
246. ime Use the Monitor window to monitor the memory contents during user program execution In the Monitor function the realtime operation is retained since the bus monitoring circuit of the emulator sets the read write signal of the MCU as a trigger and holds the address bus and data bus values to update the displayed contents of the memory Up to eight points can be set by using the eight monitoring channels on the bus monitoring circuit 1 to 256 bytes can be monitored at one point It is possible that a part or all of monitoring ranges is overlapped Note Monitoring is impossible for an area such as an internal timer counter where no internal read write signal is generated to update a value 5 9 1 Opening the Monitor Window To open the Monitor window select View gt CPU gt Monitor gt Monitor Setting or click the Monitor toolbar button to display the Monitor Settings dialog box Monitor Setting 2 x Monitor Setting Name monitort m Options Address H OOFFEFAD Size byte Ha o Access Format fevTewsci M Auto Refresh at rate ms bp oos50 IV Reading the Initial Value r Color Change Indicator Change be Foreground i M Background C M IV Mayfly m Detail DETAIL NOT SUPPORTED Detail History Figure 5 32 Monitor Setting Dialog Box 203 RENESAS Name Decides the name of the monitor window Options Sets monito
247. in the selected event This mode uses one event channel or range channel 252 RENESAS e Event Acquires trace information controlling the start and end of trace acquisition with the specified condition Trace Acquisition 2 x General Stop Delayed Stop 1 2 3 4 r Conditions C Disabled Point to Point C Range Event Start Event Edit 7 E H 07E address v Stop Event Edit 8 E H 1084 address X M Cyclic Start Event Stop Event Edit Cyclic Figure 5 74 Range Trace Setting Event Selects the event point for which the condition to start trace acquisition has been set Selects the event point for which the condition to stop trace acquisition has been set Changes the setting for the selected event point When this box is checked the event sequencing is configured so that the events reset themselves which causes tracing to be restarted when the start event occurs after the stop event Starts and stops trace acquisition when the conditions for starting and ending are satisfied respectively Selecting Cyclic allows a continuous acquisition of trace information that can be acquired with the specified condition RENESAS 253 5 16 4 Searching for a Trace Record Use the Trace Find dialog box to search for a trace record To open this dialog box choose Find from the popup menu The Trace Find dialog box has the following options Ta
248. ing Enters a PTR value to end filtering Note Along with setting the range for filtering PTR values to start and end filtering can be set in the Start PTR and End PTR options respectively 266 RENESAS 2 Address page Set address conditions Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address l Data RAW Area T Don t care Setting Point Range From F Figure 5 85 Trace Filter Dialog Box Address Page Don t care Detects no address when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified address Point Specifies a single address not available when Don t care has been checked Range Specifies an address range not available when Don t care has been checked From Enter a single address or the start of the address range not available when Don t care has been checked To Enter a single address or the end of the address range only available when Range has been selected Note Along with setting the address range the start and end of the address range can be set in the From and To options respectively 267 RENESAS 3 Data page Set a data condition Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data Raw Area Point Range From F To Cancel Apply Figure 5 86 Trace Filter Dialog Box Data Page Don t care Detects no data when this box is checked Setting Detects
249. ing and Exporting a Set up Each workspace can have a different version control set up The HEW allows you to store the version control settings independently so that you can import them into other workspaces This greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to configure the same version control settings across several workspaces gt To export a version control set up 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Export button A standard file save dialog will be displayed Browse to the directory in which you would like to save the configuration 3 Enter the name of the file and then click OK 126 RENESAS gt To import a version control set up 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Import button A standard file open dialog will be displayed Browse to the HVC file which you would like to import 3 Select the file and then click OK 127 RENESAS 128 RENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe The High performance Embedded Workshop provides specific support for the Visual SourceSafe version control system At the time of writing the HEW can only attach to versions 5 and 6 of Visual SourceSafe The Visual SourceSafe version control system associates a project in your workspace with a project inside a Visual SourceSafe database It allows you to quickly invoke the st
250. ingle address to be selected Range Allows an address range to be selected Adderess Lo Set a single address or the start of an address range available when Address or Range has been selected Adderess Hi Set the end of an address range available when Range has been selected Outside Range Used to negate the range i e the event will occur when the address is outside the range This is available when Address or Range has been selected 235 RENESAS Data Compare Sets the data condition Compare Checking this box compares data Use Mask Sets a mask condition available when Compare has been selected Value Specifies the data bus value as numerics The size of data for access can also be selected available when Compare has been selected Byte Sets access in bytes as the condition available when Compare has been selected Word Sets access in words as the condition available when Compare has been selected Mask Sets a value to be masked This value will be ANDed with the value of the data bus and data condition The result will be used to compare data available when Use Mask has been selected Direction Selects a condition with read or write cycles Read Sets read cycles as the condition Write Sets write cycles as the condition Either Sets either read or write cycles as the condition 236 RENESAS 2 Bus Area page Use this page to set the
251. ins System Tools Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolch Hitachi Mapview 1 0 Hitachi H Series Librarian Interface a Hitachi Call Walker 1 0 Utility Phases Debugger Components Generic Label View ECX 1 0 Monitor platform 1 0 SH2CPU 1 0 Generic IO View ECX 1 0 SRecord object reader 1 0 i EA Fetensian Camnonents Cancel Register Unregister Properties Export Search disk Tool information z ha Uninstaller I Show all components Current HEW tools database location t Shew20eetwinidebug Modify 21x Figure 5 1 Tools Administration Dialog Example There are five standard types of component Toolchain a set of build phases e g compiler assembler and linker These components provide the build capability System Tool an application EXE which can be launched from the Tools menu They are often provided as extra applications which support the toolchain e g an external debugger like the HDI or an interactive graphical librarian Utility Phase a ready made build phase which supports some specific build functionality e g analyze complexity of source code count lines of source code etc These components provide added functionality to the build that is not toolchain specific Debugger Component a component that supports some specific debugger functionality e g Target platform Extension Component
252. ion Properties Dialog Box General Page eeeeceeseereeteeeeeeee 354 8 1 4 Configuration Properties Dialog Box Custom Page cseeeeseereeseeeeees 357 8 1 5 Memory Mapping Function 0 ceeecesessesseceseeseeseeeeceeceseeaeeaeceeceeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeae 359 SLG Status Window ss icssssesstcses xeexsakacaecsssizevegasa sauce SE EEEE ET Ee EREE ESEKIA To 359 8 1 7 Extended Monitor Function ccccccsesscccssssssessssssssssoosossnscsssssesosssssnsesssessassseees 361 8 1 8 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas cesesceseeseeeececceseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenee 362 8 1 9 Monitoring Function ci cssccsccaseecccsiesecaeevecccgassnsesgusrecccdesexsdaceeoscecisexsectesavscdensubectes 362 8 1 10 Trigger POMS raies rrenai irise iriran E EE A EEA 362 SLIL Trace Information ossaa anean aaa aaa EEE Aa ATE PEO eE ATEKA 363 8 1 12 Searching for a Trace Recordsissa 364 8 1 13 Trace Filtering Function ccscsssscssesecnssnsescsessetecnsenesesevscsasencenesatenenensessdzeanes 365 8 2 Notes on Usage of the H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator cceceecceseeeeeeeeeseeseeteeeeeeeeeseeaeenees 367 8 2 1 Environment for Execution of the Tutorial Program eee ects 367 8 2 2 I O Register Differences between the Actual MCU and the Emulator 367 8 2 3 Access to the Reserved Area ieee cscs eseeecsseecsecseeecsesseseseeessseseesaeteeseeaes 367 8 2 4 Using the On Chip RAM Area as External Addresses sccsc
253. ion are listed in table 8 1 Table 8 1 System Menu Option Option Description Add File s Add selected file s to version control system Remove File s Remove selected file s from version control system Get File s Get a read only local copy of the selected file s from version control system Check In File s Put back i e update the selected file s in version control system with the local copy Check Out File s Get a writable local copy of the selected file s from version control system Status of File s View the status of the selected file s gt To modify a system menu toolbar option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the option to be modified from the System menu options and toolbar buttons list and then click the Modify button The dialog shown in figure 8 3 will be displayed This figure shows a dialog when Add File s has been selected for example 3 Commands are added via the Add button See the section Defining Version Control Commands later in this chapter for further information 4 Close the Define Command for lt command gt dialog by clicking OK 5 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK 113 RENESAS Define Commands for Add File s Mody HEMOVE Move Up MGYE GoW Figure 8 3 Modify System Me
254. ion each entry defines an I O register The BaseAddress definition is for devices where the location of I O registers moves in the address space depending on the CPU mode In this case the BaseAddress value is the base address of the I O registers in one specific mode and the addresses used in the register definitions are the address locations of the registers in the same mode When the I O register file is actually used the BaseAddress value is subtracted from the defined register address and the resultant offset added to the relevant base address for the selected mode The Register definition entry is entered in the format lt name gt lt address gt lt size gt lt absolute gt 1 lt name gt register name to be displayed 2 lt address gt address of the register 3 lt size gt which may be B W or L for byte word or longword default is byte 4 lt absolute gt which can be set to A if the register is at an absolute address This is only relevant if the I O area address range moves about on the CPU in different modes In this case if a register is defined as absolute the base address offset calculation is not performed and the specified address is used directly Comment lines are allowed and must start with a character An example is shown below 379 RENESAS Example H8S 2655 Series I O Register Definitions File Modules BaseAddress 0 Module Module1 Power_Down_Mode_Registers definition Module
255. ion et aiietotot stetetotetoteteteter OK RESERVED Subroutine Count Measurement OK Timeout Function TIMOT Bit OK Timeout Function TIMOP Bit OK RENESAS Shows the check results for the forced break controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the illegal access break controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the internal ROM write protection controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the hardware break control circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the trace controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the run time counter in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the emulation monitor controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for analysis controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion 397 17 A B C D 18 A B c D E F G H I J K L 19 A B G D E 20 A B C D E Test Bus Monitor REGUS ae E EEEE E E E E EEE E E E EEEE OK Parallel RAM aisha oh i ohhh Gi ACCC n Enn Enine OK SPRSEL2 2 38 y SAIN RMAR AIHA POH I HIT IIR V IIIA g OK RAM MONTE OES sercoececeeveveerererevaveveveverereretetetetetetetetetet OK Test Parallel Access Internal ROM
256. ious processes e g build version control commands and so on 1 2 1 The Title Bar The title bar displays the name of the currently open workspace project and file It also contains the standard minimize maximize and close buttons Click the minimize button to minimize the HEW on the windows start bar Click the maximize button to force HEW to fill the screen Click the close button to close the HEW this has the same effect as selecting File gt Exit or pressing ALT F4 1 2 2 The Menu Bar The menu bar contains nine menus File Edit View Project Options Build Tools Window and Help All of the menu options are grouped logically under these headings For instance if you wanted to open a file then the file menu is where you will find the right menu option if you wanted to set up a tool then the tools menu is the correct selection The following sections will cover the functions of the various menu options as they become relevant However at this stage it is worth taking a few moments to familiarize yourself with the options that each menu provides RENESAS 123 The Toolbars The toolbars provide a shortcut to the options which you will use the most often There are eight default toolbars Bookmarks Debug Debug Run Editor Search Standard Templates and Version Control as shown in figure 1 3 to 1 10 Toolbars can be created modified and removed via the Tools gt Customize menu option see chapter 5 Customizing
257. ircuits ccc ceceecceceseeseeseeececeeceeceeeeseeseeaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaes 2 6 3 Clock Oscillator x 2 6 4 External Probe 1 EXT1 Trigger Output ec eeeseeeceeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenee 2 6 5 External Probe 2 EXT2 Trigger Output cc eccseseecceeceseeseeeeceeceeeereeaeeaeenee 2 6 6 Voltage Follower Citcuiitiss cscsccsssscecccessesecsgusvesccutsvscccdeseuecesivenesconseuscesavuneeseutested DEPP System CHECK 325564 dices as chloe ou sede A TNE nested Nace penceaa ae E T EEA 2 8 Communication Problems iesi pra esaa EER EEE AEEA ERN 2 9 Other Methods for Activating the Emulator s s sseseseeeseessesestseseestsrsrtsteteresesstsrssrseseeees 2 10 Uninstalling the Emulator s Software eseeeeeeeseeseeeseseeestsresesesresrssssrststeresseseseerrsestees Section 3 E6000 Emulator Functions esesesseseeeeessesrrereersresresrrrrsesrrsreersresreee 151 3 1 Debugging Features eee we 151 3 1 1 Breakpoints 151 eP E t E RE E E R A A E T 151 3 1 3 Execution Time Measurement eee ccecseescescseeeceesesesseeeesesaeeeeseseeseeaees 151 3 14 Perforimatice Analysis ssi hiess ienie au cveceddaveusdaceveciscendeng cavevnoucenttenede 151 3 1 5 Bus Monitoring espeut EEEE E R R 152 vi 3 2 Complex Event System CHS icccececavetsdiesses ds cvat cise stecd dacvatcdaveescecdhccncg av evece gassed avevecees 152 3 2 Event Chantel csives si ivicccssseavecasivevesmsuvesesssveevesi a 152 3 2 2 Range Channel ss ics ccss
258. is acquired Trace Filter xj General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes IRQ7 0 IRQ Dontcare Ings Dontcare z IRQS Don t care IRQ4 Don t care IRG3 Don t care IRG2 Don t care IRQ1 Don t care IRQO Dont care 7 ddd Cancel Apply Figure 5 82 Trace Find Dialog Box IRQ7 0 Page Don t care Detects no IRQ input condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified IRQ input condition IRQ7 to IRQ0 Select IRQ input conditions not available when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected IRQ input condition High The status of the IRQ input is high Low The status of the IRQ input is low 262 RENESAS 9 Timestamp page Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles The specification is not available when a time stamp is acquired CM x General Address Data RAW Timestamp Setting Value Sy h iz min m us ns Cancel Apply Figure 5 83 Trace Find Dialog Box Timestamp Page Don t care Detects no time stamp value when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified time stamp value Value Enter the time stamp value The format is as follows hour h minute min second s millisecond ms microsecond us nanosecond ns Not available when Don t care has been checked 5 16 5 Clearing the Trace Information Select Clear from the popup menu
259. is chapter details the various functions that the Build Phases dialog provides Build Phases MISH C C Library Generator MISH C C Compiler MSH Assembler OptLinker HEMOVE Weve Up Figure 3 2 Build Phases Dialog 38 RENESAS 3 2 Creating a Custom Build Phase If you want to execute another tool before during or after a standard build process then this can be achieved by creating your own i e custom build phase Select Options gt Build Phases to invoke the Build Phases dialog figure 3 2 and then click the Add button This will invoke the new build phase wizard dialog figure 3 3a The first step as shown in figure 3 3a asks whether you want to create an entirely new phase or whether you want to add a system phase A system phase is a ready made phase which is already defined within the toolchain you are using e g compiler assembler linker librarian etc or a utility phase e g file copy complexity analyzer etc The Add an existing system phase button is inactive if no more system phases are available Select the Create a new custom phase button to create your own build phase New Build Phase Step 1 of 4 hace ase Figure 3 3a New Build Phase Dialog Step 1 39 RENESAS The second step figure 3 3b asks what type of phase you would like to create There are two choices multiple or single When a multiple phase is exe
260. isabled an access to this area is not available during the user program execution Note When the content of the memory is modified during the user program execution e g modification in the Memory window or by the MEMORY_EDIT command HEW reads the content to update the value HEW also reads the memory content when the content has been updated by operations such as selecting Memory gt Refresh In this case the content of memory is read and then updated in each of the windows To prevent unnecessary reading of the memory content close the window displaying the memory content such as the Memory or Disassembly window or make the settings so that the content will not be updated The Monitor window or the Watch window that satisfies the conditions listed below displays the memory content Note that however opening these windows does not prevent realtime operation because the method of updating the memory content in these windows is different Conditions 1 Registered symbols are only allocated to general purpose registers 2 Registered symbols are only allocated to the monitor range set by the Monitor function the mark R is colored in blue 3 Registered symbols are comprised of those with the conditions 1 and 2 listed above 355 RENESAS General page cont Break on access error When this box is checked a break the user program stops occurs if your program accesses an
261. isplays the custom phase details This allows you to decide whether the phase does the functionality you require 4 Once you have decided which phase to import highlight it in the list and then click OK The phase will then be added to the build phases dialog at the bottom of the build order 44 RENESAS gt To modify a custom phase 1 Select the custom phase that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The modify phase dialog will be invoked with the Command tab selected figure 3 7 3 Change the contents of the fields as appropriate 4 Set the Don t check for input file s existence before executing check box if you don t want the HEW to abort the execution of the phase if any of the input files don t exist Modify MyPhase 21x Command Environment Command excluding parameters C tools mptool exe gt Browse Initial directory S CONFIGDIR gt Browse D Don t check for input file s existence before executing I Read Output On Fly Figure 3 7 Modify Phase Dialog Command Tab 5 Select the Environment tab figure 3 8 to edit the environment settings for the phase 6 Use the Add Modify and Remove buttons to add modify and remove environment variables The operation is the same as discussed in the previous section 7 Click OK when all modifications have been made Modify MyPhase 2 xi Command Enviro
262. ition of the event channel 8 is satisfied 2 6 5 External Probe 2 EXT2 Trigger Output A 6 pin connector marked EXT2 on the left under the user system interface cable connector on the emulator case accommodates four trigger outputs The pin assignment of this connector is shown in figure 2 9 OO0000 EXT2 1234 Trigger output Figure 2 9 External Probe 2 Connector The trigger output is an active high signal which is output during the read or write cycles when a trace condition 1 to 4 of the bus monitor function is satisfied The trigger output is available as user V_ level Note that however some products do not support the external probe 2 EXT2 144 RENESAS 2 6 6 Voltage Follower Circuit CAUTION 1 Do not connect the user system interface cable to the emulator without user system connection 2 Turn on the user system before starting up the emulator A voltage follower circuit is implemented on the emulator which allows the user system voltage level from the user system to be monitored This monitored voltage level is automatically supplied to the logic on the emulator and is derived from the emulator power supply unit This means that no power is taken from the user system board If no user system interface cable is connected to the emulator the emulator will operate at a specified voltage and all clock frequencies will be available to the user If the user system interface cable is attached
263. kefiles which have been user modified gt To execute a makefile 1 Open a command window and change to the make directory where the makefile was generated 2 Execute HMAKE Its command line is HMAKE EXE lt makefile gt Note The degree portability of a generated makefile is entirely dependent upon how portable the project itself is For example any compiler options which include full paths to an output directory or include file directory will mean that when given to another user with a different installation the build will probably fail In general use placeholders wherever possible using a full specific path should be avoided when possible 58 RENESAS 4 Using the Editor This chapter describes how to use the editor that is provided with the High performance Embedded Workshop 4 1 The Editor Window The editor window figure 4 1 contains the file windows that are being viewed or edited Only one window is active at anytime This window is called the active window or current window and its title bar will appear a different color from that of the others dbsct c is the active window in figure 4 1 All text operations such as typing pasting text and so forth only affect the active window To switch to another source file window i e to make some other window the active window there are a number of methods e Click on it if it is visible e Press CTRL TAB to cycle through the windows one after another e Se
264. keys and press the gt key The module display will expand to show the individual registers of that peripheral module and their names addresses and values Clicking the mark at the left of the expanded module name or pressing the lt key will close the I O register display For a display in the bit level click the mark at the left of the register name or select the register name by clicking on it or using the cursor keys and press the gt key The register display will expand to show the names of register bits and values Clicking the mark at the left of the expanded register name will close the register bits display 199 RENESAS 5 6 3 Modifying the I O Register Contents To edit the value in an I O register double click or press the Enter key on the register to open a dialog box to modify the register contents When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 5 7 Viewing the Current Status Choose View gt CPU gt Status or click the View Status toolbar button to open the Status window and see the current status of the debugging platform 00000000 OOO1LFFFF Internal OOFFBOOO OOFFEFBF Internal RAM OOFFFS800 OOFFFF3F Internal IO OOFFFF60 OOFFFFBF Internal IO OOFFFFCO OOFFFFFF Internal RAM System Memory Resources SIMM Module 1MB SIMM fitted Ram Ba
265. l Figure 4 14 Debug Settings Dialog Box Options Page The command chain that is automatically executed at the specified timing is registered The following three timings are available e At connecting the emulator e Immediately before downloading e Immediately after downloading Specify the timing for executing the command chain in the Command batch file load timing combo box In addition register the command chain file that is executed at the specified timing in the Command Line Batch Processing list box 167 RENESAS 4 4 Debugger Sessions The HEW stores all of your builder options into a configuration In a similar way the HEW stores your debugger options in a session The debugging platforms the programs to be downloaded and each target platform s options can be stored in a session Sessions are not directly related to a configuration This means that multiple sessions can share the same download module and avoid unnecessary program rebuilds Each session s data should be stored in a separate file in the HEW project Debugger sessions are described in detail below 4 4 1 Selecting a Session The current session can be selected in the following two ways e From the toolbar Select a session from the combo box figure 4 15 in the toolbar ex pes o al A a Figure 4 15 Toolbar Selection e From the dialog box 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions This will open the Debug S
266. l a 1 Figure 5 6 Source Window I inx In this window the following items are shown on the left as information on lines e First column Source address column Displays the address information for the source line e Second column Event column Event information break e Third column EXT 2 Trigger column EXT 2 Trigger information e Fourth column Editor column PC bookmark and breakpoint information The Editor window is displayed in the right part of the Source window 182 RENESAS Source address column When a program is downloaded an address for the current source file is displayed on the Source address column These addresses are helpful when setting the PC value or a breakpoint Event column The Event column displays the following items Address condition break by an event or a range channel amp Starts time measurement by an event channel Ends time measurement by an event channel Starts a point to point range trace Ends a point to point range trace B Halts trace These are also set by using the popup menu EXT 2 Trigger column The EXT 2 Trigger column displays the following items ha EXT 2 1 trigger condition tm EXT 2 2 trigger condition ha EXT 2 3 trigger condition hs EXT 2 4 trigger condition H Two or more EXT 2 trigger conditions It is also possible to set them by using the popup menu Editor column Editor column displays the following items BG A bookmark is set
267. last line displays the command line previously executed 5 3 2 Specifying a Command File It is useful to use a command file when a series of predefined command lines need to be executed Create a command file by a text editor and write necessary command lines The default extension of a command file is hde Choose Set Batch File from the popup menu to open the Set Batch File dialog box in which the name of a command file hdc can be specified Clicking the OK button displays the specified command file name as the window title Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without changing the setting Set Batch File 2 xi Batch File Play e I gt Browse a Cancel Figure 5 12 Set Batch File Dialog Box 187 RENESAS 5 3 3 Executing a Command File Click the Play button in the Set Batch File dialog box or choose Play from the popup menu to execute the command file The Play menu is displayed in gray while the file is running and can be used when the command file execution stops and control returns to the user 5 3 4 Stopping Command Execution Choose Stop from the popup menu to stop command execution The Stop menu becomes valid during command execution 5 3 5 Specifying a Log File Choose Set Log File from the popup menu to open the Open Log File dialog box in which a log file to store the command execution results can be specified Open Log File Log File Doo M
268. lect Delete All from this menu to remove all the event points that have been set Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information To disable time stamping select Disabled in the Clock combo box of the Time Stamp group box on the General page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box 6 16 3 Statistics The number of times the on chip RAM has been written to can be included in the acquired trace information a 2 3 Make the setting such that a break occurs at the address on the line that has p_sam gt sO0 a 0 within the tutorial function H 00001082 in this example for details on this refer to section 6 15 1 PC Break Function Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays trace information Select Statistic from the popup menu that is displayed when you click the right hand mouse button on the Trace window A message box appears indicating that the trace data is being loaded and the Statistic dialog box will be displayed Statist IC m Statistic Analysis Result Condition Amount PTR Figure 6 54 Statistic Dialog Box 335 RENESAS 4 Select R W in the Item combo box and enter WR in the Start edit box After that click the New button R W WR is
269. lect the window by name from the Window menu e Select its tab at the bottom of the editor window When a file has been edited an asterisk is appended to the window s title bar The asterisk remains there until the file is saved The asterisk is also removed if all of the edited changes are undone in the current window L KEKE KEKE JE JE JE JE JE KKK KKK JE JE JE JE KKK JE JE JE JE KKH KKK JE JE JE JE JE JE JE KKK KEE KEKE JE JE JE JE JE ME E E E E FILE dbsct c DATE Thu Aug 16 2001 DESCRIPTION Setting of B R Section z CPU TYPE 5H7020 This file is generated by Hitachi Project Generator Ver 2 1 FEFEFE E E JE FE JEJE E JE JE E JE JE E JE JE E JE JE E JE IA JE JE E JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE E JE JE E JE JE FE JE JE JEJEJE AHA pragma section DSEC static const struct char rom_s Start address of the initialized data se char rom_e End address of the initialized data sect char ram_s Start address of the initialized data se DTBL ha gt soe tesetprg c gt dbscte fe Figure 4 1 Editor Window 59 RENESAS 4 2 Working with Multiple Files The file area is where you will work with the files of your project The editor allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them in different configurations and to edit them in whichever order you want to The operations that
270. led the following message box will be displayed High performance Embedded Workshop j o xj Tutorial A Tool Chain Hitachi H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain version xx xx is missing From the Following project s there is no compatible toolchain available Figure 2 14 Message Box 6 The E6000 Driver Details dialog box is displayed This dialog box is only displayed at the first initiation When only one of interface drivers is selected this dialog box is not displayed E6000 Driver Details Driver Emulator PCI Card Driver 7 m Details Interface PCI be Channel Emulator PCI Card Interface ul Gontieuration Configure I Change driver in start up Figure 2 15 E6000 Driver Details Dialog Box e In the Driver combo box select the driver to connect the emulator e Interface displays the name of the interface to be connected e Click the Close button 148 RENESAS 7 Set up the emulator During this process the following dialog box is displayed Connecting Attempting to connect the emulator The driver program has been initialized Emulator PCI Card Driver Starting to transfer a firmware file J Change driver in start up Close Figure 2 16 Connecting Dialog Box 8 When Connected is displayed in the Output window of the HEW the emulator initiation is completed 5 Tutorial High performance Embedded Worksh
271. les i e for editing e Check in a previously checked out file or files i e update Visual SourceSafe with the edits made e Undo a previously check out operation on a file or files i e cancel any edits made e View the status of a file e View the history of a file These commands can only be accessed via the Tools gt Version Control sub menu whereas all of the other commands can be accessed from both the toolbar and menu 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control Although files appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them gt To remove a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to remove from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Remove Files toolbar button ids or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Remove Files menu option 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time However it is possible for any user to obtain a read only copy of any file gt To get a read only copy of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to get from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a
272. les is sym When the symbol loading is complete a confirmation message box may be displayed showing how many symbols have been loaded this can be switched off in the Confirmation sheet on the HEW Options dialog box 5 10 7 Saving Labels into a File Choose Save As from the popup menu to open the Save Symbols dialog box The Save Symbols dialog box operates like a standard Windows Save File As dialog box Enter the name for the file in the File name field and click Save to save the HEW s current label list to a symbol file The standard file extension for symbol files is sym See appendix E Symbol File Format for the symbol file format Once a file is specified by the Save As menu the current symbol table can be saved in the same symbol file just by choosing Save from the popup menu 5 10 8 Searching for a Label Choose Find from the popup menu to open the Find Label dialog box Find Label 29 x I Match Case Po Cancel Figure 5 42 Find Label Dialog Box 211 RENESAS Enter all or part of the label name that you wish to find into the edit box and click OK or press the Enter key The HEW searches the label list for a label name containing the text that you entered Note Only the label is stored by 1024 characters of the start therefore the label name must not overlap mutually in 1024 characters or less Labels are case sensitive 5 10 9 Searching for the N
273. lumns Each column can refer to a different component s capability In figure 1 16 the editor is displayed with the debugger address column and the standard column The standard column allows the user to configure the position of bookmarks and software breakpoints quickly and easily Aes fea Co A A A R R R R R R AR R R R R R R R R R R R E R RRE R 7 FILE isbrk c DATE Thu Aug 16 2001 DESCRIPTION Program of sbrk CPU TYPE 2SH7020 This file is generated by Hitachi Project Generator Ver 2 1 Z R kk tinclude lt stddef h gt tinclude lt stdio h gt tinclude sbrk h extern char _sliptr extern void srand unsigned int static union long dummy 3 Dummy for 4 byte boundary af char heap HEAPSIZE Declaration of the area managed fe by sbrk heap_area static char brk char amp heap_area End address of area assigned af RR AA RR AR A A A RR RR EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE R gt E resetprg c Figure 1 16 Editor Window RENESAS The editor window can be customized via the Format Views dialog box which can be invoked via the Tools gt Format Views menu option This dialog allows you to configure fonts colors tabs and so on for the editor window It also allows the user to change the look of other views which have been installed by HEW If you would prefer to use your favorite editor rather than the HEW internal editor then specif
274. ly available when a time stamp is acquired The IRQ page is specific to this emulator The description is given below IRQ page Select the status of IRQ signals IRQO to IRQ7 or IRQ8 to IRQ15 are applied when IRQ7 IRQO or IRQ15 IRQ8 has been selected in Trace on the General page of the Configuration Properties dialog box respectively The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired x General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes IRQ r Setting ina Don t care IRQ Don t care IRQS Don t care z IRO4 Don t care IRG3 Dont care ing2 Dont care gt IRQ Don t care z IRQO Dont care Figure 8 3 Trace Find Dialog Box IRQ Page 364 RENESAS Don t care Setting Detects no IRQ input condition when this box is checked Detects the specified IRQ input condition IRQ7 to IRQO or IRQ15 to IRQ8 Select IRQ input conditions When IRQ7 IRQO is selected as the Trace option The status of IRQ7 to IRQO from the left respectively can be selected When IRQ1I5 IRQ 8 is selected as the Trace option The status of IRQI5 to IRQ8 from the left respectively can be selected Selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Don t care Detects no selected IRQ input condition High The status of the IRQ input is high Low The status of the IRQ input is low 8 1 13 Trace Filtering Function While usi
275. mand require any environment variables to be set If so enter them into the list below Madi Remove I Read Output On Fly lt Back Finish Cancel Figure 3 3e New Build Phase Dialog Step 4 To add a new environment variable click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 3 4 will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field and the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the list of the fourth step To modify an environment variables select the variable in the list and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable to the list To remove environment variables select the variable that you want to remove from the list and then click the Remove button Environment Yariable 2 xi Variable a Value Placeholder c dos c mptools c windows c temp popup menu Figure 3 4 Environment Variable Dialog If the tool you are adding can display its output as the tool is running then use the Read Output On Fly option This will display the tool output as each line of output happens If this option is set to off then the HEW will store all output which is being displayed by the tool and display it in the output window when the tool has finished its operation This can be a p
276. map file Linkage symbol file HEW Sample Text BGG Madi emare Figure 4 10 Format Views Dialog Font Tab 75 RENESAS 4 11 Syntax Coloring To enhance code readability the HEW editor can display specific strings i e keywords in different colors For instance C source code comments could be shown in green and C types e g int could be shown in blue The coloring method used can be specified on a file group by file group basis For example you can define different color schemes for a C source files text files map files or even your own files gt To change existing colors 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the item underneath the icon in the tree you wish to modify the colour for This should be the file type e g C source file and correct keyword group e g identifier or pre processor 3 Select the Colour tab Modify the Foreground and Background color lists as desired The color System refers to the current window foreground and background settings in control panel 5 Click OK for the new colors to take effect gt To create new keyword groups 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the file type in the tree to which you wish to add the new keyword group 3 Click Add underneath the tree The Add Category dialog box will be displayed
277. mory Save memory Fill memory Test memory Delete All Labels Delete Label Loading Labels coe Figure 6 16 Confirmation Page for Optional Dialog Boxes 106 RENESAS 7 Version Control The High performance Embedded Workshop provides facilities for connecting to a version control tool Some of the reasons why version control tools are used with a project are e To maintain the integrity of a project e To store each stage of a project e To enable different users to co develop a project by controlling revisions to its source files Figure 7 1 illustrates a typical project where a version control system is in use This shows three users who all use the same shared network drive to exchange source code The version control system provides access and updates to the source files NETWORK Figure 7 1 Version Control 107 RENESAS 7 1 Selecting a Version Control System Initially the version control sub menu will appear as shown in figure 7 2 At this time only the Version Control gt Select option is available because a version control system is not yet active for the current workspace i Window Help Administration gt i D F Bhange licolchan Version ji Version Control Select Customize Eo
278. move a project from a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu 2 Select the Remove Project option or 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Press the DEL key Note You cannot remove the current project from the workspace 2 13 Loading Unloading a Project to from a Workspace gt To load a project to a workspace 1 Select the project that has been unloaded from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu and select the Load Project option To unload a project from a workspace 1 Select the active project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu and select the Unload Project option Note It is possible to select several projects at the same time and load or unload all of them This is more efficient than loading or unloading each of the projects individually 34 RENESAS 2 14 Relative Projects Paths in the Workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop when you add a project to the workspace you can choose to add the project to the workspace using a relative path This allows you to position a project above the workspace directory and it will still be relocated correctly if you relocate the HEW workspace The project is always
279. mulator to a user system adjust the user system to compensate for propagation delays The following diagrams show the equivalent circuit examples of the interface signals The interface circuits depend on the MCU type For details refer to section 7 Hardware Specifications Specific to This Product 2 6 3 Clock Oscillator The oscillator circuit has been implemented on the user system interface cable head For details on the oscillator circuit refer to the user s manual for each user system interface cable 2 6 4 External Probe 1 EXT1 Trigger Output An 8 pin connector marked EXT1 on the right under the user system interface cable connector on the emulator case accommodates four external probe inputs and two trigger outputs The pin assignment of this connector is shown in figure 2 7 OQOQOOQOO0O0OO Ext GND GND a Tuvec T5v Probe Trigger output Figure 2 7 External Probe Connector 1 143 RENESAS The interface circuit for the external probe is shown in figure 2 8 Vcc 10 kQ O External probe 1 2 3 4 HD151015 Figure 2 8 Interface Circuit for External Probe 1 222 The trigger output is controlled by event channel 8 and is an active low signal The trigger output is available as either T5V within the range from 2 5 V to 5 V does not depend on the user Vc level or TUV the user Voe level The trigger output is an active low signal which is output during 1 bus cycle when a cond
280. n hrf c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH451 O sample c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O include c Shew T oolchains Hitachi SH 451 OMib c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH 451 O bin c ShewT oalchains Hitachi SH 451 O hew c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin dwicny exe c ShewST oolchains Hitachi SH451 O bin shc exe c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH451 O bin shcasm exe c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH451 O bin shcerr msq c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin shcerr off c ShewST oolchains Hitachi SH451 O bin sheftt exe c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin shcgen exe c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin shchip msg c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH 451 O bin shemdl exe c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin shcpep exe Are you sure you want to delete the above files and folders Figure 5 10 Confirmation Dialog 90 RENESAS 5 7 Technical Support Issues The Tools Administration dialog is also capable of displaying information regarding hidden system components These are part of the HEW itself that cannot be unregistered registered manually If you check the Show all components check box on the tools administration dialog extra component folders are displayed see figure 5 11 Tools Administration aixi Registered components Component Cancel System Tools E Utility Phases Debugger Components Register Extension Components 3 Project Generators S Hitachi SH Proj
281. n Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be modified from the User menu options list and then click the Modify button beside the list The dialog shown in figure 8 4 will be displayed The title of the dialog is Modify Menu Option 3 Modify the commands as necessary and then click OK 4 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK gt To change the ordering of version control menu options 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be moved and then click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK 116 RENESAS 8 2 Defining Version Control Commands Commands are defined when the Add or Modify buttons are clicked on the dialogs shown in figure 8 3 and figure 8 4 In either case the dialog shown in figure 8 5 is invoked Add Command 2 xi Command Version control executable Jv WSS WIN32 Ss exe Browse Arguments Histo CDIR FILENAME Y USERNAME PASS gt Initial directory SiFILEDIF D Browse Executable return code ifs Return code of executable is not meaningful Command has failed if the return code is N ot Equal To a p Figure 8 5 Add Modify Command Dialog
282. n Properties dialog box When IRQ7 IRQO is selected as the Trace option The status of IRQ7 to IRQO is shown from the left respectively When IRQ15 IRQ8 is selected as the Trace option The status of IRQ15 to IRQ8 is shown from the left respectively This item is not available when a time stamp is acquired Timestamp Time stamp of the record Time stamps start from zero each time the user program is executed The timer resolution depends on the time stamp clock rate selected in the trace acquisition only available when a time stamp is acquired Source Source program Label Label information for the address if defined 363 RENESAS 8 1 12 Searching for a Trace Record While using the emulator the Trace Find dialog box has the following pages Table 8 9 Trace Find Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Sets the range for searching Address Sets an address condition Data Sets a data condition R W Selects the type of access cycles Area Selects the area being accessed not available when a time stamp is acquired Status Selects the status of a bus not available when a time stamp is acquired Probes Selects the status of four probe signals not available when a time stamp is acquired IRQ Selects the status of IRQ input signals not available when a time stamp is acquired Timestamp Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles on
283. n at any time without notice Target User of the Emulator Product This emulator product should only be used by those who have carefully read and thoroughly understood the information and restrictions contained in the user s manual Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism It is highly recommended that first time users be instructed by users that are well versed in the operation of the emulator product ENESAS LIMITED WARRANTY Renesas warrants its emulator products to be manufactured in accordance with published specifications and free from defects in material and or workmanship Renesas at its option will repair or replace any emulator products returned intact to the factory transportation charges prepaid which Renesas upon inspection determine to be defective in material and or workmanship The foregoing shall constitute the sole remedy for any breach of Renesas warranty See the Renesas warranty booklet for details on the warranty period This warranty extends only to you the original Purchaser It is not transferable to anyone who subsequently purchases the emulator product from you Renesas is not liable for any claim made by a third party or made by you for a third party DISCLAIMER RENESAS MAKES NO WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS F
284. n figure 6 2 will be displayed 3 Enter the name of the new toolbar into the Toolbar name field 4 Click OK to create the new toolbar New Toolbar MyToolbal Figure 6 2 New Toolbar Dialog 93 RENESAS When a new toolbar is created it will appear undocked i e floating and empty gt To add buttons to a toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Commands tab see figure 6 3 2 Browse the available buttons by selecting the button categories from the Categories list Select a button from the Buttons area to display information on its operation 3 Click and drag a button from the dialog onto the toolbar f Customize Figure 6 3 Customize Dialog Commands Tab 94 RENESAS To remove buttons from a toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Commands tab see figure 6 3 2 Click and drag a button from the toolbar onto the Buttons area To remove a user defined toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Select the user defined toolbar from the Toolbars list and the Reset button in figure 6 1 changes to the Delete button Then click the Delete button To reset a standard toolbar back to its original state 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog s
285. n the Halt toolbar button 2 The Go To Cursor feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work 213 RENESAS 5 11 4 Running from a Specified Address The Run Program dialog box allows the user to run the program from any address Choose Debug gt Run to open the Run Program dialog box 21x Run Program Program Counter JHooooo000 Temporary PC Breakpoints Reset Go ik Cancel Figure 5 43 Run Program Dialog Box The following execution conditions can be specified in this dialog box Program Counter Instruction address to start execution The initial value is the current PC value Temporary PC Breakpoints A temporary PC breakpoint When execution started by this dialog box stops this breakpoint is cleared Note The Temporary PC Breakpoints feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work Clicking the Go button starts execution according to the settings Clicking the Reset Go button starts execution from the reset vector Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without executing instructions 214 RENESAS 5 11 5 Single Step To debug your code it is very useful to be able to step a single line or instruction at a time and examine the effect of that instruction on the system In the Source window then a step operation will st
286. nd Range Measurement Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement or Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement because two sequential points are used for setting a condition in these modes 287 RENESAS Table 5 8 Mode Settings for Measurement Point Page 1 2 3 6 Time Of Specified Range o o 0 Oo Oo oO 0 Oo Measurement Start Point To End Point o o o o o oO 0 Oo Measurement Start Range To End o 2i o o 2 o Range Measurement Access Count Of o _ o o o a Specified Range Measurement Called Count Of o o o o Specified Range Measurement Note O Available Not available Note Only one point is used in Time Of Specified Range Measurement and Start Point To End Point Measurement while two sequential points are used in Start Range To End Range Measurement Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement and Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement The conditions that have been set will be canceled when switching these modes of different types 288 RENESAS 5 20 1 Opening the Performance Analysis Window Choose View gt Performance gt Performance Analysis or click the PA toolbar button E to open the Select Performance Analysis Type dialog box Performance Analysis E6000 Performance Analysis Figure 5 104 Select Performance Analysis Type Window Select E6000 Performance Analysis and then click the OK button to open the Performance Analysis window
287. ned to the trace subsystem are displayed If accessed from the Eventpoint window only the breakpoint or timer events are shown Is Aimed By J No occurrence of Is Reset By The following events Cancel F 1 E W088 address P 2 E H 105C address count D 10 P 3 E H 10F6 address count D 2 I 4 E H 10FC address F undefined or unavailable F undefined or ur J undefined orur F undefined or ur Figure 5 64 Event Sequencing Dialog Box Event Selects an event point to be set Is Armed By Arms the selected event Is Reset By Resets the selected event No occurrence of Arms an event when the set of events being selected does not occur only available when Is Armed By has been selected The test of conditions on event points is started with the execution of the user program The conditions on event points have not been satisfied immediately after the execution of the user program is started Satisfaction of the condition on an event point allows a transition of the state to that where the condition is satisfied 240 RENESAS The state where the condition is satisfied is retained until the user program is stopped or the event point is reset When the condition on the event point is satisfied no action will be taken even if the condition is satisfied again If you want the action to be taken again reset the event point so that the state transits to that where no condition is satisfied
288. ng IV Enable auto indentation Tab size 4 General IV Save files before executing any tools I Show files in notebook I Prompt before saving files IV Enable syntax coloring r External editor T Use external editor FO th clity Cancel Figure 6 11 Options Dialog Editor Tab 102 RENESAS 2 Check the Use external editor check box The External Editor dialog will be displayed figure 6 12 External Editor 2 xi Command CAwindows Notepad exe Browse OK Arguments to open file Cancel S1FULLFILE gt Arguments to open file at line S FULLFILE gt Figure 6 12 External Editor Dialog 3 Enter the path of the executable without any arguments into the Command field 4 Enter the arguments required to open a file into the Arguments to open file field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened 5 Enter the arguments required to open a file at a specific line into the Arguments to open file at line field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened and the LINE placeholder to represent the line number at which the cursor should be initially positioned 6 Click OK to define the editor Note When using an external editor be aware of the following issues e Each time you invoke the external editor in whichever way a separate instance of the editor
289. ng for using the emulator has been registered in this session file After the session name is selected the emulator will automatically be connected For details on the session file refer to section 4 4 Debugger Sessions 172 RENESAS 4 6 Ending the Emulator When using the toolchain the emulator can be exited by using the following two methods e Canceling the connection of the emulator being activated e Exiting the HEW a Canceling the connection of the emulator being activated 1 Select Debug settings from the Options menu to open the Debug Settings dialog box see figure 4 13 2 Select lt None gt or another product in the Target combo box When another product is selected the connection with that product is started after canceling the connection of the emulator being activated 3 Turn the emulator off after canceling the connection b Exiting the HEW 1 Select Exit from the File menu 2 A message box is displayed If necessary click the Yes button to save a session After saving a session the HEW exits If not necessary click the No button to exit the HEW nance Embedded Workshop x A Session has been modified do you want to save it Yes No Cancel Figure 4 21 Session has been modified Message Box 173 RENESAS 174 RENESAS Section5 Debugging This section describes the debugging operations and their related windows and dialog boxes 5 1 Setting the Environment for
290. ng the emulator the Trace Filter dialog box has the following pages Table 8 10 Trace Filter Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Selects the range for filtering Address Sets address conditions Data Sets data conditions R W Selects the type of access cycles Area Selects the area being accessed not available when a time stamp is not acquired Status Sets the status of a bus not available when a time stamp is not acquired Probes Selects the states of four probe signals not available when a time stamp is not acquired IRQ Selects the states of IRQ input signals not available when a time stamp is not acquired Timestamp Specifies the time stamp value for bus cycles only available when a time stamp is acquired The IRQ page is specific to this emulator The description is given below 365 RENESAS IRQ page Select the status of IRQ signals IRQO to IRQ7 or IRQ8 to IRQ15 are applied when IRQ7 IRQO or IRQ15 IRQ8 has been selected in Trace on the General page of the Configuration Properties dialog box respectively The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes IRQ IRQ Don t care Y IROG Dont care 7 Don t care IRO4 Dont care x IRG3 Don t care IRQ2 Dont care x IRQ1 Don t care IRGO Don t care 7 a Cancel Apply Figure 8 4 T
291. nia Options me Add File s rae REMOVE Files Pai launch estena Desugaer Ea Piada TICS Format Views Figure 7 2 Version Control Sub Menu gt To select a version control system 1 Select Version Control gt Select The dialog shown in figure 7 3 will be displayed This dialog lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the desired version control system from the Version control systems list and click the Select button The Current version control system is changed to reflect the new selection 3 Click the OK button to confirm the selection Select Version Control System 21 x Version control systems Cancel Select Current version control system None Figure 7 3 Select Version Control System Dialog 108 RENESAS Note Only those version control systems which have been installed with the HEW will appear in the Select Version Control System dialog figure 7 3 Once a version control tool is selected you will notice that the Version Control gt Configure option has now become available The next chapter discusses the usage of the custom version control system 109 RENESAS 110 RENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System The custom version control system is a configurable addition to the High performance Embedded Workshop which allows you to connect to a version control system already installed on your m
292. nment Environment settings PATH c dos c Stools SHOWALL FALSE ENV 1024 Figure 3 8 Modify Phase Dialog Environment Tab 45 RENESAS 3 3 2 Build File Phase Order If you were to select a C source file from the Workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File or press R2 you would expect the file to be compiled Likewise if you were to select an assembly source file from the workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File you would expect the file to be assembled The connection between file group and which phase s to execute is managed by the Build File Order tab of the Build Phases dialog figure 3 9 Build Phases 27 xi Build Order Build File Order File Mappings File group Phase order Compiler MyPhase C source file Figure 3 9 Build Phases Dialog Build File Order Tab The list displays all of the current phases that will be executed when the build file operation is selected upon the file group shown in the File group list box In figure 3 9 the C source file file group is selected and the Compiler and MyPhase phases are associated with it Entries in the Phase order list of the Build File Order tab are added automatically as new entries are added to the Build Order tab For example if you were to add a phase which takes C source files as input then this phase will be automatically added to the list of
293. now displayed in the Condition column of the Result list box r Statistic Analysis Default Range ltem RAV E Start wr Result End 2 aoa aw Result Condition Amont PTR Figure 6 55 Statistic Dialog Box New Condition 336 RENESAS 5 Then select Area from the Item combo box and enter RAM in the Start edit box After that click the Add button the new condition is now added to the R W WR display in the Condition column of the Result list box so that it now shows R W WR amp Area RAM This completes setting of the condition m Statistic Analysis Default Range ltem fArea 7 New Start RAM Result End E Beut Clear Result e R W WR amp Area RAM Figure 6 56 Statistic Dialog Box Condition Added 337 RENESAS 6 To start statistical analysis of the specified condition press the Result button The number of write operations that satisfy the condition and the PTR values will be displayed rm Statistic Analysis Default Range ltem Area bi Start RAM End Result RAW WR amp Area RAM 09063 09058 0905 Figure 6 57 Statistic Dialog Box Result of Analysis 7 Click the Close button to close the Statistic dialog box 8 Remove the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Clicking the right hand mouse button
294. nstructions on the screen This activates the HEW 5 After the HEW has been activated connect the emulator However it is not necessary to connect the emulator immediately after the HEW has been activated Select either of the following two ways to connect the emulator connecting the emulator after the setting at emulator activation or without the setting at emulator activation For details on the connection of the emulator refer to section 4 5 Connecting the Emulator 164 RENESAS 4 2 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the HEW is activated select Browse to another project workspace radio button and click the OK button Welcome m Options OK Create a new project workspace Cancel lkt 2 Open a recent project workspace Administration zi Figure 4 11 Welcome Dialog Box 2 The Open Workspace dialog box is displayed Select a directory in which you have created a workspace After that select the workspace file hws and press the Open button Open Wo Look in 9 sample c em sample File name sample hws Files of type Workspaces hws ba Cancel 2 Figure 4 12 Open Workspace Dialog Box 3 This activates the HEW and recovers the state of the selected workspace at the time it was saved When the saved state information of the selected workspace includes connection to the emulat
295. nted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document
296. nu Option Example 114 RENESAS 8 1 2 User menu options You can create as many user defined menu options as you like name them how you want and define their order in the menu User defined menu options do not appear on the version control toolbar gt To create a new version control menu option 1 oy Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Add button The dialog shown in figure 8 4 will be displayed 3 4 Commands are added to the menu option via the Add button See the section Defining Version Enter the name of the menu option into the Option field Control Commands later in this chapter for further information Close the Add Menu Option dialog by clicking OK Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK Add Menu Option Option MyOption Commands Modify 3 x Remove Move up Move down ores sera Figure 8 4 Add Menu Option Dialog 115 RENESAS gt To remove an existing version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be removed from the User menu options list and then click the Remove button 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK To modify an existing version control menu option 1 Select Versio
297. ny matches found will be displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window To jump to an instance of the string double click on the desired entry in the Output window 67 RENESAS 4 5 3 Replacing Text Replacing text is similar to finding text as discussed in the previous section The difference is that when the text is found you have the option to replace it with other text gt To replace text in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window 2 Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search 3 Select Edit gt Replace press CTRL H or select Replace from the editor window s local menu A replace dialog box will be displayed figure 4 4 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the replace operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 5 Enter the text that you want to replace the search string with into the Replace with field or select a previous replace string from the drop down list box 21x Find what str ing 7 Replace with rumeric 7 Replace I Match whole word only Pala bh Replace All Selection J Match case Regular expression Whole file Cancel C All open files Figure 4 4 Repl
298. o End Range Measurement Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Set a condition for measurement according to the mode being selected The parameters to be set depend on the modes The Performance Analysis window has a support function to enter the address range of a function automatically if the name of the function is entered to set an address range Entering a function name in the Input Function Range dialog box displayed by clicking the button on the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box automatically enters the address range of the function Input Function Range Function S ample Cancel Figure 5 106 Input Function Range Window Notes 1 Entering the name of an overload function or a class opens the Select Function dialog box Select a function in this dialog box For details on the dialog box refer to section 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 2 The addresses figured out are just for reference In some cases the end address of a function may be different Check the last instruction of the function in the Disassembly window to correct the value set in End Address so that it will be the address of the last instruction in general the last instruction of a function is a RTS instruction A label name or an expression can be entered instead of an address value in boxes where an address should be entered 290 RENESAS 1 Time Of Specif
299. o stop the build when a certain number of warnings are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of warnings exceed check box and then specify the warning count limit in the edit field to the right Note Irrespective of what these controls are set to the build will always halt if a fatal error is encountered In addition to specifying error and warning count limits the Build tab also allows you to request that the command line environment and initial directory of each execution should be displayed Check the appropriate check boxes as necessary 54 RENESAS 3 7 Logging Build Output If you would like to write the results of each build to file then invoke the Customize dialog by selecting Tools gt Customize and select the Log tab figure 3 19 Set the Generate log file check box and then enter the full path of the log file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Customize WORKSPDIRI SIWORKSPNAME lod gt Figure 3 19 Tools Customize Dialog Log Tab RENESAS 55 3 8 Changing Toolchain Version If two or more versions of the same toolchain are registered in the HEW you can choose a version of the toolchain on the Change Toolchain Version dialog shown in Figure To invoke the dialog select Tools gt Change Toolchain Version Choose one of the versions from the Available versions drop down list and click t
300. o which controlled directories i e where the source files are stored in the version control system Mappings between these two directory systems can be specified via the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 7 119 RENESAS Version Control Setup 21x Commands Projects General Show details for project Projecti b Details Version control directory mappings Source Director c work application project vc swapp project1 c Wwork application srce x ve swiapp src c work shared we sw shared Environment Cancel Export Import Figure 8 7 Version Control Setup Dialog Projects Tab gt To define a new mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab and the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Click the Add button that is next to the Version control directory mappings list The dialog shown in figure 8 8 will be displayed 3 Enter the source i e working directory into the Source directory field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Enter the version control directory i e controlled directory into the Version control directory Version Control Directory Mapping 21 x Source directory Je work shared gt fa Version control director
301. odule that has the Dwarf2 type debugging information is loaded Such load module is supported in H8S H8 300 C C compiler V4 0 or later 2 For details on the stack trace function refer to the online help Double click the Editor column in the sort function and set a PC breakpoint 0x00002068 void Sample sort long a 0x00002070 long t int 2 j k gap 0x00002072 gap 5 0x00002076 while gap gt 0 jf 0x00002078 fort k 0 k lt gap k 0x0000207c for i k gap i lt 10 i i gap Ox00002080 for j i gap j gt k j j gap Ox00002084 if a j gt al j gap to a i 0x000020a4 a j alitgap 0x000020a8 a j gap t else break 0x000020c0 gap gap 2 0x000020cc Figure 6 60 Source Window PC Breakpoint Setting Select Reset Go from the Debug menu e After the break in program execution select Stack Trace from the Code submenu of the View menu to open the Stack Trace window StackTrace Kind Name Value Sample sort long tutorial main PowerON_Reset trj P x Hy 0200002084 Ox0000107a 000001036 Ox0000041e See ee Figure 6 61 Stack Trace Window Figure 6 61 shows that the position of the program counter is currently at the selected line of the sort function and that the sort function is called from the tutorial function To remove the PC breakpoint double click the Editor column in the sort function again
302. of the fields on this dialog is the directory in which the new workspace will be created By default this is the root directory However if you would like to set this default directory to another location e g C Workspaces then enter the desired directory into the field or browse to it graphically via the Browse button 6 4 7 Prompt before saving session Checking this option will force the High performance Embedded Workshop into displaying a prompt before the session is saved to disk 101 RENESAS 6 5 Using an External Editor The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to use an external editor Once an external editor has been specified it will be launched when the following actions are performed e Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window e Double clicking on an entry in the Navigation tab of the Workspace window e Double clicking on an error warning in the Build tab of the Output window e Double clicking on an entry in the Find in Files tab of the Output window e Selecting the Open lt file gt option from the Workspace windows pop up menu e Clicking the Launch Editor toolbar button gt To specify an external editor 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 6 11 Options 2 xi Build Editor workspace Confirmation r Spaci
303. office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions un
304. older popup menu Ep next to an edit field into which you are about to enter a path or file you should consider how you can use a placeholder to make that path or file definition flexible e If you use several configurations then the CONFIGDIR placeholder is very useful to ensure that files can be written to and from the current configuration s directory e Wherever possible use a placeholder They can always be removed or added later so don t be afraid to experiment 377 RENESAS 378 RENESAS Appendix D I O File Format HEW formats the IO window based on information it finds in an I O Register definition file When you select a debugging platform HEW will look for a lt device gt IO file corresponding to the selected device and load it if it exists This file is a formatted text file that describes the I O modules and the address and size of their registers You can edit this file with a text editor to add support for memory mapped registers or peripherals you may have specific to your application e g registers in an ASIC device mapped into the microcomputer s address space The following describes two formats of the lt device gt IO file that supports or not the bit field D 1 File format Bit Field Not Supported Each module name must be defined in the Modules definition section and the numbering of each module must be sequential Each module corresponds to a register definition section and within the sect
305. on the Event window displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this menu to remove all the event points that have been set Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information 338 RENESAS 6 16 4 Function Calls This mechanism is used to only collect trace information on the function calls 1 Make the setting such that a break occurs at the address on the line that has p_sam gt sO a 0 within the tutorial function H 00001082 in this example for details on this refer to section 6 15 1 PC Break Function 2 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays trace information 3 Select Function Call from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window The Function Call Display dialog box will be displayed Function Call Display r Setting Enable to display trace information with function call only Enable Figure 6 58 Function Call Display Dialog Box 4 Click the Enable radio button and then the OK button Only the information on function calls is now displayed in the Trace window the Label column s right side boundary has been moved to the left in the Trace window to show the function calls Generic Trace E ioj x Label PTR
306. ons Trace Acquisition 2 x General Stop DelayedStop 1 2 3 4 m Suppress Time Stamp F I Free Trace m Clock F DIC Cycles Disabled x I Refresh Cycles Trace Events Event 10 R H 1092 address x Add Edit Sequence Delete Del All Cancel 246 Figure 5 68 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box General Page RENESAS Suppress Acquires no trace information of the specified types of bus cycle Time Stamp Sets a condition for time stamping Clock Select either from Disabled 125 ns 250 ns 500 ns 1 us 2 us 4 us 8 us 16 us or 100 us as the resolution for time stamping A time stamp has a 32 bit counter At 125 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about 9 minutes and at 100 us the maximum time is about 5 days When the counter overflows its content will be cleared to continue counting No time stamp information will be acquired when Disabled is selected Free Trace Checking this box enables the free trace mode When the free trace mode is enabled Starts acquiring the data immediately after program execution has been started Only the trace halt condition is available The range trace is unavailable and four range trace pages 1 to 4 become disabled When the free trace mode is disabled Sets the start and halt conditions of trace acquisition Trace Events Sets event points to be used as trace acquisition conditions Event
307. ont Menu Option Shortcut Remarks Debug Reset CPU Resets the target hardware and sets the PC to the reset vector address Go F5 m Starts executing the user program at the current PC Reset Go Shift F5 mi Resets the target hardware and executes the user program from the reset vector address Go To Cursor fm J e Starts executing the user program at the current PC until the PC reaches the address indicated by the current text cursor position Set PC To Cursor Sets the PC to the address at the row of the text cursor Run Launches the Run Program dialog box allowing the user to enter the PC or PC breakpoint during executing the user program Step In F11 Executes a block of user program before breaking Step Over F10 Executes a block of user program before breaking If a subroutine call is reached then the subroutine will not be entered Step Out Shift F11 im Executes the user program to reach the end of the current function Step Launches the Step Program dialog box allowing the user to modify the settings for stepping Step Auto Mode Steps only one source line when the Source window is active When the Disassembly window is active stepping is executed in a unit of assembly instructions Assembly Executes stepping in a unit of assembly instructions Source RENESAS St
308. op tutorial cpp oj x L KR K HHH HHH HHH KKK HH JE JE KKK HHH HK KKK KKKKKKE FILE Tutorial cpp DESCRIPTION Main Program E 2 dbsct c This file is generated by Hitachi Proj B sbrk c Z EEHEEHE EEE EEE E E E E JE E MEJEJE E JE E ME JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE E E EE E E 3 4 C source file E resetprg cpp ifdef _ cplusplus L sort cpp rider Tea ir endi a Dad void abort void oad ia as ifdef _ cplusplus L Tutorial abs tendif ul gt Find in Files A Version Control Read write 1 64 1 INS Z Figure 2 17 HEW Window 149 RENESAS 2 8 Communication Problems The following message box will be displayed when the emulator power is turned off or the PC interface cable is not correctly connected xxxxx 6000 Emulator 5 x 4 verification error has occurred during the transfer of a firmware file This is probably because the emulator has been turned off or another emulator has been connected Figure 2 18 Error Message For information on other errors refer to the Setup Guide for the E6000 Emulator 2 9 Other Methods for Activating the Emulator Refer to section 4 Preparation before Use 2 10 Uninstalling the Emulator s Software For details on uninstallation refer to the Setup Guide for the E6000 Emulator 150 RENESAS Section 3 E6000 Emulator Functions
309. or Bus State Trace Display Status Description CPU Prefetch PROG CPU prefetch cycles CPU Data DATA CPU data access cycles Refresh REFRESH Refresh cycles DMAG DMAC DMAC cycles DTC DTC DTC cycles Other OTHER Others 231 RENESAS Table 5 2 Area Signals Acquired by the Emulator Area Trace Display Status Description On chip ROM ROM ROM On chip RAM RAM RAM On chip I O 16bit V O 16 16 bit 1 0 On chip I O 8bit 1 0 8 8 bit I O External I O 16bit EXT 16 16 bit EXT external External I O 8bit EXT 8 8 bit EXT external DTC RAM RAM DTC DTCRAM Note The signals to indicate the bus states and areas vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 5 15 5 Opening the Event Window Select View gt Code gt Eventpoints or click the Eventpoints toolbar button m to open the Event window The Event window has the following three sheets Breakpoint sheet Displays the settings made for PC breakpoints It is also possible to set modify and cancel PC breakpoints Event sheet Displays or sets event points Trigger sheet Displays or sets trigger points 5 15 6 Setting PC Breakpoints It is possible to display modify and add PC breakpoints on the Breakpoint sheet Program Enable PC H 0000105C Tutorial cpp 42 Program Enable PC H 000010CE Tutorial cpp 53 Program Enable PC H
310. or the emulator will automatically be connected To connect the emulator when the saved state information does not include connection to the emulator refer to section 4 5 Connecting the Emulator 165 RENESAS 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation When the emulator is activated the command chain can automatically be executed It is also possible to register multiple load modules to be downloaded The registered load modules are displayed on the workspace window 1 Select Debug settings from the Options menu to open the Debug Settings dialog box Debug Settings DefaultSession he Target Options re sample Target z Default Debug Format lt none gt ba Download Modules Offset Address Form Add Remove Modify Up i Down Cancel Figure 4 13 Debug Settings Dialog Box Target Page 2 Select the product name to be connected in the Target combo box 3 Select the format of the load module to be downloaded in the Default Debug Format combo box then register the corresponding download module in the Download Modules list box 4 Click the Options tab 166 RENESAS Debug Settings Eziz DefaultSession k Target Options i sample Command batch file load timing ot target connection Command Line Batch Processing Up Down A Connect up to target on debug go I Download modules after build Cance
311. ore it 2 Click the match braces toolbar button press CTRL B select Edit gt Match Braces or select Match Braces from the local menu To check the structure of an entire file place the cursor at its start and then repeatedly invoke the match brace operation The editor will successively highlight each pair of braces in turn until there are no more to match 79 RENESAS 4 13 Editor Column Management The editor in HEW has the ability to manage columns apart from the main editor column These can be added and used by debugger feature You can choose the column to display undisplay tutorial c HE O P oj x include lt no_float h gt include lt stdio h gt include lt math h gt include lt stdlib h gt void main void void sort long a void change long a extern void srand unsigned int 0x00000a0c void main void 0x00000a16 lt long a 16 min max long j int i 0x00000a18 srand 1 0x00000a20 gt I printf t Data Input it n 0x00000a2c for i 0 i lt 10 i 0x00000a2e j rand 0x00000a36 if j lt 8 0x00000a38 j i gt 0x00000a3a ali j 0x00000a44 printf a d l1d n i a i 0x00000a62 sort a 0x00000a66 printf Sorting results n 0x00000a72 for i 6 i lt 10 i Ox00000a74 printf a d 1d n i a i M PEET T Figure 4 15 Editor Columns gt To switch off a column in all source files 1 Right click on
312. orkspaces Projects and Files Just as a word processor allows you to create and modify documents HEW allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects and similarly a project can be though of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project contains one or more files Figure 4 1 illustrates this graphically PROJECT RKSPACE PROJECT Figure 4 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Workspaces allow you to group related projects together For example you may have an application that needs to be built for different processors or you may be developing an application and library at the same time Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project is built all of its child projects are built first However workspaces on their own are not very useful we need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project before we can actually do anything 155 RENESAS 4 2 Method for Activating HEW To activate the HEW follow the procedure listed below 1 Connect the emulator to the host computer 2 Connect the user system interface cable to the connector of the emulator if you use the user system interface cable This is not necessary when you do not use the user system interface cable 3 Turn on the emulator Be sure to turn on
313. osen template name This name must be unique otherwise a duplicated template name message will be displayed and the template will not be added 3 If you want to modify an existing template use the Template name drop down menu to select which template you want to modify 4 Enter the desired text into the Template text text area You can copy text from another editor window and then paste it into this dialog using CTRL V 5 Enter the following keywords to insert special information when the template is inserted Menu Entry Placeholder Replaced With Time TIME Current time Date as DMY DATE_DMY Current date in dd mm yy form Date as MDY DATE_MDY Current date in mm dd yy form Date as YMD DATE_YMD Current date in yy mm dd form Date as Text DATE_TEXT Current date in text form Line LINE First line number of template insertion User USER Current windows user File FULLFILE Name of the file Filename FILE Name and full path of the file Project Name PROJNAME Current project name Workspace Name WORKSPNAME Workspace name Cursor position A Insertion cursor Positions the cursor in this position after template has been inserted 6 Enter the character to specify where the insertion cursor is to be placed after the template has been 78 inserted If this is not specified then the insertion cursor will be placed after the last character in the template
314. ourceSafe 1 Select the file s upon which you would like to check back into Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Check In Files toolbar button amp or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check In menu option 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users However if the check out operation was carried out by mistake or perhaps is no longer required then the operation can be undone gt To undo a check out of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s upon which you would like to undo a previous check out operation You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Undo Check Out menu option 9 2 6 Viewing the Status of a File Although files appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them Of those files which are being controlled by Visual SourceSafe some will be checked in and others will be
315. ove button Add Keyword BEI Komod aE Cancel Figure 4 13 Add Keyword Dialog When you create a new file syntax coloring will not be active as a new file does not initially have an extension new files are named arbitrarily by the editor without an extension In order to activate syntax coloring you must save the new file with a name which has one of the above extensions To disable enable syntax coloring 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Enable syntax coloring check box as necessary and then click OK 77 RENESAS 4 12 Templates When developing software it is often necessary to enter the same text repeatedly for instance when typing a function definition for loop or a comment block for a function The HEW editor allows you to specify a block of text or template which can be inserted into the currently active editor window Thus once a template has been defined it can be automatically inserted without the need to re enter it manually 4 12 1 Defining a Template gt To define a template 1 Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates select Templates gt Define Templates from the local menu press CTRL T or click on the define template toolbar button Tr The dialog shown in figure 4 14 will be displayed 2 Click Add A dialog is displayed that asks you to enter your ch
316. owse I Match case IV Search sub directories I Regular expressions Figure 4 3 Find in Files Dialog 2 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find field 3 Enter the file extensions of the files you would like to search into the In files types field If several extensions are specified be sure to separate them with a comma e g c h 4 Enter the directory in which you would like to search files into the Directory field Alternatively you may browse to the desired directory graphically if you click the Browse button 5 Ifyou would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it then check the Search sub directories check box If you just want to search the single directory specified in the Directory field then ensure that this check box is not checked 6 If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match case check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 7 Ifyou would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box 8 Click Find to begin the search A
317. ox for acquiring trace information by conditions changing the settings for filtering several times to filter the acquired trace information allows easy extraction of necessary information which is useful for analysis of data The content of the trace buffer will not be changed even when the filtering function is used Acquiring useful information as much as possible by the Trace Acquisition settings improves the efficiency in analysis of data because the capacity of the trace buffer is limited Use the filtering function in the Trace Filter dialog box To open the Trace Filter dialog box select Filter from the popup menu The Trace Filter dialog box has the following pages Table 5 6 Trace Filter Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Selects the range for filtering Address Sets address conditions Data Sets data conditions R W Selects the type of access cycles Area Selects the area being accessed not available when a time stamp is acquired Status Sets the status of a bus not available when a time stamp is acquired Probes Selects the states of four probe signals not available when a time stamp is acquired IRQ7 0 Selects the states of eight IRQ input signals not available when a time stamp is acquired Timestamp Specifies the time stamp value for bus cycles only available when a time stamp is acquired Note Items other than General Address Data
318. p RAM area size 4kB Sets the on chip RAM area to be 4 kbytes H FFE080 to H FFEFFF and H FFFFOO to H FFFF7F 8kB Sets the on chip RAM area to be 8 kbytes H FF0800 to H FF17FF H FFE080 to H FFEFFF and H FFFFO0 to H FFFF7F 10kB Sets the on chip RAM area to be 10 kbytes H FF0800 to H FF1FFF H FFE080 to H FFEFFF and H FFFFOO to H FFFF7F 16kB Sets the on chip RAM area to be 16 kbytes H FF0800 to H FF37FF H FFE080 to H FFEFFF and H FFFFOO to H FFFF7F 24kB Sets the on chip RAM area to be 24 kbytes H FF0800 to H FF57FF H FFE080 to H FFEFFF and H FFFFOO to H FFFF7F 32kB Sets the on chip RAM area to be 32 kbytes H FF0800 to H FF77FF H FFE080 to H FFEFFF and H FFFFOO to H FFFF7F 40kB Sets the on chip RAM area to be 40 kbytes H FF0800 to H FF97FF H FFE080 to H FFEFFF and H FFFFOO to H FFFF7F Pin 358 Specify the product package 100Pin Enables ports 1 to 9 and A 144Pin Enables ports 1 to 9 and A to F RENESAS Custom Device page cont Modules Check this box to validate on chip peripherals Enable DTC Uses a part of the on chip RAM as DTCRAM Enable USB Enables the Universal Serial Bus interface USB Enable IIC4 5 Enables the IC bus interface 4 5 IIC4 5 Enable IIC2 3 Enables the IC bus interface 2 3 IIC2 3 Enable IIC0 1 Enables the I C bus interface 0 1 IIC0 1 Enable MultiMediaCard Enable
319. pecified area of RAM has been accessed 3 2 2 Range Channels The range channels can be set up to be triggered on a combination of one or more of the following e Address or address range inside the range e Read or Write or either e Data with an optional mask e MCU access type e g DMAC and instruction prefetch e MCU access area e g on chip ROM and on chip RAM e A signal state on one or more of the four external probes e Delay cycles after an event The complex event system can be used to control the following functions of the emulator 152 RENESAS 3 2 3 Breaks Use breaks to interrupt program execution when a specified event or sequence of events is activated For example you can set up a break to halt execution when the program reads from one address and then writes to another address The break can also optionally be delayed by up to 65535 bus cycles 3 2 4 Timing You can set up two events and then measure the execution time of the program between the activation of the first event and second event 3 3 Hardware Features 3 3 1 Memory The emulator provides standard emulation memory as the substitute for on chip ROM memory and on chip RAM memory When a device type or device mode without an on chip ROM or on chip RAM is selected the standard emulation memory is disabled When debugging with only the emulator and the user program and data are stored in an external address space an optional SIMM memory module must
320. phases to execute when a build file operation is applied to a C source file If you don t want a certain phase to execute when Build gt Build File is selected then clear the check box to the left of the phase name in the Phase order list 46 RENESAS 3 4 Setting Custom Build Phase Options Once you have defined a custom phase you will want to specify the command line options that should be used when it is executed Each defined phase has a menu option on the Options menu To specify options for that phase select it The dialog that will be invoked depends upon whether the custom phase selected was a multiple or single phase according to the selection of phase type in figure 3 3b Debug Options Output Files Dependent Files EG hewtest a Command Ely C source file P _hewrfles Dostiwindows executables CMDLINE EXE E hewtest c Z initsct c Options f intpra c C DEE FULLFILE vecttbl c Default Options ewtest wtest2 ewtest3 E source nie Placeholder hewtest3 c initscte S Fie path name x Insert intprg c sbrk c lor Figure 3 10 Custom Options Dialog The dialog in figure 3 10 is a custom phase options dialog The implementation of which is slightly different depending on whether you are using a multiple or single shot phase On the left hand side is the project and file list It is possible to select multiple projects and files in the same way as Windows
321. process is described below gt To create a new file extension in an existing file group 1 Select Project gt File Extensions from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed figure 2 7 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 10 3 Enter the extension which you want to define into the File extension field It is not necessary to type the period character The drop list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to an existing group option and select which group you would like to add this new extension 5 Click OK to add the extension to the File Extensions list fem El g Assembly source file i Madity REMOVE Figure 2 10 Add File Extension Dialog Existing Group In addition to opening a file with the editor the File Extensions dialog allows you to associate any application with any file group so that when you double click on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace then the appropriate application is launched with the file Figure 2 11 shows the association between a word processor and the extension DOC 20 RENESAS File Extensions C list file Text editor C source file CPU information file Word pro
322. r OK Timestamp Difference 2 xj Select 2 line First PTR 32764 Second PTR fo Timestamp difference information Timestamp Difference 0000h 000min 000s 003ms 897us 875ns Get Difference Clear a EE Figure 5 93 Timestamp Difference Dialog Box Select trace records to calculate the time stamp difference Specifies the first pointer to measure the difference The pointer of the line selected on the Trace window is displayed by default Specifies the second pointer to measure the difference Displays the results of calculation Calculates the difference between the specified two points and display its result in the Timestamp Difference list Clears all the results in the Timestamp Difference list Closes the dialog box All the results in the Timestamp Difference list are cleared 275 RENESAS 5 16 14 Analyzing Statistical Information Choose Statistic from the popup menu to open the Statistic dialog box and analyze statistical information under the specified conditions Statistic 21x m Statistic Analysis Clear Set New Result End Figure 5 94 Statistic Dialog Box Statistic Analysis Setting required for analysis of statistical information Default Sets a single input value or character string Range Sets the input value or character string as a range Item Sets the item for analysis Start
323. r Registers that are mapped to the microcomputer s address space controls the on chip peripheral modules The Memory window enables you to look at data in continuous memory addresses as byte word longword single precision floating point double precision floating point or ASCII values However registers of different sizes are allocated to non continuous memory addresses in the I O memory To handle this memory the HEW has the IO window to facilitate checking and setting up of these kinds of registers 5 6 1 Opening the IO Window To open the IO window select View gt CPU gt IO or click the View I O toolbar button E Modules that match the on chip peripheral modules organize the I O register information When the IO window is first opened only a list of module names is displayed LM o Name Address Value Access l g System Control cr OOFFEDE H 8 E syscr OOFFEDES H 01 Interrupt_Controller Bus_Controller Data_Transfer_Control 1 0_Port_1 I 70 Port_3 I o_Port_4 G I 0_Port_ I 0_Port_9 I O_Port_A I 0_Port_B I 0_Port_C A TiN Dort N or gt Figure 5 28 IO Window ka HHHH HAMMAM 5 6 2 Expanding the I O Register Display To display the names addresses and values of the I O registers click the mark at the left of the module name or select the module name by clicking on it or using the cursor
324. r conditions Address Sets the start address for monitoring Size Sets the range for monitoring Access Sets the access size to be displayed in the monitor window Auto Refresh at rate Sets the interval for acquisition by monitoring 500 ms at minimum Reading the Initial Value Selects reading of the values in the monitored area when the monitor window is opened Color Sets the method to update monitoring and the attribute of colors Change Indicator Selects how to display the values that have changed during monitoring available when Reading the Initial Value has been selected No change No color change Change Color is changed according to the Foreground and Background options Gray Those data with values that have not been changed are displayed in gray Appear A value is only displayed after changed Foreground Sets the color used for display available when Change has been selected Background Sets the background color available when Change has been selected Mayfly A check in this box selects restoration of the color of those data which have not been updated in a specified interval to the color selected in the Background option The specified interval is the interval for monitor acquisition available when Change Gray or Appear has been selected Detail Sets the items specific to the emulator Not used with this emulator History Displays the previous settings Not
325. r details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help It is possible to hide any column not necessary in the Trace window Selecting a column you want to hide from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the header column hides that column To display the hidden column select the column from the said popup menu again 245 RENESAS 5 16 3 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions The capacity of the trace buffer is limited When the buffer becomes full the oldest trace information is overwritten Setting the trace acquisition condition allows acquisition of useful trace information and effective use of the trace buffer The condition is enabled by the event point to control starting stopping and ending the trace acquisition For event points refer to section 5 15 Using the Event Points The trace acquisition condition is set in the Trace Acquisition dialog box that is displayed by selecting Acquisition from the popup menu The Trace Acquisition dialog box has the following pages Table 5 4 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Pages Page Item General Sets trace acquisition conditions Stop Sets trace stop conditions without a delay Delayed Stop Sets trace stop conditions with a delay 1 to 4 Sets the range trace only available when the free trace mode is disabled 1 General page Sets trace acquisition conditi
326. r function without halting the user program The read write signal of the MCU is set as a trigger and holds the address bus and data bus values to update the value of the variable Note Although the realtime operation is retained the size and number points to be monitored are limited For the Monitor function refer to section 5 9 Displaying Memory Contents in Realtime 2 Read the memory content directly from the HEW to update the values without halting the user program since the bus mastership is owned by the emulator Note While the emulator reserves the bus mastership the realtime operation is disabled because the CPU stops operation This method is only available for accessing the on chip ROM on chip RAM and emulation memory The area used here or this method may not be available depending on the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or Enable read and write on the fly on the General page of the Configuration Properties dialog box in the online help 3 Temporarily stops the user program and reads the memory contents Note The realtime operation is disabled because the user program is stopped temporarily This method is only available for accessing the areas on chip I O DTCRAM and user memory other than those in item 2 mentioned above It is possible to recognize the method for updating the value during user program execution according to the color of the R mark
327. r user system connection 2 3 2 Plugging the User System Interface Cable Body into the Emulator Plug the cable body into the emulator taking care to insert it straight and push it firmly into place User system interface cable body User system interface cable head User system interface cable Figure 2 5 Plugging User System Interface Cable Body to Emulator 2 3 3 Plugging the User System Interface Cable Body into the Cable Head Plug the cable body into the cable head on the user system 141 RENESAS 2 4 Power Supply 2 4 1 AC Adapter The AC adapter supplied with the emulator must be used at all times 2 4 2 Polarity Figure 2 6 shows the polarity of the power supply plug 5 V outside GND inside Figure 2 6 Polarity of Power Supply Plug 2 4 3 Power Supply Monitor Circuit The emulator incorporates a power supply monitor circuit which only lights the red LED when a voltage higher than 4 75 V is supplied If this LED is not illuminated you should check the emulator voltage level An input voltage less than 4 75 V could indicate that enough current cannot be supplied to the emulator Note Use the provided AC adapter for the emulator 2 5 SIMM Memory Module E6000 emulator s optional SIMM memory modules are available which provide emulation memory for user code without needing a user system The optional SIMM memory modules are available in different memory size but all are partitioned into fo
328. race Filter Dialog Box IRQ Page Don t care Detects no IRQ input condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified IRQ input condition IRQ7 to IRQO or IRQ15 to IRQ8 Select IRQ input conditions When IRQ7 IRQO is selected as the Trace option The status of IRQ7 to IRQO from the left respectively can be selected When IRQ15 IRQ8 is selected as the Trace option The status of IRQ15 to IRQ8 from the left respectively can be selected Selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Don t care Detects no selected IRQ input condition High The status of the IRQ input is high Low The status of the IRQ input is low 366 RENESAS 8 2 Notes on Usage of the H8S 2168 E6000 Emulator There are the following notes on usage of the emulator 8 2 1 Environment for Execution of the Tutorial Program To execute the tutorial program specify Tutorial hws stored in the following directory HEW installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000 2168 Tutorial 8 2 2 T O Register Differences between the Actual MCU and the Emulator In the E6000 emulator one evaluation chip emulates several types of MCU Therefore there are some differences in I O registers between an actual MCU and the emulator Note these differences when accessing the I O registers T O port is in the input state at default The I O register contents indicate the emulator port status When t
329. rate of stepping 390 RENESAS Table G 1 HEW Commands cont No Command Name Abbreviation Function 60 SUBMIT SU Executes a command file 61 SYMBOL ADD SA Defines a symbol 62 SYMBOL CLEAR SC Deletes a symbol 63 SYMBOL LOAD SL Loads a symbol information file 64 SYMBOL SAVE SS Saves a symbol information file 65 SYMBOL VIEW SV Displays symbols 66 TCL Enables or disables the TCL 67 TIMER TI Sets or displays the timer resolution 68 TRACE TR Displays trace information 69 TRACE_ACQUISITION TA Sets or displays trace acquisition parameters 70 TRACE_BINARY_ TBC Compares a trace binary file with the current trace COMPARE information 71 TRACE_BINARY_SAVE TBV Outputs trace information into a binary file 72 TRACE_STATISTIC TST Analyzes statistic information 73 TRIGGER_CLEAR TGC Deletes the trigger output condition for EXT 2 74 TRIGGER_DISPLAY TGD Displays the trigger output condition for EXT 2 75 TRIGGER_SET TGS Sets the trigger output condition for EXT 2 76 USER_SIGNALS US Enables or disables the user signal information For the syntax of each command refer to the online help RENESAS 391 392 RENESAS Appendix H Diagnostic Test Procedure This section describes the diagnostic test procedure using the E6000 test program H 1 System Set Up for Test Program Execution To execute the test program use the following hardware do not connect the user system interface cable and u
330. ration In order to use a component with HEW it must first be registered The Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 shows all currently registered components To access it ensure no workspaces are open and then select Tools gt Administration If you attempt to access tools administration when there is a workspace open the tools administration dialog is opened but cannot be modified When HEW is installed by default any new tools are automatically registered HEW stores tool information in a tool database file By default this is created in the HEW application directory however if you are working in a network environment this directory may be set to another location It is possible to change the tool directory location gt To change the tools location 1 Select Tools gt Administration 2 Click the Modify button for the Current HEW tools database location field 3 Select the directory under which the new tool is located then click OK 4 This will switch the directory and change the tool location to the new directory It will be necessary to scan for any new tools that may be in this location this is achieved by using the scan disk or register tool functionality 84 RENESAS 5 3 Registering Components The HEW will automatically attempt to register any new components installed since the last time it was invoked However in some circumstances you may need to register components yourself 5 3 1 Searc
331. refer to section 6 15 1 PC Break Function 11 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays the following content Generic Trace E l0 x PTR Address Instruction Data R W Area Status Clock Probes NMI IRQ7 0 Timestamp Sour 00087 ffef80 0000 WR 0000h000min000s000ms738us875ns 00086 ffefs2 4lc WR 0000h000min000s000ms739us000ns 00085 ffef84 0000 WR 0000h000min000s000ms759us375ns 00084 ffef86 167e WR 0000h000min000s000ms759us500ns 00083 ffef88 0000 WR 0000h000min000s000ms779us875ns 00082 ffefsa 2781 WR 0000h000min000s000ms780us000ns 00081 ffef8c 0000 WR 0000h000min0003000ms800us375ns 00080 ffefde 446b WR 0000h000min000s000ms800us500ns 00079 ffef90 0000 WR 0000h000min000s000ms820u3875n3 00078 ffef92 794b WR 0000h000min000s000ms82lus000ns 00077 ffef94 0000 WR 0000h000min000s000ms841us375ns 00076 ffef96 l5Sfb WR 0000h000min000s000ms841lus375ns 00075 ffef98 0000 WR 0000h000min000s000ms86lus875ns Hee ffef9a 59e2 WR a eee s ft ZA Figure 6 53 Trace Window Displaying the Result If you have trouble viewing a column drag the header vertical bars below the title bar to adjust the width of the column 334 RENESAS 12 Remove the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Breakpoints window displays a popup menu Se
332. ress Starts measurement with a detected prefetch cycle in the specified start address range and then stops with a detected prefetch cycle in the specified end address range The execution count is incremented every time the program passes the end address range 294 RENESAS 4 Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Performance Analysis Properties Measurement Method PA1 unt Of Specified Range Measurement Range Name PA1 Range Access Area Range Start Address H o0000000 w Start Address H o0000000 E End Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 Access Type M Don t Care I DMAC I Refresh 7 CPU Prefetch 7 CPU Data 7 DIC m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode Prefetch Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 5 110 Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Range The range for the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Access Area Range The access range for the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Access Type The bus cycle on the access range to be measured Measures the number of times the range specified as the access range is accessed from the range specified by the start and end addresses The execution count in the ran
333. ress range has been selected in the Memory window the specified start and end addresses will be displayed Select a format from the Format combo box and enter the data value in the Data field On clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the memory range 5 5 9 Copying a Memory Area You can copy a memory area using the memory copy function Select a memory range and then Copy from the popup menu The Copy Memory dialog box is opened figure 5 23 a Cancel E Destination Eormat Byte amp 1 z P Verify Figure 5 23 Copy Memory Dialog Box 195 RENESAS The source start address and end address selected in the Memory window will be displayed in the Begin and End fields Checking the Verify check box enables copying while comparing the copy source and copy destination The copy unit can be selected in the Format combo box Enter the destination start address in the Destination field and click the OK button or press the Enter key This will close the dialog box and copy the memory block to the new address 5 5 10 Saving and Verifying a Memory Area A memory area in the address space can be saved into a disk file using the memory save function Open the Save Memory As dialog box by choosing File gt Save memory Binary v Cancel File name manualbin z El Start address jo End Address
334. rmware RAM in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of marching test for the firmware RAM in the E6000 normal completion ows the results of ecoding test for the race RAM first half in e E6000 normal ompletion adetan ows the results of arching test for the race RAM first half in e E6000 normal ompletion att 3Z3 un ows the results of ecoding test for the race RAM last half in e E6000 normal ompletion adctan Shows the results of marching test for the trace RAM last half in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of decoding test for the mapping RAM in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of marching test for the mapping RAM in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of decoding test and marching test for internal ROM and RAM in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the step execution controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion 9 A 10 A B G 11 A 12 A B c D E E 13 A B c D E F G H 14 A B c 15 A B c D E F G H T 16 A B D E Test Keybreak Boy BECAKY Si orit en stet sr aheb aa aaa aAA E OK Test Emulation RAM Hardware Break GRD BREAKS vyrryrrri reo at ar ater er shar rere aah OK NET BREAK RAAKA AEA AE S EA OK WET ROM BREAK sso sca coacoes ensue euduensisususuee ee OK Test Internal ROM
335. roblem when the tool is running an operation that might take many minutes as it is difficult to see the progress of the current execution Note Using Read Output On Fly can cause problems when using certain tools on certain operating systems If you are having problems with tools locking up or freezing in HEW then uncheck the Read Output On Fly option Click the Finish button to create the new phase By default the new phase is added to the bottom of the Build Phase Order list in the Build Order tab of the Build Phases dialog Figure 3 2 42 RENESAS 3 3 Ordering Build Phases In a standard build shown in figure 3 5 you could add a phase at four different positions before the compiler before the assembler before the linker or after the linker You may place your own custom phases or move system phases to any position in the build order It is important to remember that if the output of your custom phase can be input into another phase then the phase order must be correct if the build is to behave as intended Kaa BEGIN al o COMPILE ASSEMBLE LINK lt 0 Figure 3 5 Typical Build Process The build phase dialog provides facilities for ordering build phases via the Build Phases dialog It has two tabs which are concerned with the ordering of phases Build Order and Build File Order 43 RENESAS 3 3 1 Build Phas
336. rresponding to a Label Executing Your Program ccccsceeceeseeceeseeseeeeeeeeenees 213 5 11 1 Running from Reset 213 S112 Continuing RUH diese EEEE E S 213 5 113 Running tothe Cursor siro ioeie EE E EEE ER 213 5 11 4 Running from a Specified Address ccececeesceseeseceeeeeeeseeseeseeaeeseceeceeseaeeaeeaeenee 214 STS SINGlE Step EEE AEEA ET 215 STELO Multiple Steps sis cisssecesevassvavesssdeussvareiseseasdexs EE EEE EECA EEEE NEEE AIERT 216 Stopping Your Program jis ecsesssvincencvcesutevcvsnevecssocnsckavsteccversnnaeavarcecsveusiedenvercensovestecseunsee 217 5 12 1 Stopping the Program by the Halt Toolbar Button ccc eeeeeeseeseeteeteeeenee 217 5 12 2 Standard Breakpoints PC Breakpoints c csessseeseeeeceeceseeeeeeceeceeeeneeaeeaeenee 217 RENESAS 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 Elf Dwart2 Suppo itae a ieee ieee A a A ih de A ea ee 219 513 1 C CE Operators vives sasseecccgasencecasseeccni senses anes av nee aves cated aa 219 513 2 C C EX PresSiOMs 2 2 2 caeanscnadecestsucearsnodusessudsersieodssesevucesssvevacestectoessseegiensivenions 219 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels ceseeesceeseeceeseeseeeeceeceeeeeeeaeeseceeeeeeeeaeeaeeneees 5 13 4 Debugging an Overlay Program si Looking at Variables s ioiei ieitiiesetiseriiriviesiii eni tir Ceai AAEE E E R Eaa D141 Tooltip Wath reese ern E EE E E ONOS 54 2 Instant Wat ea aaa eE EEES NAN a SS Watch Wiid Wan A A N A
337. ry window Compare M Cancel Start Compare Format Byte amp 1 x Figure 5 26 Compare Memory Dialog Box Enter the comparison format Format the start address Begin and end address End of the source memory area and the start address Start Compare of the destination memory area If the memory block is already highlighted in the Memory window the start and end addresses will be automatically filled in when the Compare Memory dialog box is opened If there is a mismatch the address where it was found is displayed in a message box 197 RENESAS 5 5 14 Loading a Memory Area from a File A file can be loaded to the debugging platform s memory Select Load from the popup menu of the Memory window to open the Load Program dialog box Load Program Format Open Binary z Eile name Offset address prs o ooo Figure 5 27 Load Program Dialog Box Enter the file format Format and the file name File name If the load address value is to be changed enter the offset value in the offset field Offset address otherwise enter zero 198 RENESAS 5 6 Viewing the I O Memory A microcomputer contains on chip peripheral modules The exact number and type of peripheral modules differ between devices but the typical modules are a DMA controller serial communications interface A D converter integrated timer unit bus state controller and watchdog time
338. s JV Reading the Initial Value fHoooooo00C SCS fevreason J poso r Color Change Indicator M Mayfly Foreground Change i Background C M m Detail Figure 6 69 Monitor Setting Dialog Box 344 RENESAS 2 Set the items in the Monitor Setting dialog box as follows e Enter monitor in the Name edit box e Set the parameters in the Options group box as follows a Use the Locals window to refer to the address on the line where variable a which is defined within the tutorial function is allocated and enter this address in the Address edit box In this example enter H OOFFEF80 b Enter H 50 in the Size edit box c Select BYTE HEX from the Access combo box d Check the Auto refresh at rate check box and enter D 00500 e Check the Reading the Initial Value check box e Set the parameters in the Color group box as follows a Select Change from the Change Indicator combo box b Select red and white in the Foreground and Background combo boxes respectively c Check the Mayfly check box Note Depending on the operating system in use the foreground and background colors may not be selectable Monitor Setting 2 x Monitor Setting Name monitort m Options Address HOOFFE F80 Size byte H50 i Access Format BYTE HEX 7 JV Auto Refresh at rate ms p 00500 JV Reading the Init
339. s The data can be converted into different formats as shown in the third column Value The list of formats depends on the data selection The font of the Value column can be different from the font used to display the data This is useful for displaying double byte character values when the data is displayed in the Word format 5 5 3 Splitting Up the Window Display To vertically divide the Memory window display into two select Split from the popup menu and move the split up bar Moving the split up bar to the top end or bottom end of the window cancels the split up display 5 5 4 Viewing a Different Memory Area To change the memory area displayed in the Memory window use the scroll bars To quickly look at a new address use the Set Address dialog box This can be opened by choosing Start Address from the popup menu Enter the new address value and click the OK button or press the Enter key The dialog box closes and the Memory window display is updated with the data at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function 192 RENESAS 5 5 5 Modifying the Memory Contents The memory contents can be modified via the Edit Memory dialog box Move the cursor on the memory unit according to the Memory window display choice that you wish to change Either double click on the memory unit or press the Enter key The dialo
340. s Document Conventions This manual uses the following typographic conventions Table 1 Typographic Conventions Convention Meaning Menu gt Menu Option Bold text with gt is used to indicate menu options for example File gt Save As FILENAME C Uppercase names are used to indicate filenames enter this string Used to indicate text that must be entered excluding the quotes Key Key Used to indicate required key presses For example CTRL N means press the CTRL key and then whilst holding the CTRL key down press the N key gt When this symbol is used it is always located in the left hand margin The how to symbol It indicates that the text to its immediate right is describing how to do something Components Check all the components described in the component list unpacking If the components are not complete contact a Renesas sales office RENESAS Contents HEW Part 1 OVELVICW oerien AEE E AEA OES 1 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files esessesesesoesesesessesesocsesersesesosseuesreresesossevseseserossesessesesese 1 F2 The Main WMdoWe iani N EAEEREN 2 j K2 E N rA E EA Bar A EE A EAE E A T 2 122 Phe Menu BARo snr en eiea KEATEN A NRE 2 1 23 The Tool DA S E ae eee a ard a ards aed eel esau 3 1 2 4 The Workspace Window sciecscesessccdscvececeeseendadscvadscdsseedenscneca cdseveveshaonececevevetesba 5 1 2 5 Phe EGitOr Win
341. s gt Next Bookmark press F2 or select Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark from the local menu or click the next bookmark toolbar button mal To jump to the previous bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark press SHIFT F2 or select Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark from the local menu or click the previous bookmark toolbar button na gt To remove all bookmarks in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose bookmarks you want to remove is the active window 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks or select Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks from the local menu or click the clear all bookmarks toolbar button Pha 4 7 Printing a File To print a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to print is the active window 2 Select File gt Print or click the print toolbar button or press CTRL P 70 RENESAS 4 8 Configuring Text Layout The following sections detail how to set up the layout of the text within the editor windows 4 8 1 Page Set up When you print a file from the High performance Embedded Workshop editor the settings in the print dialog box affect the way in which the file is printed e g double or single sided Control over how the text is formatted on the page can also be controlled via the page set up option This allows you to specify the margins top bottom
342. s are the debugger and builder components of HEW The debugger component adds all of the menus and toolbars associated with the debugger and the builder component does the same for the build functionality The components you have registered in the system will modify the look and feel of HEW In some cases you may not have some of the menus which you can see in this manual For instance if the debugger component is not installed you will not have the Debug menu in the HEW main window 10 RENESAS 2 Build Basics This chapter explains the general functions of the HEW whilst the more advanced features can be found in chapter 3 Advanced Build Features 2 1 The Build Process The typical build process is outlined in figure 2 1 This may not be the exact build process which your installation of HEW will use as it depends upon the tools that were provided with your installation of HEW e g you may not have a compiler for instance In any case the principles are the same each step or phase of the build takes a set of project files and then builds them if all succeeds then the next step or phase is executed Ea suo Bal PI COMPILER Cc Source Files ASSEMBLER Assembler Source Files Project m LINKER Object Files Library Files Load Module Figure 2 1 Typical Build Process In the example shown in figure 2
343. s box is checked Setting Detects the specified data Value Enter the data value not available when Don t care has been checked 257 RENESAS 4 R W page Select the type of access cycles mem x Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data RAV Area ro Setting Sting JRD Cancel Apply Figure 5 78 Trace Find Dialog Box R W Page Don t care Detects no read write condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified read write condition String Select a read write condition not available when Don t care has been checked RD Read cycle WR Write cycle 258 RENESAS 5 Area page Select the area being accessed The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired mem x Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data RAW Area ro Setting String ROM Cancel Apply Figure 5 79 Trace Find Dialog Box Area Page Don t care Detects no area condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified area condition String Select an area condition not available when Don t care has been checked Note Available areas vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 259 RENESAS 6 Status page Select the status of a bus The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired
344. s removed a check mark is shown to the left of the Trim Source menu To restore the white space choose Trim Source while the check mark is shown 5 16 9 Acquiring a Snapshot of the Trace Information A snapshot can be acquired when you need to check the trace information during execution of the user program This is useful for checking time stamping or probe input signals To acquire a snapshot of trace information select Snapshot from the popup menu Trace acquisition is temporarily stopped to display a record of the latest trace information and then restarted A snapshot of trace information is only acquired during execution of the user program 5 16 10 Temporarily Stopping Trace Acquisition To temporarily stop trace acquisition during execution of the user program select Halt from the popup menu This stops trace acquisition and updates the trace display Use this method to check the trace information without stopping execution of the user program 5 16 11 Restarting Trace Acquisition To restart trace acquisition being stopped during execution of the user program select Restart from the popup menu 264 RENESAS 5 16 12 Extracting Records from the Acquired Information Use the filtering function to extract the records you need from the acquired trace information The filtering function allows the trace information acquired by hardware to be filtered by software Unlike the settings made in the Trace Acquisition dialog b
345. s the MultiMediaCard interface Enable MS Enables the Memory Stick interface Enable CF Enables the Compact Flash interface Enable PWM14 0 Enables the 14 bit PWM timer0 Enable PWM14 1 Enables the 14 bit PWM timer1 Enable SCI2 Enables the serial communication interface 2 SCI2 Enable SCI1 IrDA Enables the serial communication interface 1 SCI1 IrDA Enable LPC Enables the LPC interface Enable Timer Connection Enables the timer connection 8 1 5 Memory Mapping Function This emulator supports four blocks of user memory These can be 256 kbyte or 1 Mbyte each depending on the SIMM fitted Each block can be placed in the address space on a 256 kbyte or 1 Mbyte boundary The memory mapping has a granularity of H 40 D 64 bytes Each 64 byte block can be set to the emulation memory or external memory and can be access prohibited write protected or read write Note The minimum unit available for mapping is a block 64 bytes 8 1 6 Status Window Selecting View gt CPU gt Status or clicking the Status Display toolbar button displays the Status window The Status window has three sheets This emulator displays the following items 1 Memory Sheet Selecting the Memory tab on the Status window displays this sheet Table 8 3 Memory Sheet Items Item Column Status Column Target Device Configuration Displays memory mapping System Memory Resources Displays the memory resource of the emulator
346. s the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real time e Auto Update All Marks all variables with bold Rs and updates all variables in real time e Delete Auto Update Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels realtime update e Delete Auto Update All Marks all variables with outlined Rs and cancels realtime update Modifying the Radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the popup menu Saving the Watch Window Contents in a File To save the contents of the Watch window choose Save As from the popup menu the Save As dialog box opens It allows the user to specify the name of a file and to save the contents of the Watch window in the file If the Append check box is selected the window contents are appended to the existing file and if it is not selected the existing file is overwritten Opening a Memory Window The contents of the memory area to which the selected variable is assigned can be displayed in the Memory window Choose Go To Memory from the popup menu the Set Address dialog box opens showing the information start address end address and size of the selected variable as default Clicking OK opens the Memory window 228 RENESAS 5 14 4 Locals Window The local variables and their values can be displayed in the Locals window Opening the Locals Window To open the Locals window choose View gt
347. s were changed by which users The custom version control support provides two placeholders User login name USERNAMEB and User login password PASSWORD When the command is executed these placeholders will be replaced with the current settings in the General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 13 Version Control Setup Figure 8 13 Version Control Setup Dialog General Tab 124 RENESAS In order to give the USERNAME and PASSWORD fields a value you will first need to login If you have not logged in before a command is executed which uses either of these placeholders then you will be prompted to do so before the command can be executed gt To login i e specify a user name and password 1 Click the Log in button The dialog shown in figure 8 14 will be displayed 2 Enter your user name into the User name field 3 Enter your password into the Password field 4 5 Click OK to set the new user name and password If there is any inconsistency between the two Re type your password again into the Confirm password by retyping it below field versions of the password which you entered then you will be requested to type your password again User name p Hank Cancel Password i Confirm password by retyping it below p Figure 8 14 Log in Dialog 125 RENESAS 8 4 Controlling Execution The General
348. scribes how to download a program and view it as source code or assembly language mnemonics Note After a break has occurred the HEW displays the location of the program counter PC In most cases for example if an Elf Dwarf2 based project is moved from its original path the source file may not be automatically found In this case the HEW will open a source file browser dialog box to allow you to manually locate the file 5 2 1 Downloading a Program A load module to be debugged must be downloaded To download a program select the load module from Debug gt Download or select Download from the popup menu opened by clicking the right hand mouse button on the load module in Download modules of the Workspace window Note Before downloading a program it must be registered to the HEW as a load module For registration refer to section 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation 181 RENESAS 5 2 2 Viewing the Source Code Select your source file and click the Open button to make the HEW open the file in the integrated editor It is also possible to display your source files by double clicking on them in the Workspace window 000001038 void tutorial void Ox00001044 long a 10 long j int i class Sample p_sam P_sam new Sample for i 0 i lt 10 i jf j fandi if j lt D J j ali 3 0x00001070 p_san gt sort a 0x0000107a Pp_sam gt change a 0200001082 p_sam gt s0 a 0 p_sam gt s
349. scription On chip ROM ROM ROM On chip RAM RAM RAM On chip I O 16bit V O 16 16 bit I O On chip I O 8bit 1 0 8 8 bit I O External 16bit EXT 16 16 bit EXT external External 8bit EXT 8 8 bit EXT external DTC RAM RAM DTC DTCRAM Note The signals to indicate bus states and areas are used to set the Bus Area condition of the event point They can also be acquired as the trace information The bus state signals are also used to set the condition not to acquire the trace Suppress option and in the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement mode for measuring the hardware performance Access Type option 8 1 9 Monitoring Function This emulator incorporates the bus monitoring circuit as the standard which thus allows a use of the monitoring function to update the content of memory without affecting the realtime operation 8 1 10 Trigger Points This emulator incorporates the bus monitoring circuit as the standard which thus allows a use of trigger points that can be set on the Trigger sheet in the Event window 362 RENESAS 8 1 11 Trace Information Selecting View gt Code gt Trace or clicking the Trace toolbar button displays the Trace window Trace information that can be acquired by the emulator and trace information items to be displayed are as listed below PTR Cycle number in the trace buffer When the most recent record is record 0 earlier record numbers go backwards
350. secniesucecdesaivctesersdestennsancescsucecestievalsissueutentsvuceerstenteeenonseens 152 P PE Brea EEE E E E E 153 324 MNE erise aE A SEO EEVA ALETA IEEE E NEARNE EES 153 33 Hardware PEAtULES oiei eeit ATRE EEEE EEEREN VE AAKER A 153 33A MEMO e erea EEE E EE AE EE EEE 153 332 ClO KS eiie i teii LE EE EEE AN E 154 eNe e RLODES wis EEEE EEA A T ETE 154 34 Stack Trace Punt Oni prsy ro eriy arvar rrara E NEPE OTONA TUNE EO 154 3 5 Online Help onenn nran aa TENE ENEE ETETE EENE EES EEEE TEE TE 154 Section 4 Preparation before Use siseerissieniireiiriei ni ieena 155 4 1 Workspaces Projects atid Files vc je svecessesencdsgisvesccdibenecsglsvavcsansenedsteseesccahsvescadsoeescssibanecds 155 4 2 Method for Activating HEW c cscssscsccsececceeeeeeeeeceaceseeseesececeeeaeesessecaeeeeeeeeaeeaeente 156 4 2 1 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Not Used ccececeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseees 157 4 2 2 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Used ccceseecesceeseereeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeneees 161 4 2 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace cscsescseesceseeseeseeseeeeceseeseeaeeseceeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 165 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation cccccesesccseeseeseeseeeeceeeeseesecseceeceeecaecseceeeeeeeaecaeeeeereeee 166 4A Debugger Sessions innen r oeste E E VE EAEE EA E E Ea 168 AAA Selecting a Sesion nieee aei SEEE AE AEE ENE EAAS 168 4 4 2 Adding and Deleting Sessions ccecesceseeseeseesecseeeeceeceeeeseeaeeseceeeeeeeeeaeeae
351. selected The timer for execution time measurement has a 40 bit counter At 20 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about six hours and at 16 us the maximum time is about 200 days When the counter overflows the maximum time possible for measurement will be displayed with prompt gt that indicates that the counter has overflowed Enable read and write on the fly When this box is checked it is possible to access the target system memory while the user program is running Do not check this check box if you require realtime emulation Break on access error When this box is checked a break the user program stops occurs if your program accesses a guarded memory area or writes to a write protected area Enable internal ROM area write When this box is checked writing to the on chip ROM area is enabled For the result of writing see the Extended Monitor window User VCC Threshold Sets the voltage level for the user system User Signals When this box is checked the reset NMI standby and bus request signals from the user system are enabled Driver Displays the E6000 driver that is currently installed Change driver in start up When this box is checked selection of a driver will be available next time the emulator is connected Note The items that can be set in this dialog box vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications
352. ser system Fe BBs I E6000 emulator HS2168EPI61H Host computer The E6000 PC interface board Select one interface board or card from the following depending on the PC interface specifications PCI bus interface board HS6000EICO1H or HS6000EICO2H PCMCIA interface card HS6000EIP01H LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H USB interface adapter HS6000EIU01H Install the E6000 PC interface board in the host computer and connect the supplied PC interface cable to the board Connect the PC interface cable to the emulator Connect the supplied AC adapter to the emulator Initiate the host computer to make it enter DOS prompt command input wait state Turn on the emulator power switch 393 RENESAS H 2 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using Test Program Insert the CD R HS2168EPI61SR supplied with the emulator into the CD ROM drive of the host computer move the current directory to lt Drive gt Diag with a command prompt and enter one of the following commands according to the PC interface board used to initiate the test program 1 PCI bus interface board HS6000EICO1H or HS6000EICO2H gt TM2168 PCI RET 2 PCMCIA interface card HS6000EIP01H gt TM2168 PCCD RET 3 LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H gt TM2168 ELN RET 4 USB adapter HS6000EIU01H gt TM2168 USB RET The HEW must be installed before the test program is executed Be sure to initiate the test program from lt Drive gt Diag Do not initiate it from
353. ses 0 not used l not used 2 not used 3 not used Program Name Memory Loaded Area ator_cp Tutorial abs H oooo00000 H oo0000003 H 00000400 H 00000425 H 00001000 H OOOO1SFS H ooo00z000 H 00002139 Target Device Configuration Figure 5 29 Status Window The Status window has three sheets e Memory sheet Contains information about the current memory status including the memory mapping resources and the areas used by the currently loaded object file e Platform sheet Contains information about the current status of the debugging platform typically including CPU type and mode and run status e Events sheet Contains information about the current event breakpoint status including resource information Note The items that can be set in this dialog box vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 200 RENESAS 5 8 Reading and Displaying the Emulator Information Regularly Use the Extended Monitor window to know the changing information on the emulator no matter the user program is running or halted Note The Extended Monitor function does not affect the execution of the user program since it monitors the user system or the signal output from the MCU in the emulator by using the emulator s hardware circuit 5 8 1 Opening the Extended Monitor Window Selecting View gt CPU gt Extended Moni
354. sesesesesiseeeieeeeesesesrsiereseetsrsrseesesrrseseset 26 2 6 Building a Project sicccccvovssevivessseessedesvascscsanavscvatessescsavczsscatesscordsvavassaccsacsvasevasevecazcssausavtes 2 6 1 Building a Project 2 6 2 Building Individual Files serons i E 27 2 6 3 Stopping a Build 28 2 6 4 Building Multiple Projects 28 2 6 5 The Output Window ec eeeeeeeeeereeteeeeeneeee 28 2 6 6 Controlling the Content of the Output Window cceccseecceseeseeseeneeeeeeeeeneeneees 29 2 7 File Dependencies ana aces svcvesses scence dsves ANE E AAE EAE EEEE KTORE 30 2 8 Configuring the Workspace WindOW sccscceseeseeseeseeseeeseeseeseesecaeeeeeeaeesecaeeeeeneeaeeatenes 30 2 8 1 Show Dependencies under Each File cececeeseesseseeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeaeeaeens 30 2 8 2 Show Standard Library Includes 0 eceeesceeesseeseeseeseeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeees 31 28 3 SHOW File Pains aain wists setiesssaaacterdsestasiniectaesstebasartonssidraanverayeniaei aan 2 9 Setting the Current Project 2 10 Inserting a Project into a Workspace ccceccecceseeseeseeseceeceseeseeseeseceeeeeeseesecaeceeeeeeaeeaeente 2 11 Specifying Dependencies between Projects 2 12 Removing a Project from a Workspace 2 13 Loading Unloading a Project to from a Workspace cecceceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeneeeseeseeaeeaee 34 2 14 Relative Projects Paths in the Workspace cccescesceseeseeeeeeseeseesececeeeee
355. sful selecting Find Next from the popup menu will move to the next found item 254 RENESAS 1 General page Set the range for searching mem x Status Probes IRQ 0 General l Address Data RAw Area Tr I Upward search Start PTR 32767 End PTR po o Oo O Cancel Apply Figure 5 75 Trace Find Dialog Box General Page Trace search range Sets the range for searching Not designation Searches for information that does not match the conditions set in other pages when this box is checked Upward search Searches upwards when this box is checked Start PTR Enters a PTR value to start a search End PTR Enters a PTR value to end a search Note Along with setting the range for searching PTR values to start and end searching can be set in the Start PTR and End PTR options respectively 255 RENESAS 2 Address page Set an address condition I x Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data RAW Area Setting a HFFEF8O Figure 5 76 Trace Find Dialog Box Address Page Don t care Detects no address when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified address Value Enter the address value not available when Don t care has been checked 256 RENESAS 3 Data page Set a data condition Figure 5 77 Trace Find Dialog Box Data Page Don t care Detects no data when thi
356. signed long F main Ox00000012 L start D 103 Ox00003ffa short Figure 5 96 Stack Trace Window The following items are displayed Kind Indicates the type of the symbol F Function P Function parameter L Local variable Name Indicates the symbol name Value Indicates the value address and type of the symbol 5 17 2 Viewing the Source Program Select a function and choose Go to Source from the popup menu to display in the Source window the source program corresponding to the selected function 278 RENESAS 5 17 3 Specifying the View Choose View Setting from the popup menu to open the Stack Trace Setting dialog box which allows the user to specify the Stack Trace window settings Figure 5 97 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Nest level Specifies the level of function call nesting to be displayed in the Stack Trace window Display symbol Specifies the symbol types to be displayed in addition to functions Display Radix Specifies the radix for displays in the Stack Trace window 279 RENESAS 5 18 Displaying Memory Contents as an Image The memory contents can be displayed as an image in the Image View window 5 18 1 Opening the Image View Window Choose View gt Graphic gt Image or click the Image toolbar button to open the Image Properties dialog box shown in figure 5 98 Image Properties r Color Information Mode
357. sition will be stopped when that event is satisfied only available when Enable has been selected 248 RENESAS 3 Delayed Stop page Sets trace stop conditions It is possible to set trace stop conditions with and without delay with both allowed simultaneously 2 E gi Ts f iii fz ELE EE Figure 5 70 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Delayed Stop Page Stop With Delay Defines a trace stop condition Enable Checking this box enables a trace stop Delay Count Sets the delay count in bus cycles range 1 to 65535 This function allows you to acquire a number of trace records after any of the specified events occur Events Lists the event points where trace acquisition conditions have been set If the box that corresponds to an event point is checked trace acquisition will be stopped when that event is satisfied only available when Enable has been selected 249 RENESAS 4 1 to 4 pages Sets a range trace This is only available when the free trace mode is disabled Select either of the following four modes Disabled Point to Point Range and Event e Disabled Disables a range trace Trace Acquisition Figure 5 71 Range Trace Setting Disabled 250 RENESAS e Point to Point Acquires trace information in the specified range cquisition General Stop Delayed Stop 1 2 3 4 r Conditions C Disabled Point to Point C Range C E
358. specifying how a version control system is to be used To configure it select Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed figure 8 1 111 RENESAS Version Control Setup Status of Filefs Figure 8 1 Version Control Setup Dialog Commands Tab 112 RENESAS The Commands tab contains two lists of menu options The first list System menu options and toolbar buttons represents those menu options which always appear on the version control sub menu These menu options also have an associated toolbar button on the version control toolbar The second list User menu options represents those additional user defined options which are added to the bottom of the version control sub menu Figure 8 2 shows the structure of the version control sub menu Options Select Configure ity Add File s is Remove File s System Get File Defined amp Check Out File s Option B Check In File s Status of File s u History of Filefs Defined Undo Check out of File s Option Figure 8 2 Version Control Sub Menu 8 1 1 System Menu Options and Toolbar Buttons In order to invoke commands from the toolbar or the system defined options of the Tools gt Version Control sub menu you must first define the associated commands that should be executed when they are activated The names of the options and their intended act
359. ssembly window at address of event point The Go to Source menu is only available when one event point that has the corresponding source file is selected 243 RENESAS 5 16 Viewing the Trace Information The emulator acquires the results of each instruction execution into the trace buffer as trace information and displays it in the Trace window The conditions for the trace information acquisition can be specified in the Trace Acquisition dialog box Since trace information in bus cycles is acquired by the hardware circuit and stored in the trace buffer the realtime operation is retained The Trace window displays the content of the trace buffer which records up to 32 768 bus cycles from the last program run and is always updated 5 16 1 Opening the Trace Window To open the Trace window choose View gt Code gt Trace or click the Trace toolbar button 5 16 2 Acquiring Trace Information When the emulator does not set the acquisition condition of the trace information all bus cycles are acquired by default without any condition free trace mode In the free trace mode trace acquisition is started with the execution of the user program and stopped by halting the user program The acquired trace information is displayed in the Trace window Instruction Data R U Area Status Clock Probes NMI IRQ7 0 Time Source al OFFEFCO ER 2D L 1 31111111 05568 000402 0Of RD ROM PRO
360. ssion Information e To save a session Select File gt Save Session 171 RENESAS 4 5 Connecting the Emulator Select either of the following two ways to connect the emulator a Connecting the emulator after the setting at emulator activation Select Debug settings from the Options menu to open the Debug Settings dialog box It is possible to register the download module or the command chain that is automatically executed at activation For details on the Debug Settings dialog box refer to section 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation When the dialog box is closed after setting the Debug Settings dialog box the emulator will automatically be connected b Connecting the emulator without the setting at emulator activation Connect the emulator by simply switching the session file to one in which the setting for the emulator use has been registered s ample High performance Embed Eae ccs PONTE Josaag 4saaloralleplesiewsziplia asgalfrr fics cs os 8 ts spa fection J X jeesaa ES00O Er 5 8 C source file E dbsetc 2 intpra c resetprg c sample c sbrk c Find in Files A Version Control Figure 4 20 Selecting the Session File In the list box that is circled in figure 4 20 select the session name including the character string that has been set in the Target name text box in figure 4 10 New Project Step 8 dialog box The setti
361. sssesatessazsccsavassscavedscavasvaresavatavevaazeiaees 279 Displaying Memory Contents as an Image 280 5 18 1 Opening the Image View Window cceceecseseeseeteeeeceeeeeeeseesececeeeeeeeaeeaeeneee 280 5 18 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents ccecceceeseeseeseeeeeeeeereeeeeeneees 282 5 18 3 Updating the Window Content cceceeceeeeeeeeseeeeceeceeeeseeaeeseceeeeeeeeaeeaeeneees 283 5 18 4 Displaying the Pixel Information 0 0 00 cceceecceseeseeseeseeeeceeeeeeeaeesecneeeeceeeeaeeaeeneees 283 Displaying Memory Contents as Waveforms cccecceceeseeseeteeeeceeceeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeens 284 5 19 1 Opening the Waveform View Window ccccccescssseseeeeeseeeseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeseeaeeaeees 284 RENESAS 5 19 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents cceceesceseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenee 285 5 19 3 Updating the Window Content 0 ccseceeseesceseeeeeeeeeeesceseeseeseeseeeeceeeeaeeaeeaeenes 285 519 4 Zoom IN DIS Play isiro iea iaasa cease EO E EAA OA EE 285 519 5 Zoom Out Display viacesevssececasssncesavevevecessenccsasseans dah svss sssieonsedkvasecsevseanseiaveshssevestes 285 5 19 6 Resetting the Zoom Display visicccssscvecccsevencccgssvevccussvncecdenvesee sioeneesenseensessenecsouseetes 285 5 19 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification cssseseesceseeseeeeeseeeeceeceseeseeeceeeeeeaeeaeeaeenee 285 5 19 8 Setting the Horizontal Scale sssi ececescsesceeeesceseeseee
362. sult in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property damage NOTE emphasizes essential information lt z ENESAS AWARNING Observe the precautions listed below Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Do not repair or remodel the emulator product by yourself for electric shock prevention and quality assurance 2 Always switch OFF the E6000 emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS 3 Always before connecting any CABLES make sure that pin 1 on both sides are correctly aligned 4 Supply power according to the power specifications and do not apply an incorrect power voltage Use only the provided power cable ENESAS CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
363. t Program ccesceseeseeseeseeeseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenees xii RENESAS HEW Part RENESAS RENESAS 1 Overview This chapter describes the fundamental concepts of the High performance Embedded Workshop It is intended to give users who are new to Windows extra help filling in the details that are required by later chapters 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Just as a word processor allows you to create and modify documents the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects and similarly a project can be though of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project contains one or more files Figure 1 1 illustrates this graphically PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT RKSPACE Figure 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Workspaces allow you to group related projects together For example you may have an application that needs to be built for different processors or you may be developing an application and library at the same time Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project is built all of its child projects are built first However workspaces on their own are not very useful we need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project
364. t hexadecimal R W Whether access was read RD or write WR Area Memory area being accessed ROM RAM 8 or 16 bit I O 8 or 16 bit EXT external or DTC RAM not available when a time stamp is acquired 244 RENESAS Status Clock Probes NMI IRQ7 0 Timestamp Source Label Bus status during this cycle DTC operation PROG prefetch Data CPU data access cycle Refresh refresh cycle or DMAC DMAC cycle not available when a time stamp is acquired Number of clock cycles in bus cycle as 1 to 8 To indicate more clock cycles OVR is displayed not available when a time stamp is acquired A 4 bit binary number showing the four probe pins in the order of Probe 4 Probe 3 Probe 2 and Probe 1 from the left not available when a time stamp is acquired Status of the NMI input not available when a time stamp is acquired Status of eight IRQ inputs not available when a time stamp is acquired Time stamp of the record Time stamps start from zero each time the user program is executed The timer resolution depends on the time stamp clock rate selected in the trace acquisition only available when a time stamp is acquired Source program Label information that corresponds to the address if defined Note Items other than PTR Address Instruction Data R W Area Status Probes Timestamp Source and Label vary according to the emulator in use Fo
365. t is obvious that arguments must be specified correctly otherwise the version control tool executed will not function as intended However it is also important when using custom version control support to specify the arguments in a flexible way as a single version control command can be applied to more than one file To facilitate this the Arguments field has a placeholder button refer to appendix C Placeholders for an in depth discussion of placeholders which when clicked on invokes a pop up menu of available placeholders figure 8 6 An explanation of each placeholder and how their values are derived can be found in table 8 2 Arguments Field Placeholders User login name User login password Version control directory Comment File path name Filename File leaf File extension File directory Configuration directory Project directory Workspace directory Temp directory Command directory Windows directory Windows system directory Workspace name Project name Configuration name Figure 8 6 Arguments Field Placeholder Pop up Menu 118 RENESAS Table 8 2 Arguments Field Placeholders Placeholder Value and How its Determined User login name Current user login General tab User login password Current user password General tab Version control directory Virtual version control mapping Projects tab Comment Comment specif
366. t s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_sam gt sS a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 Ox000010d2 p_sam gt s a 7 0x000010de p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010e8 Pp_sam gt s9 a 9 bear Ox000010f 6 delete p_sam X wf x Name Value Type H ER a 0x00ffef80 flong 10 R 0 H OOOOO fG 0x0Offef80 long R I H 000015fb 0x0Offef84 long R 2 H 0000167e 0x00ffef88 long R 3 H 00001 cfb 0x00ffef8c long R 4 H 00002781 Ox00ffef30 long R 5 H 0000354 Ox00ffef94 long R 6 H 000041c6 Ox00ffef98 long R 7 H 0000446b Ox00ffefSc long R 8 H 000059e2 0x0Offefa0 long R 9 H 0000794b Ox00ffefad long i H 000a R4 int Break Stepping Completed Read write 45 64 Figure 6 23 HEW Window Step Out The data of variable a displayed in the Watch window is sorted in ascending order 316 RENESAS 6 12 3 Executing the Step Over Command The Step Over executes a function call as a single step and stops at the next statement of the main program e To step through all statements in the change function at a single step select Step Over from the Debug menu or click the Step Over button in the toolbar P Figure 6 24 Step Over Button ce Embedd 5 Eile Edit Yiew Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help jOsHa S seea 0Ta epas AEREE I 2a ll Debug H8S_2237_E6000 Session85_2237_ 6000 x hauale
367. t the top right of each window when not maximized gt To close all windows at once Select Window gt Close All 64 RENESAS 4 4 Editing a File The High performance Embedded Workshop editor supports standard editing functionality This is available through the usual methods i e the menu toolbar and keyboard shortcuts and is additionally supported via a pop up menu or local menu that is local to each editor window To invoke it place the pointer in an open window and click the right mouse button Table 4 1 outlines the basic operations that are provided by the editor Se Table 4 1 Basic Editing Operations Operation Effect Action Cut Removes highlighted text and places it on the Click the cut toolbar button Windows clipboard Select Edit gt Cut Select Cut local menu Press CTRL X Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Click the copy toolbar button Windows clipboard Select Edit gt Copy Select Copy local menu Press CTRL C Paste Copies the contents of the Windows Click the paste toolbar button clipboard into the active window at the Select Edit gt Paste position of the insertion cursor Select Paste local menu Press CTRL V Delete Removes highlighted text it is not copied to Select Edit gt Clear the Windows clipboard Select Clear local menu Press Delete Select All Selects i e highlights the entire contents of Select Edit gt Select All heractive Window Select
368. t works Figure 4 7 Welcome Dialog Box 161 RENESAS 2 Creation of a new workspace is started The following dialog box is displayed Workspace Name sample Cancel Project Name sample Browse Directory EH ew2 sample CPU family H8S H8 300 z Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Project type E Assembly Application BT Demonstration es E6000 Emulator Application E E6000 Emulator Assembly Application Ts E6000 Emulator Empty Application M b Figure 4 8 New Project Workspace Dialog Box Workspace Name edit box Enter the new workspace name Here enter test Project Name edit box Enter the project name When the project name is the same as the workspace name it needs not be entered Directory edit box Displays the directory in which a workspace will be created Click the Browse button to select a directory or enter the name of a directory in the Directory edit box CPU family combo box Select the target CPU family Tool chain combo box Select the target toolchain name when using the toolchain Otherwise select None Project type list box Select the project type to be used Notes 1 For the E6000 emulator the following project types are the same Application and E6000 Emulator Application Empty Application and E6000 Emulator Empty Application 2 When Demonstration is selected in the emulator note the followin
369. tab figure 2 19 3 Set the three check boxes in the Show group as follows Command line controls whether the command line is shown as each tool is executed Environment controls whether the environment is shown as each tool is executed Initial directory controls whether the current directory is shown as each tool is executed Options 24 x Build Editor Workspace Confirmation r Errors and warnings Stop build if the no of warnings exceed i Show T Command line l Environment I Initial directory Figure 2 19 Options Dialog Build Tab 29 RENESAS 2 7 File Dependencies A typical project will contain dependencies between files for example one C file may include one or more header files In complex projects source files will include or depend upon others and this can quickly become difficult to manage However the HEW provides a dependency scanning mechanism whereby all files in a project are checked for dependencies Once complete the project window will display an up to date list with all the project file dependencies gt To update a project s dependencies Select Build gt Update All Dependencies or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Update All Dependencies from the pop up menu Initially the dependencies for all files are contained within the Dependencies
370. tempting to find out the structure of C C code blocks which are opened with and closed with To use it select the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it and then click this button For further information on brace matching refer to the Brace Matching section later in this chapter 61 RENESAS T Insert Template To insert a pre defined template at the current cursor position click this toolbar button The Insert Template dialog box will be invoked Select a template name and then click OK For further information on templates refer to the Templates section later in this chapter mm Toggle Bookmark The High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides standard bookmark capabilities To set a bookmark select the line to mark and click this button a green mark will then appear in the blank on the left side of the editor window To remove a bookmark select the line to remove a bookmark and click this button the mark in the blank on the left side of the editor window will disappear For further information on bookmarks refer to the Bookmarks section later in this chapter 4 2 3 Search Toolbar Buttons Enn Find in Files To search several files for a text string then click this button All find results are displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window For further information refer to the Searching and Navigating Through Files section later in this chapter R Fin
371. tents of the window will be blank Ls ox Name Value Type Ra Ox c000024 intl10 R 0 H o0000000 0x7c000024 nt R fi H00000000 0x7c000028 int R 8 H o0000000 Ox c00002c fnt R 3 H 00000000 0x7c000030 fint R 4 H 00000000 0x c000034 fint R 6 H00000000 0x7c000038 fint R 6 H o0000000 0x7c00003c fint R D H o0000000 0x7c000040 iint R Bl H o0000000 0x7c000044 fint R 9 H00000000 Ox7c000048 int R max H00000000 0x c00004c tint _ Figure 5 52 Watch Window This window allows the user to view and modify C C source level variables The contents of this window are displayed only when the debugging information available in the absolute file abs includes the information on the C C source program The variable information is not displayed if the source program information is excluded from the debugging information during optimization by the compiler In addition the variables that are declared as macro cannot be displayed The following items are displayed Name Name of the variable Value Value and assigned location The assigned location is enclosed by Type Type of the variable 224 RENESAS The R mark shows that the value of the variable can be updated during user program execution For updating of the content of the variable that has been registered in the Watch window there are the following three methods 1 Use the Monito
372. the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable to the Environment tab To remove an environment variable select it and then click the Remove button Environment Yariable 21x Variable ee Value Placeholder c dos c mytools c Wwindows c temp popup menu Figure 5 7 Environment Variable Dialog 88 RENESAS 5 6 Uninstalling Components The HEW provides a built in uninstaller method which can remove unregistered components gt To uninstall a component 1 2 Select Tools gt Administration Click on the uninstaller button The Uninstall HEW Tool dialog is invoked figure 5 8 Uninstall HEW Tool E 21 xl s Close Select the directory in which to begin the search for tools ew20 exe win debug Browse JV Include subfolders Start Located Tools which can be uninstalled Component Version Installation Directory Uninstall ad Search Status Idle de Figure 5 8 Uninstall HEW Tool Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Check the Include subfolders check box if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start
373. the single address Up to 12 event points can be set by using event channels and range channels in the event detection system When the condition is satisfied event points are also used as the start end conditions for execution time measurement or trace acquisition in addition to halting the user program Several event points can be used to set more complex conditions Note Event points acquire the data test conditions and execute an action such as halting the user program by the hardware circuit of the emulator Therefore a delay of several cycles will occur from the satisfaction of the condition to the execution of an action 5 15 3 Event Detection System In addition to the 4 range channels the emulator also has 8 event channels The event channels have more functions such as sequencing or counting than the range channels Event Channels Ch1 to Ch8 The emulator has 8 event channels The event channel can be defined as a combination of one or more of the followings e An address or an address range e Outside of an address range e A read a write or either e Data with a mask specification e Bus state e Area e The value of four external probe signals e The number of times the event has occurred e The number of delay cycles after the event has occurred A maximum of eight points can be used as a combination in a sequence The emulator is activated or halted by an occurrence of the previous event in each sequence
374. the editor window Click the Define Column Format menu item The Global Editor Column States dialog is displayed The Check status shows whether the column is enabled or not If it is checked it is enabled if the check box is gray this means that in some files the column is enabled and in other files it is not 5 Click OK for the new column settings to take effect FW be gt To switch off a column in one source files 1 Right click on the editor window which you wish to remove a column from and the editor pop up is displayed 2 Click the Columns menu item and a cascaded menu item appears Each column is displayed in this pop up menu If the column is enabled it has a tick next to its name Clicking the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not 80 RENESAS Global Editor Column States V Source Address Figure 4 16 Global Editor Column States Dialog 81 RENESAS 82 RENESAS 5 Tools Administration You control the components which can be used by the High performance Embedded Workshop via the Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 which is invoked via Tools gt Administration Modification of the Tools Administration dialog box is only possible when no workspace is open while only reference is possible when a workspace is open Tools Administration E k Registered components Component a Toolcha
375. the emulator will match the voltage supplied to the user target in all cases i e even when the user V is below the operating voltage for the MCU You must be careful not to select an invalid clock frequency When the emulator is connected to the user system and the user system is turned off the voltage follower circuit output voltage level is 0 V In this case the emulator will not operate correctly You can set a user V lt threshold in the range Vcc max 0 V by using the emulator configuration dialog box If the user V drops below this threshold User System Voltage in the Extended Monitor window will display Down otherwise OK is displayed BN ee he SE SE eee i eS User Vcc level threshold OV n al User Vcc ee derek 3 threshold D own og Ecce 3 3 V E6000 Vcc level oV The user system interface cable is not connected Figure 2 10 Voltage Level Monitoring Example for Vcc 3 3 V 145 RENESAS 2 7 System Check When the software is executed use the procedure below to check that the emulator is connected correctly Here use the workspace for a tutorial provided on the product Refer to section 2 9 Other Methods for Activating the Emulator for the other activating method to create a new project or use a workspace for the HEW of the old version 1 Connect the emulator to the host computer 2 Connect the user system interface cable to the connector of the em
376. the program or hardware errors that you are trying to debug occur under a certain restricted set of circumstances For example a hardware error may only occur after a specific area of memory has been accessed Tracking down such problems using simple PC breakpoints can be very time consuming The emulator provides a very sophisticated system for giving a precise description of the conditions you want to examine called the complex event system This allows you to define events which depend on the state of a specified combination of the MCU signals The complex event system provides a unified way of controlling the trace break and timing functions of the emulator 3 2 1 Event Channels The event channels allow you to detect when a specified event has occurred The event can be defined as a combination of one or more of the followings e Address or address range e Address outside range e Read or Write or either e Data with an optional mask e MCU access type e g DMAC and instruction prefetch e MCU access area e g on chip ROM and on chip RAM e A signal state on one or more of the four external probes e A certain number of times that the event must be triggered e Delay cycles after an event Up to eight events can be combined into a sequence in which each event is either activated or deactivated by the occurrence of the previous event in the sequence For example you can cause a break if an I O register is written to after a s
377. the right hand mouse button on the Event window to display a popup menu Select Delete All from this menu to remove all of the event points that have been set Click the right hand mouse button on the Trace window to display a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information 331 RENESAS 6 16 2 Displaying a Trace when Time Stamping is Available The following procedure is for obtaining and displaying with time stamps trace information on cycles of writing to memory locations in the specified address range 1 Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a popup menu Select Acquisition from this menu to display the Trace Acquisition dialog box see figure 6 41 Trace Acquisition dialog box 2 Register the address range for trace acquisition as an event condition Click the Add button in the Trace Events group box on the General page to display the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box see figure 6 42 Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box 3 Click the Range radio button in the Address group box on the General page of the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Use the Locals window to refer to the address on the line where variable a which is defined within the tutorial function is allocated H OOFFEF80 in this example and enter this address in the Address Lo edit box Then enter an address which is H 27 added to that entered in the
378. the user system before supplying power to the emulator if you use the user system 4 Activate the HEW from Programs in the Start menu 5 The Welcome dialog box is displayed m Options OK Wd Cancel ikt 2 Open a recent project workspace Administration eS Browse to another project workspace Figure 4 2 Welcome Dialog Box Create a new project workspace radio button Creates a new workspace Open a recent project workspace radio button Uses the current workspace and displays the history of the opened workspace Browse to another project workspace radio button Uses the current workspace this radio button is used when the history of the opened workspace does not remain In this section we describe the following three ways to start up the HEW e Create a new project workspace a toolchain is not in use e Create a new project workspace a toolchain is in use e Browse to another project workspace The method to create a new workspace depends on whether a toolchain is or is not in use Note that this emulator product does not include a toolchain Use of a toolchain is available in an environment where the H8S H8 300 series C C compiler package has been installed For details on this refer to the manual attached to the H8S H8 300 series C C compiler package 156 RENESAS 4 2 1 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Not Used 1 In the Welcome dialog bo
379. then build the projects and configurations you have chosen If you want to build all the projects which you choose you click the build all button Results from the build are displayed in the build window in the same way as the normal build process Build Multiple x Jhewtest Debug hewtest Release Jhewtest2 Debug _ Jhewtest2 Release hewtest3 Debug poe Clhewtest3 Release Chewtest4 Debug hewtest4 Release Figure 2 18 Build Multiple Dialog 2 6 5 The Output Window When a tool executes i e compiler assembler linker etc its output is displayed in the Output window If any of the tools produce any errors or warnings then they are displayed along with the source file name and the line number at which the error is located To quickly locate a specific bug double click on a given error warning to invoke the current editor 28 RENESAS 2 6 6 Controlling the Content of the Output Window It is often useful to display low level information such as the command line options that are being applied to a file during a build The HEW allows you to specify whether or not you want such options displayed in the Output window during a build build all or build file operation via the Tools Options dialog gt To view or hide extra information during a build 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed 2 Select the Build
380. through this editor The problem is that the command above is specific to c files filel c What we want to be able to do is to tell the HEW to use the editor specified but to open the file that I have chosen at that time To do this you can replace the specific name of the file for a general placeholder i e c myedit myeditor exe FULLFILE Now whenever the HEW launches the editor with a file it knows that it has to replace FULLFILE with the file you have selected C 2 Inserting a Placeholder Placeholders can only be entered into three specific edit fields within the HEW figures C 1 C 2 and C 3 There are four ways a placeholder can be entered In the first example place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder and then select the required placeholder from the popup menu to the right of the edit field File fe project mpyproject ouput file out gt Figure C 1 Placeholder Popup Menu In the second example select the required placeholder other than Custom directory from the combo box and specify a sub directory relative to the directory shown by the placeholder If you select Custom directory specify an absolute directory path in the Sub Directory field Relative to Configuration directory Sub Directory pwi ooo Figure C 2 Placeholder Combo Box and Sub Directory Field Note The Sub Directory field may be written as the File path field In th
381. ting Duplicate Labels In some languages for example C overloaded functions a label may represent more than one address When such a label name is entered in a dialog box the HEW will display the Select Function dialog box to display overloaded functions and member functions Function 2 xi Select Function Name Set Function Name Sanple sot ona shat i mE Counter All Function Select Function Set Function E Functions E Functions fo Functions Cancel Figure 5 46 Select Function Dialog Box Select overloaded functions or member functions in the Select Function dialog box Generally one function can be selected at one time only for setting breakpoints multiple functions can be selected This dialog box has three areas Select Function Name Displays the same name functions or member functions and their detailed information Set Function Name Displays the function to be set and their detailed information Counter All Function Displays the number of same name functions or member functions Select Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Select Function Name list box Set Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box Selecting a Function Click the function you wish to select in the Select Function Name list box and click the gt button You will see the selected function in the Set Function Name list box To sel
382. ting voltage and frequency specifications refer to the MCU s hardware manual RENESAS 349 7 2 User System Interface All user system interface signals are directly connected to the MCU in the emulator with no buffering except for those listed below which are connected to the MCU through control circuits e NMI RESET e MD2 MDI MDO e XTAL e EXTAL e STBY 7 2 1 Signal Protection All user system interface signals are protected from over or under voltage by use of diode arrays except for the AVcc and Vref The Vcc pins except for the AVcc pin at the head of the user system interface cable are connected together The emulator monitors the voltage level of the Vcc pins and displays the power supply status in the Extended Monitor window 7 2 2 User System Interface Circuits The interface circuit between the MCU in the emulator and the user system has a signal delay of about 8 ns due to the user system interface cable And high impedance signals will be pulled up to the high level by pull up resistors When connecting the emulator to a user system adjust the user system hardware to compensate for propagation delays Default O User system interface cable Figure 7 1 Default User System Interface Circuit 1 P10 P17 P20 P27 P30 P37 Vcc 10kQ AN MCU User system TAN interface cable Figure 7 2 Default User System Interface Circuit 2 350 RENESAS Mode Pins MD2 MD1 and MD
383. tion 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help Select Reset Go from the Debug menu to stop the tutorial program at breakpoints The program runs then stops at the condition specified under Ch1 RENESAS 000001038 0x00001044 0x00001046 0Ox0000104e 0x00001050 0x00001058 0x0000105a 0x0000105c Ox00001070 Ox0000107a 0x00001082 0x0000108a 0x00001096 0x000010a2 0x000010ae 0x000010ba 0x000010c6 0x000010d2 0x000010de 0x000010ea 0x000010f6 0x000010fc void tutorial void long a 10 long j int i class Sample p_sam p_sam new Sample for i 0 i lt 10 i j rand aft Oye n cates P ali j p_sam gt sort a P_sam gt change a p_sam gt sO0 a 0 p_sam gt sl a 1 p_sam gt s2 a 2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 p_sam gt s4 a 4 p_sam gt sS a 5 Pp_sam gt s6 a 6 p_sam gt s7 a 7 p_sam gt s8 a 8 p_sam gt s9 a 9 delete p_sam Figure 6 38 Source Window at Execution Stop The Status window displays the following contents H8 2237 E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Emulator PCI Card Driver H8S 2237 Clock source Break Run status Cause of last break Complex Event System Event Time Count Run Time Count Main 1OMHz Sub 32kHz 00h OOmin 00s O000ms OO0us O00ns 00h OOmin 00s O000ms 738us 750ns Figure 6 39 Displayed Contents of the Status Window Refer to the Watch window for t
384. to empty the trace buffer that stores the trace information If several Trace windows are open all Trace windows will be cleared as they all access the same buffer 5 16 6 Saving the Trace Information in a File Select Save from the popup menu to open the Save As file dialog box which allows the user to save the information displayed in the Trace window as a text file A range can be specified based on the PTR number saving the complete buffer may take several minutes Note that this file cannot be reloaded into the Trace window Note In filtering of trace information the range to be saved cannot be selected All the trace information displayed in the Trace window after filtering will be saved Select a filtering range on the General page in the Trace Filter dialog box if you want to save the selected range For details on the filtering function refer to section 5 16 12 Extracting Records from the Acquired Information 263 RENESAS 5 16 7 Viewing the Source Window The Source window corresponding to the selected trace record can be displayed in the following two ways e Select a trace record and choose View Source from the popup menu e Double click a trace record The Source or Disassembly window opens and the selected line is marked with a cursor 5 16 8 Trimming the Source Choose Trim Source from the popup menu to remove the white space from the left side of the source When the white space i
385. to specify an address as an event condition for the tracing of read write cycles and display the trace is described below 1 Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a popup menu Select Acquisition from this menu to display the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition Figure 6 41 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box 326 RENESAS 2 Register an address as an event condition for trace acquisition Click the Add button in the Trace Events group box on the General page to display the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Breakpoint Event Properties General Bus Area Signals Action Type Address 21xi C PCBre Address Hi ak Don tCare Address Range AddressLo 0000000 r Data Compare Direction I Compare J Use Mask C Read Value j ahi C White o Byte oe Word tsk DT Ether Figure 6 42 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box 3 Use the Source window to refer to the address on the line that has a i j within the tutorial function and enter this address in the Address Lo edit box of the Address group box on the General page of the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box In this example enter H 0000105c This address has thus been set Click the OK button to close the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Breakpoint Event Properties General Bus
386. tor or clicking the Extended Monitor toolbar button E displays this window The interval of updating the display is approximately 100 ms during user program execution or 1 000 ms while breaking respectively xtended Monitor Item Value User Standby Inactive User NMI Inactive User Reset Inactive User Wait Inactive User System Voltage OK User System Voltage Dow User Cable Not Connected Running status Break Ready ROM Write No Target Mode Target Clock No Clock Target Sub Clock No Clock Figure 5 30 Extended Monitor Window 201 RENESAS 5 8 2 Selecting Items to be Displayed Selecting Properties from the popup menu displays the Extended Monitor Configuration dialog box Extended Monitor Configuration Update millsecond Bunning 100 Break 1000 Cancel Settings User Standby Inactive User NMI Inactive User Reset Inactive User Wait Inactive User System Voltage OK User System Voltage2 Down User Cable Not Connected Running status Break Ready Figure 5 31 Extended Monitor Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box allows the user to set the items to be displayed in the Extended Monitor window Note The items that can be set in this dialog box vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 202 RENESAS 5 9 Displaying Memory Contents in Realt
387. trol User password Version control VCDIR Virtual version control directory COMMENT Comment Version control LINE Line number of an error warning RENESAS 375 For example the placeholders will be expanded as shown in table C 2 Table C 2 Placeholder Expansions Example Placeholder Expanded placeholder example FULLFILE c new workspace project file src FILEDIR c new workspace project FILENAME file src FILELEAF file EXTENSION src WORKSPDIR c new workspace WORKSPNAME workspace PROUJDIR c new workspace project PROJECTNAME project CONFIGDIR c new workspace project debug CONFIGNAME debug HEWDIR c hew TCINSTALL c new toolchains hitachi sh 51 1 TOOLDIR c new toolchains hitachi sh 51 1 TEMPDIR c Temp WINDIR c Windows WINSYSDIR c Windows System EXEDIR v ive win32 USERNAME JHARK PASSWORD 214436 VCDIR c project is mapped to x vc project COMMENT Please Enter Comment dialog is invoked LINE 12 In table C 2 we are assuming that a file path is c new workspace project file src a workspace named workspace is located at c hew workspace a project named project is located at c hew workspace project a configuration named debug has a configuration directory located at c new worksp
388. ts corresponding to __main in byte size e Select Memory from the CPU submenu of the View menu to enter _main in the Start address edit box and f in the End address edit box respectively and to select Byte in the Format combo box Set Add Begin OK _main End ff Cancel Format Byte x1 Figure 6 12 Set Address Dialog Box e Click the OK button The Memory window showing the selected area of memory is displayed Value 55 02 40 FC O1 00 6D F3 U m 01 20 6D F4 79 37 OO 28 m y OF F3 1A 80 5E 00 20 00 Biaketstce svete OF 86 19 44 5E OO 11 EE aio DD ose is 17 FO OF 85 4 C 02 17 B5 eeeeLaae 17 F4 OF CO 10 70 OA BO p 01 00 69 85 OB 54 79 24 i Ty 00 OA 4D EO OF B5 OF D1 steels ace OF EO 5E O00 20 68 OF D1 Seon toe OF EO 5E O00 20 D6 O1 00 A 69 50 01 00 69 EO 01 00 AP od 6F 50 00 O04 O1 00 GF EO oP 0 oo O04 01 00 GF 50 00 08 waa Ae 01 00 F EO 00 O8 O1 00 taOs oio 6F 50 00 Oc O1 00 GF EO oP 0 o0 oc O1 00 6F 50 00 10 0P 01 00 6F EO OO 10 01 00 Sie Disc STE xl Figure 6 13 Memory Window 309 RENESAS 6 10 Watching Variables As the user steps through a program it is possible to watch that the values of variables used in the user program are changed For example set a watch on the long type array a declared at the beginning of the program by using the following procedure e Click the left of displayed
389. tting Shift Ctrl E V monitor2 H OOFFB0D8 monitor H OOFFEF80 Windows Select Figure 5 34 Monitor Setting List 5 9 7 Managing the Monitor Window Selecting Display gt CPU gt Monitor gt Windows Select displays the Windows Select dialog box In this window the current monitoring condition is checked and the new monitoring condition is added edited and deleted in succession Selecting multiple monitoring conditions enables a temporary stop of update hiding and deletion Name Address y monitor H OOFFBOD8 y monitori H OOFFEF80 Edit Lock Refresh Hide Remove Close Figure 5 35 Selection in the Monitor Window 206 RENESAS Add Adds a new monitoring condition Edit Changes the settings of the selected Monitor window disabled when selecting multiple items Lock Refresh Unlock Refresh Automatically updates or stops updating the display of the selected Monitor window Hide UnHide Displays or hides the selected Monitor window Remove Removes the selected monitoring conditions Close Closes this dialog box 207 RENESAS 5 10 Looking at Labels Symbol information is included in the debugging information which is used when the HEW links the user program source code to the actual code in the memory Symbol information is also included in the debug object file This information is a list of names th
390. ulator 3 Turn on the emulator 4 Activate the HEW from the Programs in the Start menu figure 2 11 it ae Windows Update Programs nal fa Accessories r EA High performance Embedded Workshop 2 Help a High performance Embedded Workshop 2 Read Me EG High performance Embede 2 Documents Settings Search Help Run g E Shut Down Figure 2 11 Start Menu Note If LAN Driver is not selected at installation Tools is not displayed 146 RENESAS 5 The Welcome dialog box is displayed eg Cancel 2 Open a recent project workspace Administration a Browse to another project workspace Figure 2 12 Welcome Dialog Box To use a workspace for the tutorial select the Browse to another project workspace radio button and click the OK button When the Open Workspace dialog box is opened specify the following directory HEW installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000 xxxx Tutorial After the directory has been specified select the following file and click the Open button Open Workspace 2 x Look in Tuori ss e a e ES Debug_H8S_2237_E6000_Emulator_CP Source File name Tutorial hws Files of type Workspaces hws hd Cancel 4 Figure 2 13 Open Workspace Dialog Box RENESAS 147 When no compiler package or that of a different version is instal
391. um of 2 ms in reading 256 bytes 25 MHz emulation memory 3 3 2 Clocks The clock can be specified as emulator internal clock or target clock The frequencies that can be specified as the emulator internal clock depend on the MCU For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product 153 RENESAS 3 3 3 Probes External probes 1 and 2 EXT1 and EXT2 can be connected to the emulator to make use of signals on the user system for break or trace The signal for external probe 1 can be set as the condition for the event detection system depending on the low or high level Since the signal for external probe 2 outputs high level when the trigger setting 1 to 4 condition is matched in the bus monitor function the signal can be used for the trigger condition for such as an oscilloscope 3 4 Stack Trace Function The emulator uses the stack s information to display the name of the calling function for a function at which the program counter is currently pointing This function can be used only when the load module that has the Dwarf2 type debugging information is loaded For the usage of this function refer to section 6 17 Stack Trace Function 3 5 Online Help An online help explains the usage of each function or the command syntax that can be entered from the command line window Select Emulator Help from the Help menu to view the emulator help 154 RENESAS Section 4 Preparation before Use 4 1 W
392. up menu The Function Call Display dialog box will be displayed Function Call Display 2 x I Setting Enable to display trace information with function call only amp Disable OK Cancel Figure 5 95 Function Call Display Dialog Box Setting Selects whether or not to extract function calls Enable Extracts function calls Disable Does not extract function calls When Enable is selected only the cycles that include function calls are extracted for display from the acquired trace information The content of the trace buffer is not changed by extraction of function calls Using this function for the result of the free trace or the trace information that includes function calls allows the user to know the order of function calls 277 RENESAS 5 17 Viewing the Function Call History The Stack Trace window shows the function call history 5 17 1 Opening the Stack Trace Window To open the Stack Trace window choose View gt Code gt Stack Trace or click the Stack Trace toolbar button i E Stack Trace Value F func3 short Ox00000094 P param 3 Ox00003ffa Ox00003fd8 short L local _ 3 D 3 Ox00003fd4 unsigned long F fune2 short Ox00000072 P param 2 0x00003ffa Ox00003fe4 short L local 2 D 2 Ox00003fe0 unsigned long F funci short 0x0000003e P param 1 Ox00003ffa Ox00003ff0 short L local 1 Dti Ox00003fec un
393. ur equal banks These banks can be relocated on page boundaries anywhere in the user area Note that however some products do not support the SIMM memory module 2 5 1 Optional SIMM Memory Module Configuration The configuration of the optional SIMM memory module is controlled by the mapping RAM Opening the Memory sheet of the System Status window allows you to check which optional SIMM memory module if any is installed and also allows the four banks to be relocated to the required addresses from the Memory Mapping dialog box 142 RENESAS 2 6 Hardware Interface All signals are directly connected to the MCU in the emulator with no buffering with the exception of those listed in section 7 Hardware Specifications Specific to This Product 2 6 1 Signal Protection on the emulator All signals are over under voltage protected by use of diode arrays The only exceptions being the AV and Vref All ports have pull up resistors except for analog port All V pins on the cable head assembly are connected together with the exception of the AV pin and are then monitored by the emulator to detect powered user system presence 2 6 2 User System Interface Circuits The interface circuit between the MCU in the emulator and the user system has a signal delay of about 8 ns due to the user system interface cable and it includes pull up resistors Therefore high impedance signals will be pulled up to the high level When connecting the e
394. ut file or files that will be produced by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the output files are of a less recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e input files have been modified since the output file or files were last produced If the files are up to date then the phase will not be executed Note If no output files are specified the phase will execute regardless Options Output Files Dependent Files Output files CONFIGDIR utilities lib Modify Remove ih Cancel Figure 3 12 Custom Options Output Files Tab gt To add an output file 1 Click Add The Add Output File dialog will be invoked figure 3 13 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click OK to add this output file to the list Placeholder popup menu 2 x File gt Browse Cancel Figure 3 13 Add Output File Dialog 49 RENESAS gt To modify an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to modify 2 Click Modify The Modify Output File dialog which is the same as figure 3 13 except the title will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required and then click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list gt To remove an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to remove 2 Click the R
395. utorial program and click the OK button Register PC Value Hoon Set As Cancel Whole Register Figure 6 6 Register Dialog Box PC 304 RENESAS 6 6 Executing the Program Execute the program as described in the following e To execute the program select Go from the Debug menu or click the Go button on the toolbar ee Figure 6 7 Go Button While the program is executing the current address bus value and the operating state of the MCU are displayed on the status bar The program will be executed up to the breakpoint that has been inserted and an arrow will appear on the Editor column in the Source window to show the position that the program has halted with the message Break PC Break in the status bar Note When the source file is displayed after a break a path of the source file may be inquired The location of the source file is as follows HEW installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000 2633 Tutorial source The file path differs according to products If necessary replace 2633 with another name 0x00001038 void tutorial void Ox00001044 long a 10 long j int i class Sample p_san Ox00001046 P_sam new Sample 0x0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i jf 0x00001050 j rand 0x00001058 ifia lt lt O34 0x0000105a j j 0x0000105c ali j 0x00001070 p_sam gt sort a 0x0000107a p_sam gt change a 0
396. v sre Dependencies Z file2h Navigation tab Projects tab E Projects lt Navigation Figure 1 12 Workspace Window Projects Tab The Navigation tab provides jumps to various textual constructs within your project s files What is actually displayed within the navigation tab depends upon what components are currently installed Figure 1 13 shows ANSI C functions See chapter 2 Build Basics for more information on the Workspace window maini hw_initialise log_error WORD er maini SCI0_ISR_ERI 9 SCI0_ISR_RXI lt SCIO_ISR_TEI lt SCIO_ISR_TxI lt SCl_ClearBuffers SCI_GetBlock lt SCl_GetRxQueSize w i CE Projects lt Navigation Figure 1 13 Workspace Window Navigation Tab To allow the Workspace window or the Output window docking Click the right mouse button anywhere inside the Workspace window or the Output window Then a pop up menu will be displayed If Allow Docking is checked docking is allowed otherwise docking is not allowed Select Allow Docking to check or uncheck it When Allow Docking is checked you can dock a window a toolbar or a menu bar to the edge of the HEW main window or to the edge of another docked window Also if Allow Docking is checked you can float them above the other HEW windows or outside the HEW main windo
397. vent Start Address H 00001 07E Stop ddress F o0001 084 M Cyclic Figure 5 72 Range Trace Setting Point to Point Start Address Address where trace acquisition starts Stop Address Address where trace acquisition stops Cyclic When this box is checked the event sequencing is configured so that the events reset themselves which causes tracing to be restarted when the start event occurs after the stop event Sets the event points that are required to start or stop trace acquisition when the start or end address is accessed respectively Point to Point mode is an easy method to set up the event mode The event to start or sop trace acquisition is an access to a single address Select Cyclic to continue acquisition of the trace information only in the specified address range Note This function automatically configures a sequence of event points Note however that an unexpected result may arise In such cases modify the setting of the sequence in the Event Sequencing dialog box 251 RENESAS e Range Only acquires the trace information that satisfies the specified condition Trace Acquisition Figure 5 73 Range Trace Setting Range Range Event Selects an event point for which a trace acquisition condition has been set Edit Changes the setting for the selected event point Only acquires trace information from all bus cycles that matches the condition set
398. w Figure 1 14 i shows a docked Workspace window and figure 1 14 ii shows a floating Workspace window RENESAS E demo E G demo B Projecti Project Files Project E cOsre a Project Files B E c0 src E sh hwcfg c main c sh_intv sre 5 sh_hwofg c sh_intv sre Navigation tab Projects tab i E Projects Figure 1 14 Workspace Window Docked and Floating When the Workspace window or the Output window is docked it has a control bar as shown in figure 1 15 If you want to move a docked window click and drag its control bar to the new location Close button x Figure 1 15 Control Bar of Docking Window gt To dock the Workspace window or the Output window Allow Docking must be checked on the pop up menu of the window to dock the Workspace window or the Output window The pop up menu will be displayed when you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the window Then you have two ways to dock the window 1 Double click on the control bar of a floating window or 2 Drag the title bar of a floating window and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar or toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating window
399. while being called from the specified range When either from one to four points is selected the maximum and minimum time in the specified range can be measured 292 RENESAS Notes 1 When Time Out is selected in the Start Point To End Point Measurement mode the execution time will not be measured correctly 2 When Time Out and Count are selected satisfaction of either of these options stops execution of the user program performance break 3 Only channel 1 can be used for Time Out and Count Use other channels if you do not want to select Time Out or Count in the Start Point To End Point Measurement mode 293 RENESAS 3 Start Range To End Range Measurement Performance Anal Properties Measurement Method PA1 Start Range To End Range Measurement Range Name PA1 Start Range End Range Start Address H o0000000 Z Start Address H o0000000 E End Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 5 109 Start Range To End Range Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Start Range The start range for the Start Range To End Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address End Range The end range for the Start Range To End Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End add
400. x that is displayed when the HEW is activated select Create a new project workspace radio button and click the OK button yy Open a recent project works Figure 4 3 Welcome Dialog Box 157 RENESAS 2 Creation of a new workspace is started The following dialog box is displayed Workspace Name sample Cancel Project Name sampe Browse Directory C Hew2 sample CPU family H8S H 8 300 Tool chain l None Project type Debugger only E6000 Emulator Figure 4 4 New Project Workspace Dialog Box Workspace Name edit box Enter the new workspace name Project Name edit box Enter the project name When the project name is the same as the workspace name it needs not be entered Directory edit box Displays the directory in which the workspace will be created Click the Browse button to select a directory name or enter a directory name in the Directory edit box Other list boxes are used for setting the toolchain the fixed information is displayed when the toolchain has not been installed 158 RENESAS 3 Make the required setting for the toolchain When the setting has been completed the following dialog box is displayed 2 xi Miyyyy E6000 Emulator GPU 2000 Micox E6000 Emulator CPU 2600 Target type all Targets x lt Back Finish Cancel Figure 4 5 New Project Step 7 Dialog Box The target for the
401. x then check the Display dialog box for file status check box or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window 133 RENESAS 134 RENESAS Emulator Debugger Part RENESAS RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 1 Features The breakpoint memory map performance and trace can be set through the dialog box Intuitive user interface Online help Common display and operability Supported host interfaces The PCI interface PC card PCMCIA interface USB interface or LAN interface can be used for connecting to the host computer Realtime emulation Realtime emulation of the user system is enabled at the maximum operating frequency of the CPU Excellent operability Using the HEW enables user program debugging using a pointing device such as a mouse The HEW enables high speed downloading of load module files Various debugging functions Various break and trace functions enable efficient debugging Breakpoints and break conditions can be set by the specific window trace information can be displayed on a window and command line functions can be used Memory access during emulation During emulation the memory contents can be read and modified 135 RENESAS 1 2 Warnings CAUTION READ the following warnings before using the emulator product Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST
402. x00001082 p_sam gt sO0 a 0 0x0000108a p_sam gt sl a 1 0x00001096 Pp_sam gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 p_san gt s3 a 3 0x000010ae p_san gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_san gt s5 a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 p_sam gt s7 a 7 0x000010de p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea p_sam gt s9 a 9 OxO000010f6 delete p_san Ox000010fc Figure 6 8 Source Window Break Status 305 RENESAS The user can see the cause of the break that occurred last time in the Status window e Select Status from the CPU submenu of the View menu After the Status window is displayed open the Platform sheet and check the Status of Cause of last break H8s Z2237 E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Emulator PCI Card Driver CPU H8572237 Mode Clock source Main 10MHz Sub 32ZkHz Run status Break Cause of last break PC Break Event Time Count 00h OOmin 00s O00ms OOOus 000ns Run Time Count 00h OOmin 00s O00ms 929us 6Z5ns Figure 6 9 Status Window Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 306 RENESAS 6 7 Reviewing Breakpoints The user can see all the breakpoints set in the program in the Event window e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu The Event window is displayed Select the Breakpoint sheet
403. y fx Wweswishared Figure 8 8 Version Control Directory Mapping Dialog 120 RENESAS To modify an existing mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Select the mapping to be modified from the Version control directory mappings list and then click the Modify button The dialog shown in figure 8 8 will be displayed 3 Make the necessary changes to the two directories and then click OK to confirm the edits 2 To remove an existing mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Select the mapping to be removed from the Version control directory mappings list and then click the Remove button Once the mappings have been defined you can use the Version control directory placeholder VCDIR to represent the directory in which the project file is stored Consider the scenario shown in figure 8 9 Here are three directories which are mapped from a shared version control drive X to a local drive where the development is being done C LOCAL C Mapped To NETWORK X C Z C work application project1 X ve sw app project1 E E C work application src X ve sw app src m C work shared
404. y your alternative in the Options dialog box which can be invoked via the Tools gt Option menu option For further details on how to use and configure the editor refer to chapter 4 Using the Editor 1 2 6 The Output Window The Output window by default has four tabs on display The Build tab shows the output from any build process e g compiler assembler and so on If an error is encountered in a source file then the error will be displayed in the build tab along with the source file name and line number To quickly locate a problem double click on the error to jump to the source file and line Lex Build A Debug A Find in Files A Version Control Figure 1 17 Output Window The Debug tab shows the output from any debugger process Any debug component that needs to display information will send its output to this window The Find in Files tab displays the results of the last Find in Files action To activate find in files select the Edit gt Find in Files menu option the toolbar button For further details on how to use find in files refer to chapter 4 Using the Editor The Version Control tab displays the results of version control actions The tab is only displayed if a version control system is in use For further details on version control refer to chapter 7 Version Control 1 2 7 The Status Bar The status bar displays information as to t
405. you can perform upon the windows are typical of most Windows applications and they can be found under the Window menu e Window gt Cascade Arrange all open windows so that they overlap with the top left of each window visible e Window gt Tile Horizontally Arrange all open windows in sequence horizontally so that they occupy the entire editor window with no overlapping edges e Window gt Tile Vertically Arrange all open windows in sequence vertically so that they occupy the entire editor window with no overlapping edges e Window gt Arrange Icons Line up all minimized windows at the bottom of the editor window e Window gt Close All Close all open editor windows The files within the editor can be displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files gt To show files in notebook 1 Select Tools gt Options The Tools Options dialog box will be displayed Select the Editor tab 2 Set the Show files in notebook check box as appropriate 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 4 2 1 The Editor Toolbars The editor has four related toolbars Editor Search Bookmarks and Templates They provide a shortcut to the functions of the editor which you will use most often The following sections describe each buttons function 60 RENESAS 4 2 2 Editor Toolbar Buttons Li New File The new file

H8S/2168 E6000 Emulator Users Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents